key to - Authentic Business Systems

key to - Authentic Business Systems
QUICK INSTALLATION GUIDE<G116-8626>
Optimum Environmental Conditions
Permissible and recommended temperature and humidity
ranges are as follows:
Permissible Range
Recommended range
The machine must be level within 5 mm, 0.2" both front to rear
and left to right.
Power Source
Connect the power cord to a power source with the following specifications:
❒ 220-240V, 50/60Hz, 4.5A or more
Space Required for Installing
Leave enough space around the printer. This space is necessary to operate the printer. The recommended (or minimum)
space requirement is as follows:
ZKGH010E
A: 10 cm (4 inches) or more
B: 10 cm (4 inches) or more
C: 100 cm (39.4 inches) or more
D: 10 cm (4 inches) or more
Note
❒ To avoid possible build-up of ozone, locate this
machine in a large well ventilated room that has
an air turnover of more than 30 m3 /hr/person.
❒ When you use this machine for a long time in a
confined space without good ventilation, you may
detect an odd smell. To keep the workplace
comfortable, we recommend you keep it well
ventilated.
Check the contents of the box according to
the following list. If one or some items are missing, please contact your sales or service representative.
Important
❒ The interface cable is not included in the box.
Make sure that the interface cable you use, is
appropriate for your computer.
Quick Installation Guide (this sheet)
Setup Guide
Maintenance Guide
CD-ROM “Printer Drivers and Utilities”
CD-ROM “Display-Version Manuals (HTML)”
CD-ROM “Print-Version Manuals (PDF)”
Power Cable
Paper Tray Cover
AGN100S
Printer (including a starter toner cartridge)
Additional Documentation
Remove the plastic bag. Lift the printer and move
it to the place where you want to install it.
When lifting the machine, use the inset grips on both sides. Otherwise the machine could break or cause injury if dropped.
AGN300S
Remove the orange adhesive tape.
Important
❒ Lower the machine slowly and carefully to
prevent trapping your hands.
Warning
• Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner
dust is flammable and might ignite when exposed
to an open flame.
• Disposal should take place at an authorized dealer
or an appropriate collection site.
• If you dispose of the used toner cartridges yourself, dispose of them according to local regulations.
• Do not store toner, used toner, or toner containers in a place with an open flame. The toner might
ignite and cause burns or a fire.
Caution
• Keep toner (used or unused) and the toner cartridge out of reach of children.
• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty
of water and move into a fresh air environment.
Consult a doctor if necessary.
• If your skin comes into contact with toner or used
toner, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap
and water.
• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush
immediately with large amounts of water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor if
necessary.
• Avoid getting toner on your clothes or skin when
removing a paper jam or replacing toner. If your
skin comes into contact with toner, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and water.
• If toner gets on your clothing, wash with cold water. Hot water will set the toner into the fabric and
may make removing the stain impossible.
• Our products are engineered to meet the highest
standards of quality and functionality. When purchasing expendable supplies, we recommend
using only those provided by an authorized dealer.
Important
❒ Do not expose the toner cartridge to a light for a
long time. If you do, the toner cartridge will be
damaged and the print quality might be reduced.
Open the front cover by pushing the front cover
release button.
ZKGH126E
Remove the fixing material inserted between
toner cartridge and the printer.
ZKGT146E
G1168626-F1.p65
1
04.12.9, 12:25AM
Lift the front side of the toner cartridge, and then
pull it out of the printer.
ZKGT115E
Note
❒ Do not hold the toner cartridge upside down or
stand it vertically.
❒ Do not put the toner cartridge on an unstable
or tilted surface.
Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface. Pull
out the tape inside the unit horizontally while
holding the cartridge with one hand as shown
in the illustration.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Areas exposed to direct sunlight or strong light
Dusty areas
Areas with corrosive gases
Areas that are excessively cold, hot, or humid
Locations near an air conditioner or humidifier
Locations near other electronic equipment
Locations subject to frequent strong vibration
INSTALLING THE TONER
CARTRIDGE
Close the front cover by pressing the indentations on the left and right sides.
ZKGH135E
Important
❒ Do not close the front cover with force. If you
cannot close the cover easily, pull out the toner
cartridge from the printer and insert it again.
After that, close the front cover again.
❒ Dispose of removed fixing material and tape in
the same manner as ordinary plastic waste.
LOADING PAPER
ZKGT155E
Important
❒ Be sure to remove the tape completely before
installing the toner cartridge. Otherwise, the
printer might be damaged.
❒ If you pull out the strips when the toner cartridge
is slant or standing on its side, the cartridge
might cause trouble with the printer.
❒ Be sure to pull the tape horizontally. Pulling it
upward or downward may cause the toner to
scatter.
❒ After pulling the tape out of the cartridge, toner
scatters easily. Do not shake the cartridge.
Hold the grips of the toner cartridge, and then
insert it into the printer until it stops.
ZKGT121E
Lower the toner cartridge when it touches the
back.
ZKGT145E
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Caution
• Do not handle the plug with wet hands. Doing
so might cause an electrical shock.
• Keep the machine in an area that is within optimum environmental conditions. Operating the
machine in an environment that is outside the
recommended ranges of humidity and temperature can cause an electrical fire hazard. Keep
the area around the socket free of dust. Accumulated dustcan become an electrical fire hazard.
• Place the machine on a strong and level surface. Otherwise, it might fall and injure someone.
• If you use the machine in a confined space,
ensure there is continuous air circulation.
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
UNPACKING THE PRINTER AND
CHECKING THE CONTENTS OF
THE BOX
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Warning
• Confirm that the wall outlet is near the machine
and freely accessible, so that in event of an
emergency, it can be unplugged easily.
• Only connect the machine to the power source
described on this sheet.
• Avoid multi-wiring.
• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord. Do not place heavy objects on it, pull it hard or bend it more than necessary. These actions could cause an electric
shock or fire.
• Enclosed set of power cord is only for the use
with this product and should not be used with
any other electronic equipment or appliances.
Do not use any other power cord with this product. They could cause electric shock or fire.
Important
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
The printer’s location should be carefully chosen
because environmental conditions greatly affect its
performance.
Environments to Avoid
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
WHERE TO PUT THE PRINTER
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Please read the Safety Information in the Setup Guide before using this machine. It contains important
information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
The default paper settings size are as follows:
Metric version: A4 L (long-edge feed)
Inch version: 81/2" x 11" L (long-edge feed)
The following describes how to load paper into the
standard paper tray (Tray 1).
For settings other than the default paper size, and
information about the paper sizes that can be set
in the paper tray, see “Paper and Other Media”,
Maintenance Guide.
Caution
• Keep toner (used or unused) and the toner cartridge out of reach of children.
Important
❒ To avoid paper jams, make sure paper is not
stacked above the limit mark inside the tray.
Misfeeds might occur.
❒ Do not mix different types of paper in a single
paper tray.
Pull out the paper tray until it stops.
ZKGH160E
Note
❒ Do not touch the three white pins on the left
front side of the printer.
ZKGH200E
❒ When loading paper other than A4 K (shortedged feed) or 81/2" x 11" K (long-edged feed),
you should extend the tray.
Carefully slide the paper tray into the printer
until it stops.
ZKGH190E
Important
❒ Confirm that the setting of the paper size dial
matches the size and feed direction of the paper
in the tray. Otherwise, the printer might be
damaged or a printing problem might occur.
❒ Do not slide the paper tray in and out with force.
If you do, the front and side paper guides will
move out of the place.
G1168626-F1.p65
2
❒ Make sure the power cable is plugged securely
into the wall outlet.
❒ Turn the power off when plugging and
unplugging the power plug.
Turn the power to “I” On.
Language:
*English
Press the {▲} or {▼} key until the language
you want to select appears.
Select a language using the procedure
described here.
The message for the selected language will
appear on the display. If you want to use the
display in English, the following procedures are
unnecessary.
Note
❒ The default setting is English.
Press the {Menu} key.
AGN200S
The [Menu] screen appears on the display.
Check the options.
Note
❒ For details about the configuration page, see
“Interpreting the Configuration Page”, Software
Guide.
Press the {Online} key.
The initial screen appears.
Ready
Press the {# Enter} key. Wait for two seconds.
The [Menu] screen appears on the display.
Press the {Online} key.
The initial screen appears.
Ready
AGN301S
SELECTING
THE DISPLAY LANGUAGE
Note
❒ If printing is not normal, check to see if an error
message appears on the display. If there is an
error message, see “Troubleshooting”,
Maintenance Guide.
TEST PRINTING
The following explains the procedure for test
printing of the configuration page.
Test print in order to verify that the printer is
working normally. Test printing checks printer
performance only; it does not test the connection
to the computer.
Press the {Menu} key.
The [Menu] screen appears on the display.
Press the {▲} or {▼} key to display [List/Test
Print], and then press the {# Enter} key.
Menu:
List/Test Print
The menu for selecting the contents to be test printed appears.
Press the {▲} or {▼} key to display [Config.
Page], and then press the {# Enter} key.
List/Test Print:
Config. Page
CONNECTING THE PRINTER
TO A COMPUTER
❖ Network connection
Follow the procedure below to connect the printer
to the computer through the network. Prepare the
hub and other network devices before connecting
the 10 BASE-T or 100 BASE-TX cable to the
machine's Ethernet port.
Important
❒ Use shielded Ethernet cable. Unshielded cables
create electromagnetic interference that could
cause malfunctions.
❒ Ethernet cable is not supplied with this machine.
Select your cable according to the network
environment.
The network interface cable loop should be
about 15 cm (5.9 inches) (햲) from the end of
the cable (on the end closest to the printer).
ZKGP321E
04.12.9, 12:25AM
AGN302S
Connect the other end of the cable to the printer's
network, such as a hub.
Reference
❒ For details about network environment settings,
see Software Guide.
Check the LEDs on the Ethernet port.
ZKGH260E
1 is lit when the printer is securely connected to the network.
2 is lit when 100BASE-TX is in use and not lit when 10BASE-T is in
use.
❖ USB connection
❖ Parallel connection
○○○○○○○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Important
The following message appears on the display:
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Plug in the power cable.
AGN201S
Printing...
Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet
port.
Important
❒ The parallel interface cable is not provided with
the printer.
❒ The printer's parallel connection is a standard
bidirectional interface that requires an IEEE
1284-compliant 36-pin parallel cable and host
computer parallel port.
❒ Use shielded interface cable. Unshielded cables
create electromagnetic interference that could
cause malfunctions.
Turn off the printer and computer.
Connect the cable to the interface connector.
ZKEX115E
Securely attach the other end of the parallel
cable to your computer's parallel port. Secure
the cable.
Reference
❒ For details about settings for parallel connection
printing, see Software Guide.
Important
❒ USB2.0 interface cable is not supplied. Obtain it
separately, according to the computer you are
using.
❒ USB connection is possible under Windows 98
SE/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Mac OS
9.x, and Mac OS X v10.3 or higher.
❒ Windows 98SE/Me supports USB1.1 speeds.
❒ USB connection with Macintosh is only possible
via the printer's USB port.
Connect the square-shaped connector of the
USB2.0 cable to the USB port.
SETTING UP FOR PRINTING
○○○○○○○
❒ When loading paper other than A4 L (longedged feed) or 81/2" x 11" L (long-edged feed),
adjust the paper size dial to match the size and
feed direction of the paper in the paper tray.
AGN303S
Press the {# Enter} key.
The following message appears and the configuration page is
printed.
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Note
Make sure the power is set to “O” Off.
Menu:
Language
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Important
❒ Confirm that the top of the stack is not higher
than the limit mark inside the tray.
❒ Confirm that the paper fits under the rear guide.
Warning
• Plug and unplug the power cable with dry
hands, or an electric shock could occur.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ZKGH180E
Follow the procedure below to turn the power on.
Press the {▲} or {▼} key to display [Language].
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
Load the new paper into paper tray with print
side up.
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
ZKGH170E
TURNING THE POWER ON
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○
○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Lift the front side of the tray, and then pull it out
of the printer.
Printing requires installation of a printer driver
for the operating system.
Reference
❒ See “Installing the Printer Driver”, Setup
Guide.
❒ If you want to install options, see “Installing
Options”, Setup Guide.
ZKGT300E
Connect the opposite end's flat connector to
devices such as your compu-ter's USB interface, or a USB hub.
Reference
❒ For details about settings for USB connection
printing, see Software Guide.
Copyright © 2004 G116-8626
Printed in The Netherlands
GB GB
Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=80 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 4.000000 mm
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
15-5, Minami Aoyama 1-chome,
Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-8544, Japan
Phone: +81-3-3479-3111
Setup Guide
Setup Guide
Setup Guide
Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A.
RICOH CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
Phone: +1-973-882-2000
The Netherlands
RICOH EUROPE B.V.
Groenelaan 3, 1186 AA, Amstelveen
Phone: +31-(0)20-5474111
United Kingdom
RICOH UK LTD.
Ricoh House,
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,
Middlesex, TW13 7HG
Phone: +44-(0)20-8261-4000
Germany
RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Wilhelm-Fay-Strasse 51,
D-65936 Frankfurt am Main
Phone: +49-(0)69-7104250
France
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
383, Avenue du Général de Gaulle
BP 307-92143 Clamart Cedex
Phone: +33-(0)-821-01-74-26
Model number: Aficio AP610N
Printed in The Netherlands
GB GB G116-8600
Spain
RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.
Avda. Litoral Mar, 12-14,
Blue Building, Marina Village,
08005 Barcelona
Phone: +34-(0)93-295-7600
Italy
RICOH ITALIA SpA
Via della Metallurgia 12,
37139 Verona
Phone: +39-045-8181500
China
RICOH CHINA CO.,LTD.
29/F., Lippo Plaza, No.222
Huai Hai Zhong Road,
Lu Wan District,
Shanghai P.C.:200021
Phone: +86-21-5396-6888
1
Guide to the Printer
2
Setting Up
3
Installing Options
4
Connecting the Printer
5
Configuration
6
Installing the Printer Driver
Singapore
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE.LTD.
260 Orchard Road,
#15-01/02 The Heeren,
Singapore 238855
Phone: +65-6830-5888
Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, please be sure to read
the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
G1168600
Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=80 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 4.000000 mm
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.
Power Source
220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 4.5 A or more
Please be sure to connect the power cable to a power source as above.
Laser Safety:
This machine is considered a class I laser device, safe for office/ EDP use. The machine contains 7
milliwatt, 645 - 660 nanometer wavelength, A1GaInp Laser Diode. Safety precautions and interlock
mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
Declaration of Conformity
“The Product complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and its amending directives and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and its amending directives.”
The following label is attached behind the front cover, left side, front facing.
Notice to Users in EEA Countries
802.11b Interface Unit Type F (R-WL11B):
This product complies with the essential requirements and provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 March 1999 on radio equipment and telecommunications
terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
This product is only for use in EEA or other authorized countries. Outdoor use of this product in Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, or the Netherlands is prohibited.
The CE Declaration of Conformity is available on the Internet at URL:
http://www.ricoh.co.jp/fax/ce_doc/.
This product is only for use in EEA or other authorized countries. Outdoor use of this product in
Belguim,France,Germany,Italy,or the Netherlands is prohibited.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licenses.
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility for its
completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing certain items, consult with your legal advisor.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the metric version.
For good print quality, the supplier recommends that you use genuine toner, maintenance kits and parts
from the supplier.
The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of consumables (toner, maintenance kits and parts) other than genuine consumables from the supplier with
your office products.
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Copyright © 2004
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page i Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Trademarks............................................................................................................. 1
Safety Information ................................................................................................. 2
Positions of RWARNING and RCAUTION labels .............................................. 6
ENERGY STAR Program ....................................................................................... 7
Manuals for This Printer........................................................................................ 8
How to Read This Manual ..................................................................................... 9
1. Guide to the Printer
Exterior ................................................................................................................. 11
Inside..................................................................................................................... 13
Control Panel........................................................................................................ 14
2. Setting Up
Where to Put the Printer......................................................................................17
Unpacking the Printer and Checking the Contents of the Box ....................... 20
Installing the Toner Cartridge.............................................................................21
Loading Paper ......................................................................................................24
Turning the Power On .........................................................................................26
Selecting the Display Language.........................................................................27
Test Printing .........................................................................................................28
3. Installing Options
Available Options.................................................................................................29
Option Installation Flow Chart ..................................................................................30
Installing Options......................................................................................................31
Attaching Paper Feed Unit Type 610.................................................................. 33
Attaching Envelope Feeder Type 610 ................................................................35
Attaching Memory Unit Type C 256MB (SDRAM Module)................................ 36
Attaching 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510 ...........................................................39
Attaching 802.11b Interface Unit Type F............................................................43
Attaching Bluetooth Interface Unit Type C........................................................ 47
Attaching Hard Disk Drive Type 2600 ................................................................51
Attaching Network Data Protection Unit Type B...............................................53
Attaching Duplex Unit AD610 .............................................................................54
i
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page ii Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
4. Connecting the Printer
Network Connection ............................................................................................57
USB Connection................................................................................................... 59
Parallel Connection .............................................................................................60
IEEE 1394 Connection .........................................................................................61
5. Configuration
Ethernet Configuration........................................................................................63
IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Configuration ..................................................... 66
IEEE 1394 Configuration .....................................................................................70
IP over 1394.............................................................................................................70
SCSI print.................................................................................................................72
6. Installing the Printer Driver
Quick Install..........................................................................................................73
Install the Operating Instructions.......................................................................75
INDEX......................................................................................................... 76
ii
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 1 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
IPS-PRINT Printer Language Emulation Copyright© 1999-2000 Oak Technology, Inc., All rights reserved.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth-SIG Inc. worldwide.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might
be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to
those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• Microsoft® Windows® 95 operating system
• Microsoft® Windows® 98 operating system
• Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
• The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
• The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
• The product names of Windows ServerTM 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Web Edition
• The product names of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
1
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 2 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Safety Information
When using your printer, the following safety precautions should always be followed.
In this manual, the following important symbols are used:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result
in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result
in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
2
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 3 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
R WARNING:
• Confirm the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessible, so
that in the event of emergency, it can be unplugged easily.
• Only connect the machine to the power source described in the manual.
• Avoid multi-wiring.
• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord.
Do not place heavy objects on it, pull it hard or bend it more than necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or fire.
• Do not incinerate spilled toner or used toner. Toner dust is flammable
and might ignite when exposed to an open flame.
• Disposal should take place at an authorized dealer or an appropriate
collection site.
• If you dispose of the used toner cartridges yourself, dispose of them
according to local regulations.
• Do not store toner, used toner, or toner containers in a place with an
open flame. The toner might ignite and cause burns or a fire.
• Plug and unplug the power cable with dry hands, or an electric shock
could occur.
• Do not risk electric shock by handling the power cord or plug with wet
hands.
• Do not remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this
manual. Some parts of the machine are at a high voltage and could
give you an electric shock. Also, if the machine has laser systems, direct (or indirect) reflected eye contact with the laser beam may cause
serious eye damage. When the machine needs to be checked, adjusted, or repaired, contact your service representative.
• Do not take apart or attempt any modifications to this machine. There
is a risk of fire, electric shock, explosion or loss of sight. If the machine has laser systems, there is a risk of serious eye damage.
• Be sure to turn off the power switch and wait for about 15 minutes before cleaning the Registration roller. Not waiting for the printer to cool
down can result in a burn.
• Enclosed set of power cord is only for the use with this product and
should not be used with any other electronic equipment or appliances. Do not use any other power cord with this product. They could
cause electric shock or fire.
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols.
A fire or an electric shock might occur.
3
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 4 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
R CAUTION:
• Do not handle the plug with wet hands. Doing so might cause an electrical
shock.
• Keep the machine in an area that is within optimum environmental conditions. Operating the machine in an environment that is outside the recommended ranges of humidity and temperature can cause an electrical fire
hazard. Keep the area around the socket free of dust. Accumulated dust
can become an electrical fire hazard.
• Place the machine on a strong and level surface. Otherwise, it might fall and
injure someone.
• If you use the machine in a confined space, ensure there is continuous air
circulation.
• Keep toner (used or unused) and the toner cartridge out of reach of children.
• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into
a fresh air environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.
• If your skin comes into contact with toner or used toner, wash the affected
area thoroughly with soap and water.
• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large
amounts of water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
• Avoid getting toner on your clothes or skin when removing a paper jam or
replacing toner. If your skin comes into contact with toner, wash the affected
area thoroughly with soap and water.
• If toner gets on your clothing, wash with cold water. Hot water will set the
toner into the fabric and may make removing the stain impossible.
• Our products are engineered to meet the highest standards of quality and
functionality. When purchasing expendable supplies, we recommend using
only those provided by an authorized dealer.
• Do not pull out the paper tray forcefully. If you do, the tray might fall and
cause an injury.
• Before installing options, the machine should be turned off and unplugged
for at least an hour. Components inside the machine become very hot, and
can cause a burn if touched.
• Before moving the machine, unplug the power cable from the outlet. If the
cable is unplugged abruptly, it could become damaged. Damaged plugs or
cables can cause an electrical or fire hazard.
• When lifting the machine, use the grips on both sides. The machine could
break or cause an injury if dropped.
4
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 5 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
R CAUTION:
• The printer weighs about 20 kg (44.1 lb.).When lifting the machine, use the
inset grips on both sides. Otherwise the printer could break or cause injury
if dropped.
• Do not touch the inside of the controller board compartment. Doing so may
cause a malfunction or a burn.
• The inside of this printer becomes very hot. Do not touch parts labelled “v”
(indicating a hot surface). Touching these parts will result in burns.
• Grip the plug, not the cord, when pulling the plug from the socket. Pulling
the cord causes wear and tear that can result in fire or electric shock.
• Lifting the paper feed unit carelessly or dropping it may cause injury.
• When removing misfed paper, do not touch the fusing section because it
becomes very hot.
• When you move the printer, remember to unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet to avoid a fire or an electric shock.
• When you pull out the plug from the socket, grip the plug, not the cord, to
avoid damaging the cord and causing a fire or an electric shock.
• When moving the printer after use, do not take out any of the Toners, Photo
Conductor Units, nor the Waste Toner Bottle to prevent toner spill inside the
machine.
5
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 6 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Positions of RWARNING and RCAUTION
labels
This machine has labels for RWARNING and RCAUTION at the positions
shown below. For safety, please follow the instructions and handle the machine
as indicated.
AGN039S
Do not incinerate toner or toner containers. Toner dust may cause flashback
when exposed to open flames.
The inside of this printer becomes very hot. Do not touch parts with this label
(indicating a hot surface). Touching these parts will result in burns.
The inside of this printer becomes very hot. Do not touch parts with this label
(indicating a hot surface). Touching these parts will result in burns.
The inside of this printer becomes very hot. Do not touch parts with this label
(indicating a hot surface). Touching these parts will result in burns.
6
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 7 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
ENERGY STAR Program
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have determined that this machine model meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency.
The ENERGY STAR Guidelines intend to establish an international energy-saving system for
developing and introducing energy-efficient office equipment to deal with environmental issues, such as global warming.
When a product meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency, the Partner shall
place the ENERGY STAR logo onto the machine model.
This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated with office equipment by means of energy-saving features, such as Low-power mode.
❖ Low-power Mode (Energy Saver mode)
This printer automatically lowers its power consumption 30 minutes after the
last operation has been completed. To exit Low-power (Energy Saver) mode,
press any key on the control panel. For more information about how to configure Energy Saver mode, see “Making Printer Settings with Control Panel”,
Software Guide as a HTML file on the CD-ROM.
❖ Specifications
Energy Saver mode
Power Consumption
With Options: 10.5 W or less
Printer Only: 6.5 W
Default Time
30 minutes
-Recycled Paper
In accordance with the ENERGY STAR Program, we recommend use of recycled
paper which is environment friendly. Please contact your sales representative
for recommended paper.
7
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 8 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Manuals for This Printer
For particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual.
❖ Setup Guide (this manual)
Provides information about printer setup and options.
❖ Maintenance Guide
Provides information about paper, replacing supplies, and dealing with paper jams and error messages.
❖ Software Guide (HTML)
Provides basic information about installing the printer driver and software,
using the printer in a network environment, and configuration and setup.
Also, provides information about configuring and monitoring printer status
using software and a Web browser.
Note
❒ Some functions cannot be used depending on your printer.
8
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 9 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
How to Read This Manual
The following set of symbols is used in this manual.
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in
death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety Information section.
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in minor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury
when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this
symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety
Information section.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
This symbol indicates information or preparations required prior to operating.
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after abnormal operation.
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
This symbol indicates a reference.
Keys that appear on the machine's display.
Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display.
Keys built into the machine's control panel.
Keys on the computer's keyboard.
9
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 10 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
10
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 11 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
1. Guide to the Printer
Exterior
AGN010S
1. Paper Size Dial
Adjust this dial to match the size and feed
direction of the paper loaded in the paper
tray.
2. Bypass Tray Extension
Pull out this extension to load paper into
the Bypass Tray when its length is longer
than A4 L or 81/2” × 11”L.
3. Bypass Tray
Use to print onto thick paper, OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, custom size
paper, envelopes as well as plain paper.
When printing on custom paper size,
printer driver settings are required.
Up to 100 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2,
20 lb.) can be loaded.
See “Paper and Other Media Supported
by this Printer” and “Loading Paper in
the Bypass Tray”, Maintenance Guide.
4. Output Tray Extension
Pull out this extension when printing on
long paper.
5. Control Panel
Contains keys for the printer operation
and a panel display that shows the printer status.
6. Output Tray (Standard Tray)
Printed output is stacked here with the
print side facing down.
7. Paper Exit Cover
Open this cover to remove misfed paper.
11
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 12 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Guide to the Printer
8. Ventilator
13. Paper Tray Cover
This hole helps to keep components inside the printer from overheating.
Attach it when pulling out the tray extension of the paper tray.
Important
❒ Do not block or obstruct the ventilator. A malfunction may occur
due to overheating.
1
Connect the power cable to this port and
the other end of the cable to the outlet.
15. Rear Cover
Use this button to open the front cover.
Remove to install the optional duplex
unit or to replace the fusing unit.
10. Power Switch
16. Ventilators
9. Front Cover Release Button
Use this switch to turn the printer power
on and off.
These holes help to keep components inside the printer from overheating.
11. Paper Tray (Tray 1)
Important
❒ Do not block or obstruct the ventilators. A malfunction may occur
due to overheating.
Loads up to 500 sheets of plain paper (80
g/m2, 20 lb.) into this tray for printing.
See “Paper and Other Media Supported
by this Printer”, Maintenance Guide.
Note
❒ Paper Tray is displayed “Tray 1” on
the panel display.
12. Friction Pad
This is required to feed in paper one sheet
at a time. Clean the friction pad when
more than one sheet of paper is fed into
the printer. Also, replace the friction pad
when the message, “Replace Maintenance Kit”, appears.
12
14. Power Port
17. Controller Board
Slide it out to install some options. Attach
the interface cable, the network interface
cable or the 1394 interface cable to the
board.
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 13 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Inside
Inside
1
AGN044S
1. Toner Cartridge
5. Transfer Roller Cover
Includes toner and a photo conductor
unit.
When “Replace Toner Cartridge” appears on the panel display, replace this
unit.
Open this cover when replacing a transfer roller.
2. Front Cover
Open this cover when accessing the inside of the printer.
3. Guide Board
6. Transfer Roller
When “Replace Maintenance Kit” appears on the panel display, replace this
roller.
7. Fusing Unit Lock Levers
Lift these levers when replacing the fusing unit.
Open this board to remove misfed paper.
8. Fusing Unit
4. Registration Roller
Fuses the image onto paper.
When “Replace Maintenance Kit” appears on the panel display, replace this
unit.
Feeds the paper. If it becomes dirty, clean
it.
See “Cleaning the Registration Roller”,
Maintenance Guide.
13
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 14 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Guide to the Printer
Control Panel
1
AGN204S
1. Display
5. {Online} key
Shows the current status of the printer
and error messages.
See “Error & Status Messages on the Control Panel”, Maintenance Guide.
Press this key to switch the printer between online and offline.
2. Power indicator
Is on while the printer power is on.
Is off when the power is turned off or
while the printer is in Energy Saver
mode.
3. Alert indicator
Blinks or lights up whenever any printer
error occurs. A message describing the
cause of the error also appears on the display.
See “Error & Status Messages on the Control Panel”, Maintenance Guide.
4. Data In indicator
Blinks while the printer is receiving data
from a computer.
Is on if there is data to be printed.
14
6. {Job Reset} key
When the printer is online, press this key
to cancel any ongoing print job.
See “Canceling a Print job”, Software
Guide.
7. {Form Feed} key
If the printer is offline, press this key to
print all the data left in the printer's input
buffer.
Note
❒ This does not work if the printer is online.
8. {Menu} key
Press this key to make and check the current printer settings.
See “Making Printer Settings Using the
Control Panel”, Software Guide.
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 15 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Control Panel
9. {Escape} key
Press this key to return to the previous
condition on the display.
10. {# Enter} key
1
Press this key to execute menu items selected on the display.
Press this key to clear some errors.
See “Troubleshooting”, Maintenance
Guide.
11. {U} {T} keys
Use these keys to increase or decrease
values on the display when making settings.
Keep the key pressed to quicken scrolling, and increase or decrease values on
the display in units of 10.
15
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 16 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Guide to the Printer
1
16
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 17 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
2. Setting Up
Where to Put the Printer
The printer's location should be carefully chosen because environmental conditions greatly affect its performance.
R WARNING:
• Confirm the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessible, so
that in the event of emergency, it can be unplugged easily.
• Only connect the machine to the power source described in the manual.
• Avoid multi-wiring.
• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord.
Do not place heavy objects on it, pull it hard or bend it more than necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or fire.
R WARNING:
• Enclosed set of power cord is only for the use with this product and
should not be used with any other electronic equipment or appliances.
Do not use any other power cord with this product. They could cause
electric shock or fire.
R CAUTION:
• Do not handle the plug with wet hands. Doing so might cause an electrical
shock.
• Keep the machine in an area that is within optimum environmental conditions. Operating the machine in an environment that is outside the recommended ranges of humidity and temperature can cause an electrical fire
hazard. Keep the area around the socket free of dust. Accumulated dust
can become an electrical fire hazard.
• Place the machine on a strong and level surface. Otherwise, it might fall and
injure someone.
• If you use the machine in a confined space, ensure there is continuous air
circulation.
17
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 18 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Setting Up
❖ Space Required for Installation
Leave enough space around the printer. This space is necessary to operate the
printer. The recommended (or minimum) space requirements are as follows:
2
ZKGH010E
A: 10 cm (4 inches) or more
B: 10 cm (4 inches) or more
C: 100 cm (39.4 inches) or more
D: 10 cm (4 inches) or more
❖ Optimum Environmental Conditions
Permissible and recommended temperature and humidity ranges are as follows:
%RH
TS4K031KE
• White area: Permissible Range
• Gray area: Recommended Range
18
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 19 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Where to Put the Printer
Note
❒ The machine must be level within 5 mm, 0.2” from both front to rear and
left to right.
❒ To avoid possible build-up of ozone, locate this machine in a large well
ventilated room that has an air turnover of more than 30 m3/hr/person.
❒ When you use this machine for a long time in a confined space without
good ventilation, you may detect an odd smell. To keep the workplace
comfortable, we recommend you keep it well ventilated.
2
❖ Environments to Avoid
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
❒
Important
Areas exposed to direct sunlight or strong light
Dusty areas
Areas with corrosive gases
Areas that are excessively cold, hot, or humid
Locations near air conditioners or humidifiers
Locations near other electronic equipment
Locations subject to frequent strong vibration
❖ Power Source
Connect the power cable to a power source of the following specification:
• 220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 4.5 A or more
19
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 20 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Setting Up
Unpacking the Printer and Checking the
Contents of the Box
A Check the contents of the box according to the following list. If one or some
items are missing, please contact your sales or service representative.
2
Important
❒ The interface cable is not included in the box. Make sure that the interface
cable you use, is appropriate for your computer.
❖ Manuals and CD-ROMs
Setup Guide (This manual)
Maintenance Guide
CD-ROM “Printer Drivers and Utilities”
CD-ROM “Display-Version Manuals (HTML)”
CD-ROM “Print-Version Manuals (PDF)”
❖ Parts
Power Cable
Paper Tray Cover
AGN100S
Additional Documentation
B Remove the plastic bag. Lift the printer and move it to the place where you
want to install it.
When lifting the machine, use the inset grips on both sides. Otherwise the machine could break or cause injury if dropped.
AGN038S
C Remove the orange adhesive tape.
Important
❒ Lower the machine slowly and carefully to prevent trapping your hands.
20
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 21 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Installing the Toner Cartridge
Installing the Toner Cartridge
The following procedure describes
how to install the toner cartridge.
R WARNING:
• Do not incinerate spilled toner
or used toner. Toner dust is
flammable and might ignite
when exposed to an open
flame.
• Disposal should take place at
an authorized dealer or an appropriate collection site.
• If you dispose of the used toner cartridges yourself, dispose of them according to
local regulations.
• Do not store toner, used toner,
or toner containers in a place
with an open flame. The toner
might ignite and cause burns
or a fire.
R CAUTION:
• Keep toner (used or unused) and
the toner cartridge out of reach
of children.
• If toner or used toner is inhaled,
gargle with plenty of water and
move into a fresh air environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.
• If your skin comes into contact
with toner or used toner, wash
the affected area thoroughly with
soap and water.
• If toner or used toner gets into
your eyes, flush immediately
with large amounts of water.
Consult a doctor if necessary.
R CAUTION:
• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large
amount of water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
2
• Avoid getting toner on your
clothes or skin when removing a
paper jam or replacing toner. If
your skin comes into contact with
toner, wash the affected area
thoroughly with soap and water.
• If toner gets on your clothing,
wash with cold water. Hot water
will set the toner into the fabric
and may make removing the
stain impossible.
• Our products are engineered to
meet the highest standards of
quality and functionality. When
purchasing expendable supplies, we recommend using only
those provided by an authorized
dealer.
Important
❒ Do not expose the toner cartridge
to a light for a long time. If you do,
the toner will be damaged and the
printing quality might be reduced.
Note
❒ The toner cartridges that comes
with the printer will allow you to
print up to about 3,000 pages.
These numbers were obtained
from printing A4 K5% charts, but
the actual number of pages will
vary depending on the paper type,
size, contents, and settings.
❒ Toner cartridges (consumable) are
not covered by warranty. However, if there is problem, contact the
store where they ware purchased.
21
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 22 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Setting Up
A Open the front cover by pushing
the front cover release button.
D Place the toner cartridge on a flat
surface. Pull out the tape inside
the unit horizontally while holding the cartridge with one hand as
shown in the illustration.
2
AGN020S
B Remove
the fixing material inserted between toner cartridge
and the printer.
AGN019S
C Lift the front side of the toner cartridge, and then pull it out of the
printer.
ZKGT151E
Important
❒ Be sure to remove the tape completely before installing the toner cartridge. Otherwise, the
printer might be damaged.
❒ If you pull out the strips when
the toner cartridge is slant or
standing on its side, the cartridge might cause trouble with
the printer.
❒ Be sure to pull the tape horizontally. Pulling it upward or
downward may cause the toner
to scatter.
❒ After pulling the tape out of the
cartridge, toner scatters easily.
Do not shake the cartridge.
E Hold the grips of the toner cartridge, and then insert it into the
printer until it stops.
AGN022S
Note
❒ Do not hold the toner cartridge
upside down or stand it vertically.
❒ Do not put the toner cartridge
on an unstable or tilted surface.
22
AGN023S
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 23 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Installing the Toner Cartridge
F Insert the toner cartridge in its ap-
propriate position by gently
pushing down.
2
AGN024S
G Close the front cover by pressing
the indentations on the left and
right sides.
ZKGH130E
Important
❒ Do not close the front cover
with force. If you cannot close
the cover easily, pull out the
toner cartridge from the printer
and insert it again. After that,
close the front cover again.
❒ Dispose of removed fixing material and tape in the same manner as ordinary plastic waste.
23
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 24 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Setting Up
Loading Paper
The following describes how to load
paper into the standard paper tray
(Tray 1).
B Lift the front side of the tray, and
then pull it out of the printer.
R CAUTION:
• Do not pull out the paper tray
forcefully. If you do, the tray
might fall and cause an injury.
2
Important
❒ To avoid paper jams, make sure
paper is not stacked above the limit mark inside the tray. Misfeeds
might occur.
❒ Do not mix different types of paper
in a single paper tray.
ZKGY140E
C Load
the new paper into paper
tray with print side up.
A Lift the paper
tray slightly, and
then pull it out until it stops.
ZKGY130E
AGN029S
Note
❒ Do not touch the three white
pins on the left front of the
printer.
24
Important
❒ Confirm that the top of the stack
is not higher than the limit mark
inside the tray.
❒ Confirm that the paper fits under the rear guides.
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 25 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Loading Paper
Note
❒ When loading paper other than
A4L(long-edged feed) or 81/2 ×
11L(long-edged feed), adjust
the paper size dial to match the
size and feed direction of the
paper in the paper tray.
Important
❒ Confirm that the setting of the
paper size dial matches the sizes
and feed direction of the paper
in the tray. Otherwise, the printer might be damaged or a printing problem might occur.
❒ Do not slide the paper tray in
and out with force. If you do,
the front and side paper guides
will move out of the place.
2
Reference
For details about usable types of
paper, see “Loading Paper”,
Maintenance Guide.
AGN033S
❒ When loading paper other than
A4K(short-edged feed) or 81/2
× 11L(long-edged feed), you
should extend the tray.
D Carefully slide the paper tray into
the printer until it stops.
ZKGY150E
25
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 26 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Setting Up
Turning the Power On
Follow the procedure below to turn
the power on.
R WARNING:
• Plug and unplug the power cable with dry hands, or an electric shock could occur.
2
A Make sure the power is set to “b”
Off.
AGN034S
B Plug in the power cable.
Important
❒ Make sure the power cable is
plugged securely into the wall
outlet.
❒ Turn the power off when plugging and unplugging the power
plug.
C Turn the power to “a” On.
AGN001S
The power indicator on the control
panel lights up.
26
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 27 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Selecting the Display Language
Selecting the Display Language
Select a language using the procedure
described here.
The message for the selected language will appear on the display. If
you want to use the display in English, the following procedures are unnecessary.
The following message appears on
the display:
Language:
*English
2
D Press the {U} or {T} key until the
language you want to select appears.
Note
❒ The default setting is English.
E Press the {# Enter} key. Wait for
A Press the {Menu} key.
two seconds.
The [Menu] screen appears on the
display.
F Press the {Online} key.
AGN200S
The [Menu] screen appears on the
display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Language].
AGN202S
The initial screen appears.
Menu:
Language
Ready
C Press the {# Enter} key.
AGN201S
27
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 28 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Setting Up
Test Printing
The following explains the procedure
for test printing of the configuration
page.
Test print in order to verify that the
printer is working normally. Test
printing checks printer performance
only; it does not test the connection to
the computer.
2
A Press the {Menu} key.
The following message appears
and the configuration page is
printed.
Printing...
Note
❒ If printing is not normal, check
to see if an error message appears on the display. If there is
an error message, see “Troubleshooting”, Maintenance Guide.
D Check the options.
AGN200S
The [Menu] screen appears on the
display.
Note
❒ For details about the configuration page, see “Interpreting the
Configuration Page”, Software
Guide.
E Press the {Online} key.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [List/Test Print], and then press
the {# Enter} key.
Menu:
List/Test Print
The menu for selecting the contents to be test printed appears.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [Config. Page], and then press
the {# Enter} key.
List/Test Print
Config. Page
28
AGN202S
The initial screen appears.
Ready
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 29 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
3. Installing Options
Available Options
This section describes how to install options.
By installing options, you can improve the printer performance and have an expanded variety of features to use. For the specifications of each option, see Maintenance Guide.
R CAUTION:
• Before installing options, the machine should be turned off and unplugged
for at least an hour. Components inside the machine become very hot, and
can cause a burn if touched.
• Before moving the machine, unplug the power cable from the outlet. If the
cable is unplugged abruptly, it could become damaged. Damaged plugs or
cables can cause an electrical or fire hazard.
• When lifting the machine, use the grips on both sides. The machine could
break or cause an injury if dropped.
Important
❒ The voltage rating of the connector for options is 24 V DC or less.
29
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 30 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Installing Options
Option Installation Flow Chart
We recommend you install multiple options in the following order:
A Attach the paper feed unit (Paper Feed Unit Type 610).
Attach the paper feed unit to the bottom of the printer.
You can attach up to two paper feed unit. Up to 1750 sheets of paper can be
loaded.
B Attach the envelope feeder (Envelope Feeder Type 610).
3
Replace the paper tray of the optional feeder with the envelope feeder.
C Install the SDRAM module (Memory Unit Type C 256MB).
Install the module to the SDRAM module slot on the controller board.
D Install the 1394 interface unit, 802.11b interface unit or Bluetooth interface
unit.
Install the 1394 interface unit, 802.11b interface unit or Bluetooth interface
unit on the controller board.
The 1394 interface unit, IEEE 802.11b interface unit or Bluetooth interface unit
cannot be used at the same time.
One of the following can be installed:
• 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510
• 802.11b Interface Unit Type F
• Bluetooth Interface Unit Type C
E Install the hard disk drive (Hard Disk Drive Type 2600).
Install the hard disk drive to the controller board.
F Install the Network Data Protection Unit Type B.
Insert the network data protection unit into the SD card slot on the controller
board.
G Attach the duplex unit (Duplex Unit AD610).
Attach the duplex unit to the rear of the printer.
30
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 31 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Available Options
Installing Options
Install options in the positions shown in the illustration.
❖ Exterior
3
ZKGH150E
1. Paper Feed Unit Type 610
(Tray 2 or Tray 3)
You can load up to 500 sheets (60-105
g/m2, 16-28 lb.) of plain paper into the
tray.
See p.33 “Attaching Paper Feed Unit
Type 610”.
Note
❒ A maximum two paper feed units
Type 610 can be attached.
❒ Top-most optional paper feed unit
is displayed “Tray 2” and bottommost is displayed “Tray 3” on the
display.
2. Envelope Feeder Type 610
You can load up to 60 envelopes (7290 g/m2, 19-24 lb.) into the tray.
See p.35 “Attaching Envelope Feeder
Type 610”.
Note
❒ The envelope feeder is a tray that
slides into the optional paper feed
unit. Without the optional paper
feed unit, the envelope feeder cannot be used.
❒ Your Printer can have two optional
paper feed units installed at the
same time. The envelope feeder
unit can be used in either “Tray 2”
or “Tray 3”.
3. Duplex Unit AD610 (duplex unit)
You can print on both sides of paper.
Install the duplex unit by removing
the rear cover of the printer.
See p.54 “Attaching Duplex Unit
AD610”.
31
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 32 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Installing Options
❖ Interior
3
AGN003S
1. 802.11b Interface Unit Type F
See p.43 “Attaching 802.11b Interface
Unit Type F”.
2. 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510
See p.39 “Attaching 1394 Interface
Unit Type 4510”.
3. Bluetooth Interface Unit Type C
See p.47 “Attaching Bluetooth Interface Unit Type C”.
4. Memory Unit Type C 256MB
(SDRAM module)
See p.36 “Attaching Memory Unit
Type C 256MB (SDRAM Module)”.
5. Network Data Protection Unit Type B
See p.53 “Attaching Network Data
Protection Unit Type B”.
6. Hard Disk Drive Type 2600
See p.51 “Attaching Hard Disk Drive
Type 2600”.
Note
❒ You can have one of the following types of extension board installed at the
same time: 802.11b Interface Unit Type F, 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510, Bluetooth Interface Unit Type C.
Reference
For the specifications of each option, see Maintenance Guide.
32
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 33 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Attaching Paper Feed Unit Type 610
Attaching Paper Feed Unit Type 610
Preparation
When installing multiple options,
install the paper feed unit first.
R CAUTION:
• The printer weighs about 20 kg
(44.1 lb.). When lifting the machine, use the inset grips on both
sides. Otherwise the printer
could break or cause injury if
dropped.
Important
❒ Do not slide more than one paper
tray out at the same time. Having
more than one full paper tray fully
extended could cause the machine
to topple.
❒ More than two paper feed units
cannot be attached.
❒ Check the printer nameplate to
confirm the model code.
A Check
the package contains the
following:
❖ Paper Feed Unit
(including a paper tray)
3
AGN035S
B Turn off the power of the printer,
and then unplug the printer's
power cable and the interface cable.
C Remove
the adhesive tape from
the paper feed unit.
ZKGX390E
Note
❒ If you attach two paper feed
units at the same time, stack
them up in advance.
33
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 34 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Installing Options
D There are three pins on the top of
the paper feed unit that point
straight up. On the bottom of the
printer there are three holes.
Align the holes over the pins, and
then lower the printer gently onto
the paper feed unit.
3
AGN038S
Note
❒ After finishing installation, you
can check whether the paper
feed unit is properly installed:
Print the configuration page
from the “List/Test Print”
menu. If it is installed properly,
you will see “Paper Feed Unit
(Tray 2)” or “Paper Feed Unit
(Tray 2), Paper Feed Unit (Tray
3)” under the “Options” list.
❒ If the paper feed unit is not installed properly, repeat the procedure from the start. If you
cannot install it properly even
after reinstallation, contact your
sales or service representative.
Reference
For printing the configuration
page, see p.28 “Test Printing”
See “Loading Paper”, Maintenance Guide.
When adjusting the printing position, see “Adjusting Tray Registration”, Maintenance Guide.
ZKGX400E
E Attach the interface cable to the
printer.
F Plug
the printer's power cable
back into the wall outlet, and then
turn on the power.
34
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 35 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Attaching Envelope Feeder Type 610
Attaching Envelope Feeder Type 610
Note
❒ This unit is a tray that slides into
the optional paper feed unit. Without the optional paper feed unit,
this envelope feeder cannot be
used.
❒ Your printer can accommodate
two optional paper feed units. The
envelope Feeder unit can be used
in “Tray 2”. Neither the main unit's
feed tray (Tray 1) nor Tray 3 can be
used for this purpose.
Important
❒ Do not slide more than one paper
tray out at the same time. Having
more than one full paper tray fully
extended could cause the machine
to topple.
The following explanation uses the
example of installing the envelope
feeder unit in “Tray 2”.
A Check
the package contains the
following:
❖ Envelope Feeder
B Pull
out the second paper tray
(Tray 2) of the optional paper feed
unit until it stops. After that, lift it
slightly, and then pull it out.
3
ZKGP330E
Important
❒ The envelope feeder must be
used in the top-most optional
paper feed unit (Tray 2).
❒ The tray of the top-most optional paper feed unit is beneath the
paper tray.
Note
❒ Keep the paper tray with paper
in a cool dark place.
C Lift the front of the envelope feeder, and slide it carefully into the
printer until it stops.
AGN037S
ZKGP340E
Reference
For information about loading
paper, see “Loading Envelopes”, Maintenance Guide.
35
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 36 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Installing Options
Attaching Memory Unit Type C 256MB
(SDRAM Module)
R CAUTION:
• Do not touch the inside of the
controller board compartment.
Doing so may cause a malfunction or a burn.
3
Important
❒ Before touching the memory unit,
touch something metal to discharge any static electricity. Static
electricity can damage the memory
unit.
❒ Do not subject the memory unit to
physical shocks.
❒ If a printer hard disk is already installed, temporarily remove it and
insert the memory unit. Reinstall
the printer hard disk after inserting the memory unit.
❒ Before using the new memory
unit, you must make settings in the
printer driver.
A Turn off the power of the printer,
and then unplug the printer's power cable and the interface cable.
B If
the duplex unit is attached,
push down the lever on right side
( ) and pull out the duplex unit
until it stops ( ).
ZKGX320E
If the duplex unit is not attached,
go to the following steps.
C Remove the two screws holding
the controller board in place.
Note
❒ Use a coin or similar object if the
screws do not turn easily.
❒ The removed screws are required in fastening the controller board.
ZKGX280E
36
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 37 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Attaching Memory Unit Type C 256MB (SDRAM Module)
D Pull out the handle of the controller board.
H Remove the default memory unit
before installing a new memory
unit. Press down the levers on
both sides to remove the default
memory unit.
3
ZKGX370E
E Pull
the handle, and then slide
the controller board out.
AGN016S
I Align
the notch of the memory
unit to the slot, and then push it
down until it clicks.
ZKGX260E
F Place the controller board on a flat
surface.
G The memory unit is installed in
the slot shown in the illustration
below.
ZKGX130E
J Match the controller board to the
top and bottom rail using the “T”
mark, and then slide it into the
printer slowly until it stops.
ZKDX021J
ZKGX250E
37
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 38 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Installing Options
K Push the handle of the controller
board until it clicks.
3
ZKGX380E
L Fasten the controller board to the
printer with the two screws.
ZKGX270E
M Align the power cable to the left
side groove of the duplex unit,
and then slide the duplex unit in
until it is connected to the printer.
ZKGX243E
If the duplex unit is not attached,
this step is not necessary.
38
Note
❒ Be sure to return the provided
screwdriver to its original position on the inside of the front
cover.
❒ After finishing the installation,
you can check the memory unit
is properly installed: Print the
configuration page from the
“List/Test Print” menu. If it is
installed properly, you will see
the memory capacity for “Total
Memory”.
❒ To expand memory, remove the
default SDRAM module, and
then install the SDRAM module
(256 MB). “Total Memory” will
be the size of SDRAM module
memory unit you installed.
❒ If the memory unit is not properly installed, repeat the procedure from the start. If you
cannot install it properly even
after reinstallation, contact your
sales or service representative.
Reference
For printing the configuration
page, see p.28 “Test Printing”.
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 39 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Attaching 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510
Attaching 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510
R CAUTION:
• Do not touch the inside of the
controller board compartment.
Doing so may cause a malfunction or a burn.
Important
❒ The 1394 interface unit uses “IP
over 1394” and “SCSI print”. Operating system-compatible connection methods are as follows (IEEE
1394 cannot be used with Windows 95/98 and Windows NT 4.0):
• Windows Me
“IP over 1394”
• Windows 2000
“SCSI print”
• Windows XP,
Windows Server 2003
“IP over 1394”, “SCSI print”
❒ Under Windows 2000, the 1394 interface unit can only be used with
Service Pack 1 or later. The client
cannot install the printer driver
without using an account that has
administrators access rights.
❒ Before touching the 1394 interface
unit, ground yourself by touching
something metal to discharge any
static electricity. Static electricity
can damage the 1394 interface unit.
❒ Do not plug or unplug the 1394 interface cable while installing the
printer driver.
❒ Use the 1394 interface cable that
comes with 1394 interface unit.
A Check
the package contains the
following:
❖ 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510
3
ZKDP400J
❖ 1394 Interface Cable
(6 pins x 4 pins)
ZKDP993J
❖ 1394 Interface Cable
(6 pins x 6 pins)
ZKDP992J
39
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 40 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Installing Options
B Turn off the power of the printer,
and then unplug the printer's power cable and the interface cable.
E Pull out the handle of the controller board.
C If
the duplex unit is attached,
push down the lever on right side
( ) and pull out the duplex Unit
until it stops ( ).
3
ZKGX370E
F Pull
the handle, and then slide
the controller board out.
ZKGX320E
If the duplex unit is not attached,
go to the following steps.
D Remove the two screws holding
the controller board in place.
Note
❒ Use a coin or similar object if the
screws do not turn easily.
❒ These screws are used again in
fastening the controller board.
ZKGX260E
G Place the controller board on a flat
surface.
H Remove the two screws and the
cover of the 1394 interface unit
mounting bracket.
Note
❒ These screws are used again in
fastening the 1394 interface unit
to the controller board.
ZKGX280E
40
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 41 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Attaching 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510
❒ The removed cover is not used
when installing the 1394 interface unit.
J Fasten the 1394 interface unit to
the controller board.
3
ZKGX443E
ZKGX410E
I Attach the 1394 interface unit to
the controller board.
Insert the end of the 1394 interface
unit into the opening ( ), and then
push down until it clicks ( ).
K Match the controller board to the
top and bottom rail using the “T”
mark, and then slide it into the
printer slowly until it stops.
ZKGX252E
ZKGX421E
L Push back the handle of the controller board until it clicks.
ZKGX430E
ZKGX380E
41
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 42 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Installing Options
M Fasten the controller board to the
printer with the two screws.
3
ZKGX272E
N Align the power cable to the left
side groove of the duplex unit,
and then slide the duplex unit in
until it is connected to the printer.
Note
❒ After finishing installation, you
can check the 1394 interface unit
is properly installed: Print the
configuration page from the
“List/Test Print” menu. If it is
installed properly, you will see
“IEEE1394” for “Controller Option”.
❒ You need to make settings with
the control panel before using
the 1394 interface unit. For more
information, see p.70 “IEEE
1394 Configuration”.
❒ If the 1394 interface unit is not
installed properly, repeat the
procedure from the start. If you
cannot install it properly even
after reinstallation, contact your
sales or service representative.
Reference
For printing the configuration
page, see p.28 “Test Printing”.
ZKGX242E
If the duplex unit is not attached,
this step is not necessary.
42
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 43 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Attaching 802.11b Interface Unit Type F
Attaching 802.11b Interface Unit Type F
• Card
R CAUTION:
• Do not touch the inside of the
controller board compartment.
Doing so may cause a machine
malfunction or a burn.
Important
❒ Before touching the 802.11b interface unit, touch something metal to
discharge any static electricity.
Static electricity can damage the
802.11b interface unit.
❒ Do not subject the 802.11b interface
unit to physical shocks.
3
ZKDX230J
• Antenna Cap
A Check
the package contains the
following:
❖ 802.11b Interface Unit Type F
• Interface Unit
ZKDP900J
B Turn off the power of the printer,
and then unplug the printer's power cable and the interface cable.
C If
the duplex unit is attached,
push down the lever on right side
( ) and pull out the duplex unit
until it stops ( ).
ZKDP410J
ZKGX320E
If the duplex unit is not attached,
go to the following steps.
43
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 44 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Installing Options
D Remove the two screws holding
the controller board in place.
F Pull
the handle, and then slide
the controller board out.
Note
❒ Use a coin or similar object if the
screws do not turn easily.
❒ These screws are used again in
fastening the controller board.
3
ZKGX260E
G Place the controller board on a flat
surface.
H Remove the two screws and the
ZKGX280E
E Pull out the handle of the controller board.
cover of the 802.11b interface unit
mounting bracket.
Note
❒ These screws are used again in
fastening the 802.11b interface
unit to the controller board.
❒ The removed cover is not used
when installing the 802.11b interface unit.
ZKGX370E
ZKGX410E
44
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 45 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Attaching 802.11b Interface Unit Type F
I Attach the 802.11b interface unit.
Insert the end of the 802.11b interface unit into the opening ( ), and
then push down until it clicks ( ).
K Insert the card slowly into the interface unit with the label facing
down and the uneven black antenna surface facing up until it stops.
3
ZKGX500E
ZKGX420E
L Match the controller board to the
top and bottom rail using the “T”
mark, and then slide it into the
printer slowly until it stops.
ZKGX431E
J Fasten the 802.11b Interface Unit
to the controller board with the
two screws.
ZKGX251E
M Push back the handle of the controller board until it clicks.
ZKGX442E
ZKGX380E
45
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 46 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Installing Options
N Fasten the controller board to the
printer with the two screws.
3
ZKGX273E
O Attach the antenna cap to the card
with the side that has both corners of the antenna cap cut out
facing the screws.
Note
❒ After finishing installation, you
can check the 802.11b interface
unit is properly installed: Print
the configuration page from the
“List/Test Print” menu. If it is
installed properly, you will see
“IEEE 802.11b” for “Controller
Option”.
❒ If the 802.11b interface unit is
not installed properly, repeat
the procedure from the start. If
you cannot install it properly
even after reinstallation, contact
your sales or service representative.
❒ You need to make settings with
the control panel before using
the 802.11b interface unit. For
more information, see p.66
“IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)
Configuration”.
Reference
For printing the configuration
page, see p.28 “Test Printing”.
ZKGX274E
P Align the power cable to the left
side groove of the duplex unit,
and then slide the duplex unit in
until it is connected to the printer.
ZKGX243E
If the duplex unit is not attached,
this step is not necessary.
46
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 47 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Attaching Bluetooth Interface Unit Type C
Attaching Bluetooth Interface Unit Type C
• Card
R CAUTION:
• Do not touch inside the controller
board compartment. Doing so
may cause a machine malfunction or a burn.
Important
❒ When using the printer with the
Bluetooth interface unit installed,
Bluetooth needs to be installed on
the computer.
❒ Before manipulating the Bluetooth
interface unit, touch something
metal to discharge static electricity.
Static electricity can damage the
Bluetooth interface unit.
❒ Do not subject the Bluetooth interface unit to physical shocks.
A Check
the package contains the
following:
❖ Bluetooth Interface Unit Type C
• Interface Unit
3
ZKDP510J
• Antenna Cap
ZKDP900J
B Turn off the power of the printer,
and then unplug the printer's
power cable and the interface cable.
C If
the duplex unit is attached,
push down the lever on right side
( ) and then pull out the duplex
unit until it stops ( ).
ZKDP410J
ZKGX320E
If the duplex unit is not attached,
go to the following steps.
47
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 48 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Installing Options
D Remove the two screws holding
the controller board in place.
F Pull
the handle, and then slide
the controller board out.
Note
❒ Use a coin or similar object if the
screws do not turn easily.
❒ These screws are used again in
fastening the controller board.
3
ZKGX260E
G Place the controller board on a flat
surface.
H Remove the two screws and the
ZKGX280E
E Pull out the handle of the controller board.
cover of the Bluetooth interface
unit mounting bracket.
Note
❒ These screws are used again in
fastening the Bluetooth interface unit to the controller board.
❒ The removed cover is not used
when installing the Bluetooth
interface unit.
ZKGX370E
ZKGX410E
48
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 49 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Attaching Bluetooth Interface Unit Type C
I Attach
the Bluetooth interface
unit.
Insert the end of the Bluetooth interface unit to the opening ( ), and
then push down until it clicks ( ).
K With the side labeled INSERT fac-
ing up, slowly insert the card into
the interface unit, until it stops.
3
ZKGX070E
ZKGX420E
L Match the controller board to the
top and bottom rail using the “T”
mark, and then slide it into the
printer slowly until it stops.
ZKGX431E
J Fasten the network interface unit
to the controller board with the
two screws.
ZKGX601E
M Push back the handle of the controller board until it clicks.
ZKGX442E
ZKGX380E
49
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 50 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Installing Options
N Fasten the controller board to the
printer with the two screws.
Q Align the power cable to the left
side groove of the duplex unit,
and then slide the duplex unit in
until it is connected to the printer.
3
ZKGX602E
O Press the antenna to extend it.
ZKGX240E
If the duplex unit is not attached,
this step is not necessary.
ZKGX603E
P Attach the antenna cap to the card
with the side that has both corners of the antenna cap cut out
facing the screws.
Note
❒ After finishing installation, you
can check the Bluetooth interface unit is properly installed:
Print the configuration page
from the “List/Test Print”
menu. If it is installed properly,
you will see “Bluetooth” for
“Controller Option”.
❒ If the Bluetooth interface unit is
not installed properly, repeat
the procedure from the start. If
you cannot install it properly
even after reinstallation, contact
your sales or service representative.
Reference
For printing the configuration
page, see p.28 “Test Printing”.
ZKGX604E
50
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 51 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Attaching Hard Disk Drive Type 2600
Attaching Hard Disk Drive Type 2600
Important
❒ Before touching the hard disk
drive, touch something metal to
discharge any static electricity.
Static electricity can damage the
hard disk drive.
A Check
Note
❒ Use a coin or similar object if the
screws do not turn easily.
❒ The screws and cover are not
used when installing the hard
disk drive.
the package contains the
following:
3
❖ Hard Disk Drive Type 2600
ZKGX350E
ZKDX220J
B Turn off the power of the printer,
and then unplug the power cable.
D Slowly insert the hard disk drive
while aligning it with the top and
bottom rails in the printer until it
stops.
C Remove the two screws and the
cover of the hard disk drive
mounting bracket.
ZKGX151E
51
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 52 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Installing Options
E Fasten
the two screws (using a
coin, etc.) to fix the hard disk
drive.
3
ZKGX360E
Note
❒ After finishing installation, you
can check whether the hard disk
drive is properly installed: Print
the configuration page from the
“List/Test Print” menu. If it is
installed properly, you will see
“Printer Hard Disk Drive” for
“Controller Option”.
❒ If the hard disk drive is not installed properly, repeat the procedure from the start. If you
cannot install it properly even
after reinstallation, contact your
sales or service representative.
Reference
For printing the configuration
page, see p.28 “Test Printing”.
52
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 53 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Attaching Network Data Protection Unit Type B
Attaching Network Data Protection Unit
Type B
Important
❒ Protect the network data protection unit from physical shocks.
D Carefully insert the network data
protection unit, until the card
clicks into the place.
Note
❒ Use the under slot for the data protection unit.
3
A Check
the package contains the
following:
❖ Network Data Protection Unit
Type B
AGN002S
E Reattach the cover over the net-
work data protection unit. Fasten
the screw to secure the cover.
AET104S
B Turn off the power of the printer,
and then unplug the power cable.
C Remove the card slot cover at the
back of the printer.
AGN012S
Note
❒ Do not touch the network data
protection unit while the machine is in use. It may come
loose, even if pushed only
slightly.
AGN011S
53
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 54 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Installing Options
Attaching Duplex Unit AD610
Important
❒ If you attach the duplex unit and
the paper feed unit, the paper feed
unit must be attached prior to attaching the duplex unit.
❒ Check the printer nameplate to
confirm the model code.
3
D Open the rear cover by pushing
the two knobs as shown in the illustration.
A Check
the package contains the
following:
❖ Duplex Unit
AGN004S
E Remove the rear cover in the horizontal direction.
AGN036S
B Turn off the power of the printer,
and then unplug the power cable.
C Remove the adhesive tapes.
ZKGX220E
Note
❒ The rear cover of the printer is
not used when attaching the duplex unit.
❒ Store the removed rear cover for
possible future use.
ZKGX310E
54
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 55 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Attaching Duplex Unit AD610
F Align the power cable to the left
side groove of the duplex unit,
and then slide the duplex unit in
until it is connected to the printer.
❒ If the printing position is not
correct, adjust the registration of
the trays. For more information
about adjusting the registration
of the trays, see “Adjusting Tray
Registration”, Maintenance
Guide.
Reference
For printing the configuration
page, see p.28 “Test Printing”.
3
ZKGX231E
ZKGX240E
Note
❒ After finishing installation, you
can check the duplex unit is
properly installed: Print the
configuration page from the
“List/Test Print” menu. If the
new device is listed in the column of configuration options,
then it has been properly installed.
❒ If the duplex unit is not installed
properly, repeat the procedure
from the start. If you cannot install it properly even after reinstallation, contact your sales or
service representative.
55
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 56 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Installing Options
3
56
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 57 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
4. Connecting the Printer
Network Connection
Follow the procedure below to connect the printer to the computer through the
network. Prepare the hub and other network devices before connecting the 10
BASE-T or 100 BASE-TX cable to the machine's Ethernet port.
Important
❒ Use shielded Ethernet cable. Unshielded cables create electromagnetic interference that could cause malfunctions.
❒ Ethernet cable is not supplied with this machine. Select your cable according
to the network environment.
A The network interface cable loop should be about 15 cm (5.9 inches)(
)
from the end of the cable (on the end closest to the printer).
ZKEP320E
B Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port.
AGN013S
C Connect the other end of the cable to the printer's network, such as a hub.
Reference
For details about network environment settings, see Software Guide.
57
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 58 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Connecting the Printer
-Reading the LED Lamps
1
2
ZKGH260E
1. Green: lit when the printer is properly connected to the network.
2. Yellow: lit when 100BASE-TX is being used. Unlit when 10BASE-T is being
4
used.
58
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 59 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
USB Connection
USB Connection
Important
❒ USB2.0 interface cable is not supplied. Obtain it separately, according to the
computer you are using.
❒ USB connection is possible under Windows 98 SE/Me/2000/XP, Windows
Server 2003, Mac OS 9.x, and Mac OS X v10.3 or higher.
❒ Windows 98SE/Me supports USB1.1 speeds.
❒ USB connection with Macintosh is only possible via the printer's USB port.
A Connect the square-shaped connector of the USB2.0 cable to the USB port.
4
AGN014S
B Connect the opposite end's flat connector to devices such as your computer's USB interface, or a USB hub.
Reference
For details about settings for USB connection printing, see Software Guide.
59
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 60 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Connecting the Printer
Parallel Connection
Important
❒ The parallel interface cable is not provided with the printer.
❒ The printer's parallel connection is a standard bidirectional interface that requires an IEEE 1284-compliant 36-pin parallel cable and host computer parallel port.
❒ Use shielded interface cable. Unshielded cables create electromagnetic interference that could cause malfunctions.
A Turn off the printer and computer.
B Connect the cable to the interface connector.
4
AGN015S
C Securely attach the other end of the parallel cable to your computer's parallel port. Secure the cable.
Reference
For details about settings for parallel connection printing, see Software
Guide.
60
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 61 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
IEEE 1394 Connection
IEEE 1394 Connection
Important
❒ Use the 1394 interface cable provided with the 1394 interface unit.
❒ You cannot plug devices together to create loops.
❒ Do not use a cable more than 4.5 meters (14.8 feet) long.
A Connect the interface cable to the 1394 interface unit.
4
ZKGX550E
B Connect the other end to the host computer.
Note
❒ You can use either connector.
❒ Either of the two connectors for the 1394 interface unit can be used.
❒ If you have an interface cable with a ferrite core, connect the ferrite core
end to the printer.
Reference
For details about settings for parallel connection printing, see Software
Guide.
61
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 62 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Connecting the Printer
4
62
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 63 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
5. Configuration
Ethernet Configuration
Make the following network settings
according to the network interface
you are using.
You can use SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin or a Web browser to make IP
address-related settings in a TCP/IPcapable environment.
Important
❒ Configure the printer for the network using the control panel.
❒ The following table shows the control panel settings and their default
values. These items appear in the
[Host Interface] menu.
Setting Name
Value
DHCP
On
IP Address
011.022.033.044
Subnet Mask
000.000.000.000
Gateway Address
000.000.000.000
Frame Type (NW)
Auto
Active Protocol
TCP/IP
Active
NetWare
Active
SMB
Active
AppleTalk
Active
Ethernet Speed
Auto
LAN Type
Ethernet
A Press the {Menu} key.
AGN200S
The [Menu] screen appears on the
display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Host Interface] menu, and
then press the {# Enter} key.
Menu:
Host Interface
The interface setting menu appears.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Network Setup], and then
press the {# Enter} key.
The network setup menu appears.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Active Protocol], and then
press the {# Enter} key.
Note
❒ If DHCP is in use, “IP Address”,
“Subnet Mask”, and “Gateway
Address” are all set automatically.
❒ Make this setting only when it is
necessary. See Software Guide.
63
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 64 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Configuration
E Press the {U} or {T} key to select
Active Protocol, and then press
the {# Enter} key.
Active Protocol:
TCP/IP
The following example explains
activating TCP/IP.
The [Active] or [Not Active] selection
screen appears.
F Press the {U} or {T} key to select
[Active] or [Not Active], and then
press the {# Enter} key.
TCP/IP:
*Active
5
After the settings are made, about
two seconds later, the screen returns to the active protocol menu.
G Set other protocols you need to set
in the same way.
H Press the {Escape} key, the screen
returns to the network setup
menu.
Note
❒ The default is “Active”.
❒ Leave unused protocols “Not
Active”.
❒ Enable TCP/IP to use the Pure
IP environment of NetWare
5/5.1, NetWare 6/6.5.
I If you use TCP/IP, assign the IP
address to the printer. Press the
{U} or {T} key to display [IP Address], and then press the {# Enter}
key.
The current IP address appears on
the display.
To get the IP address for the printer, contact your network administrator.
64
J Press the {U} or {T} key to enter
the left most entry field of the IP
address, and then press the {# Enter} key.
IP Address:
192.022.033.044
Press the {# Enter} key, the screen
changes, and the next field can
then be entered.
Note
❒ Do not set “011.022.033.044” as
the IP address.
❒ The value moves by 10 if the
{U} or {T} key is kept pressed.
❒ When the {# Enter} key is
pressed, the cursor moves to the
next field.
❒ To display the previous field,
press the {Escape} key.
❒ Press the {Escape} key when no
value is entered and the screen
will return to the network setup
menu, without the IP address
changing.
K Make
the other settings in the
same way, and then press the {#
Enter} key.
IP Address:
192.168.000.010
After the settings are made, about
two seconds later, the screen returns to the network setup menu.
L If you use TCP/IP, assign [Subnet
Mask] and [Gateway Address] following the same procedure for
entering the IP address.
M When
you use this machine in
DHCP environment, set DHCP to
“On”.
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 65 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Ethernet Configuration
Important
❒ When DHCP is “On”, you cannot make settings for the following items:
• IP Address
• Subnet Mask
• Gateway Address
Note
❒ Consult your network administrator for information about
making network settings.
N Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [DHCP], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
Network Setup:
DHCP
O Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [On], and then press the {# Enter} key.
DHCP:
*On
Note
❒ “p” shows the current setting.
❒ After about two seconds, the
display returns to the network
setup menu.
P If
you use NetWare, select the
frame type for NetWare.
Select one of the items below if
necessary.
• Auto (Default)
• Ethernet ll
• Ethernet 802.2
• Ethernet 802.3
• Ethernet SNAP
Note
❒ Usually, use the default setting
(“Auto”). When you first select
“Auto”, the frame type detected
by the printer is adopted. If
your network can use more
than two frame types, the printer may fail to select the correct
frame type if “Auto” is selected.
In this case, select the appropriate frame type.
Q Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Frame Type (NW)], and then
press the {# Enter} key.
Network Setup:
Frame Type (NW)
5
The current setting appears on the
display.
R Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play the frame type you want to
use, and then press the {# Enter}
key.
Frame Type (NW):
*Auto Select
After the settings are made, about
two seconds later, the screen returns to the network setup menu.
S Press the {Online} key.
The initial screen appears.
Ready
T Print a configuration page to confirm the settings made.
Reference
For details about printing the
configuration page, see p.28
“Test Printing”.
65
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 66 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Configuration
IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Configuration
Configure the printer to use IEEE
802.11b (Wireless LAN). The following table shows the control panel settings and their default values. These
items appear in the [Host Interface]
menu.
Setting Name
Comm. Mode
Channel
A Press the {Menu} key.
Default Value
802.11 Ad hoc
Inch version
(1-11) 11
AGN200S
Metric version
(1-13) 13
5
Trans. Speed
Auto
SSID
blank (ASSID)
WEP Setting
Not Active
Note
❒ To use IEEE 802.11b (Wireless
LAN), select [IEEE 802.11b] for [LAN
Type] in [Network Setup] in the [Host
Interface] menu, and then set [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], [Gateway Address], [DHCP], [Frame Type (NW)]
and [Active Protocol] under the [Network Setup] menu. For details about
setting items under “Configuring
the Printer for the Network”, see
Software Guide.
❒ The 802.11b interface unit cannot
be used simultaneously with a
standard ethernet interface.
❒ In the [SSID] menu, if blank is specified in 802.11b Ad hoc mode or
Ad hoc mode, [ASSID] appears.
66
The [Menu] screen appears on the
display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [Host Interface], and then press
the {# Enter} key.
Menu:
Host Interface
The interface setting menu appears.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [IEEE 802.11b] , and then press
the {# Enter} key.
The IEEE 802.11b setting menu appears.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [Comm. Mode], and then press
the {# Enter} key.
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 67 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Configuration
E Press the {U} or {T} key to select
the transmission mode of IEEE
802.11b, and then press the {# Enter} key.
Comm. Mode:
*802.11 Ad hoc
After the settings are made, about
two seconds later, the screen returns to the IEEE 802.11b setting
menu.
Note
❒ The factory default is [802.11 Ad
hoc].
❒ To use an IEEE 802.11b card for
which the SSID (Network
Name) setting is not necessary,
select [Ad hoc].
❒ The transmission mode of IEEE
802.11b can also be set using a
Web browser. For details, see
Web Image Monitor Help, and
“Using Web Image Monitor”,
Software Guide.
F If [802.11 Ad hoc] or [Ad hoc] is selected for [Comm. Mode], set the
channel to use for transmission.
Note
❒ Confirm the network administrator for the channel to use.
G Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [Channel], and then press the
{# Enter} key.
The channel currently used appears on the display.
H Press the {U} or {T} key to enter
the channel, and then press the {#
Enter} key.
Channel:
(1-13)
13
I Set [Trans. Speed] in the same way.
Note
❒ The factory default is [Auto]. If
you need to change the transmitting speed depending on environment you are using, select
the appropriate transmitting
speed.
J If [Infrastructure] or [802.11 Ad hoc]
5
is selected for [Comm. Mode], set
SSID to use for transmission.
Note
❒ Confirm the network administrator for SSID to use.
❒ SSID can also be set using a Web
browser. For details, see the
Web Image Monitor Help, and
“Using Web Image Monitor”,
Software Guide.
K Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [SSID], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
The following message appears on
the display.
SSID:
View
If an SSID has been set, you can
check the set SSID. Press the {# Enter} key.
67
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 68 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Configuration
L Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [Enter ID], and then press the
{# Enter} key.
The following message appears on
the display.
SSID:
k
[ 0]
The value in brackets at the upper
right is the number of characters
entered.
M Press the {U} or {T} key to select
characters, and then press the {#
Enter} key.
5
SSID:
Ak
[ 1]
You can now enter the next character.
N Continue entering the key.
Note
❒ The characters that can be used
are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32 bytes).
❒ To display the previous character, press the {Escape} key.
O After entering the key, press the
{# Enter} key twice.
SSID:
[32]
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
After the settings are made, about
two seconds later, the screen returns to the IEEE 802.11b setting
menu.
68
P In the case of using a WEP key on
a network, activate the WEP setting to be used for communication along with WEP.
Note
❒ Confirm the network administrator for the WEP Key to use.
❒ WEP key can also be set using a
Web browser. For details, see
Web Image Monitor Help.
Q Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [WEP Setting], and then press
the {# Enter} key.
The following message appears on
the display.
WEP Setting:
*Not Active
R Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [Active], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
The following message appears on
the display.
Change WEP Key:
Yes (HEX)
Note
❒ When setting the WEP Setting
to [Active], you will need to enter the WEP key. If you have not
entered the key, be sure to enter
it.
❒ If you have entered the WEP
key and change the setting,
press the {U} or {T} key to display [No], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 69 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Configuration
S Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [Yes (HEX)] when inputting a
hexadecimal WEP key or [Yes (ASCII)] when inputting an ASCII
WEP key. Then press the {# Enter}
key.
WEP Key:
k
[ 0]
The value in brackets at the upper
right is the number of characters
entered.
T Press the {U} or {T} key to select
characters, and then press the {#
Enter} key.
WEP Key:
*k
[ 1]
You can now enter the next character.
WEP Key:
**k
[ 2]
Continue entering the key.
Note
❒ When using 64 bit WEP, up to
10 characters can be used for
hexadecimal and up to five
characters for ASCII. When using 128 bit WEP, up to 26 characters can be used for
hexadecimal and up to 13 characters for ASCII.
❒ The number of characters that
can be entered is limited to 10 or
26 for hexadecimal and 5 or 13
for ASCII. If you try to enter too
many characters, the following
message appears:
• hexadecimal
Error: Enter 10
or 26 characters
• ASCII
Error: Enter 5
or 13 characters
❒ For ASCII character strings,
each capital letter and lowercase letter is recognized respectively.
❒ To display the previous character, press the {Escape} key.
U After entering the key, press the
5
{# Enter} key.
WEP Key:
[26]
***************A
After the settings are made, about
two seconds later, the screen returns to the IEEE 802.11b setting
menu.
V Press the {Online} key.
The initial screen appears.
Ready
W Print a configuration page to confirm the settings made.
Reference
For details about printing the
configuration page, see p.28
“Test Printing”.
69
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 70 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Configuration
IEEE 1394 Configuration
Use this procedure to configure the
printer for use in an IEEE 1394 environment. The following table shows
the control panel settings and their
default values. These items appear in
the [Host Interface] menu.
Setting Name
5
IP over 1394
A Press the {Menu} key.
Value
DHCP
On
IP Address1394
011.022.033.044
Subnet Mask1394
000.000.000.000
IP over 1394
Active
SCSI print
Active
Bidi-SCSI print
On
AGN200S
Note
❒ If DHCP is in use, “IP Address1394”
and “Subnet Mask1394” are automatically set.
The [Menu] screen appears on the
display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [Host Interface], and then press
the {# Enter} key.
Menu:
Host Interface
The interface setting menu appears.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display [IEEE 1394 Setup], and then
press the {# Enter} key.
The IEEE 1394 setting menu appears.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [IP over 1394], and then press
the {# Enter} key.
The IP over 1394 setting menu appears.
70
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 71 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
IEEE 1394 Configuration
E Press the {U} or {T} key to select
either [Active] or [Not Active], and
then press the {# Enter} key.
IP over 1394:
*Active
After the settings are made, about
two seconds later, the screen returns to the IEEE 1394 setting
menu.
F Assign the IP address to the print-
er. Press the {U} or {T} key to display [IP Address1394], and then
press the {# Enter} key.
The current IP address appears on
the display.
Note
❒ Do not set the same IP address
as that used for the ethernet network settings or in the same
subnet. Also, do not specify the
same subnet mask.
❒ Do not set “011.022.033.044” as
the IP address.
❒ To get the IP address for the
printer, contact your network
administrator.
G Press the {U} or {T} key to enter
the left most entry field of the IP
address, and then press the {# Enter} key.
Note
❒ The value moves by 10 if the
{U} or {T} key is kept pressed.
❒ You can return the pointer (k) to
the previous (left) entry field by
pressing the {Escape} key.
❒ If you press the {Escape} key
when the pointer (k) is on the
leftmost position, the selected
IP address is reset.
H Set
other fields similarly, and
then press the {# Enter} key.
The settings are made and after
about two seconds, the screen returns to the IEEE 1394 setting
menu.
5
I Set [Subnet Mask1394] in the same
way.
J Press the {Online} key.
The initial screen appears.
Ready
K Print a configuration page to confirm the settings made.
Reference
For printing the configuration
page, see “Printing a Configuration Page”, Software Guide.
IP Address1394:
19k.022.033.044
The pointer (k) moves to the next
entry field automatically.
IP Address1394:
192.02k.033.044
71
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 72 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Configuration
F Press the {U} or {T} key to select
SCSI print
either [Active] or [Not Active], and
then press the {# Enter} key.
A Press the {Menu} key.
SCSI print:
*Active
After the settings are made, about
two seconds later, the screen returns to the IEEE 1394 setting
menu.
G Set
[Bidi-SCSI print] in the same
way.
AGN200S
The [Menu] screen appears on the
display.
5
B Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [Host Interface], and then press
the {# Enter} key.
Menu:
Host Interface
The interface setting menu appears.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [IEEE 1394 Setup], and then
press the {# Enter} key.
The IEEE 1394 setting menu appears.
D Set [SCSI print] and [Bidi-SCSI print]
if necessary.
Note
❒ The default setting is “Active”.
E Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [SCSI print], and the press the
{# Enter} key.
72
H Press the {Online} key.
The initial screen appears.
Ready
I Print a configuration page to confirm the settings made.
Reference
For details about printing the
configuration page, see p.28
“Test Printing”.
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 73 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
6. Installing the Printer Driver
Quick Install
Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0 users can easily install this software using the CD-ROM provided.
Using Quick Install, the PCL printer driver and RPCS printer driver and SmartDeviceMonitor for Client is installed under network environment, and TCP/IP
port will be set.
Important
❒ To install printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows
Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator.
❒ Only the printer driver, and not the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, is installed when using this printer under USB, parallel, or 1394 connection. If you
connect using USB, see Software Guide.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
D Click [Quick Install].
The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
E After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement], and then click
[Next].
73
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 74 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Installing the Printer Driver
F Select the printer model you want to use in the [Select Printer] dialog box.
Note
❒ For network connection via TCP/IP, select the printer whose IP address is
displayed in [Connect To].
❒ For parallel connection, select the printer whose printer port is displayed
in [Connect To].
G Click [Install].
The printer driver installation starts.
H Click [Finish].
A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer
to complete installation.
I Click [Exit] in the first dialog box of the installer, and then take out the CDROM.
Note
❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete. Restart the computer, and then reinstall the other software or printer drivers.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
❒ Select a printer to whose IP address is displayed in [Connect To] to install
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client when using TCP/IP.
6
Reference
Quick Install is not available unless bidirectional communication between
the printer and computer is enabled via parallel connection. See “Install
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client from the CD-ROM provided.”, Software
Guide, for details about bidirectional communication between printer and
computer.
74
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 75 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Install the Operating Instructions
Install the Operating Instructions
The CD-ROM provided with the printer contains an HTML Operating Instructions Manual in HTML version. Follow the above instructions to install it.
Important
❒ System Requirements :
• Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 or
Windows NT4.0.
• 800 x 600 or higher monitor resolution.
❒ Web Browsers :
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 SP2 or later.
• Netscape 6.2 or later.
❒ If you are using Internet Explorer 3.02 or earlier, or Netscape Navigator 4.05
or earlier as your Web browser, a simpler version of the Operating Instructions Manual is displayed.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
6
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work under certain operating system setting. If this is the
case, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
D Click [Install manuals].
E Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation.
F Click [Finish] when the installation is completed.
G Click [Exit].
Note
❒ Auto Run may not work under certain operating system setting. If this is
the case, copy all datas on the CD-ROM root directory to your hard disk
drive, and then launch “Setup.exe” to start the installation.
❒ To uninstall the Operating Instructions Manual, select [Programs] in the
[Start] menu, select your printer driver, and then click [Uninstall]. You can
uninstall each Manual Guide separately.
❒ If you are using an incompatible Web browser and the simpler version of the
Operating Instructions Manual does not correctly display correctly, open
folder “MANUAL\R_MANUAL\G116\ (language) \ (SETUP or MAINTE
or SOFTWARE) \unv\” on the CD-ROM. Double-click on “index.htm”.
75
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 76 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
INDEX
E
Energy Star, 7
Envelope Feeder Type 610, 35
Ethernet, 57, 63
Ethernet Port, 57
1394 Interface Unit, 39, 61, 70
802.11b Interface Unit, 43, 66
A
Attaching 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510,
39
Attaching 802.11b Interface Unit, 43
Attaching Bluetooth Interface Unit, 47
Attaching Duplex Unit AD610, 54
Attaching Envelope Feeder Type 610, 35
Attaching Hard Disk Drive Type 2600, 51
Attaching Memory Unit
(SDRAM module), 36
Attaching Network Data Protection Unit, 53
Attaching Paper Feed Unit Type 610, 33
Available Options, 29
B
Bluetooth Interface Unit, 47
C
Checking the Contents of the Box, 20
Configuration
Ethernet Configuration, 63
IEEE 1394 Configuration, 70
IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)
Configuration, 66
Configuration Page, 28
Connecting the Printer
IEEE 1394 Connection, 61
Network Connection, 57
Parallel Connection, 60
USB Connection, 59
D
Display Language, 27
Duplex Unit AD610, 54
76
G
Guide to the Printer
Control Panel, 14
Exterior, 11
Inside, 13
H
Hard Disk Drive, 51
I
Installing Options, 29
Installing the Printer Driver, 73
Install the Operating Instructions, 75
IP Address, 63
L
Loading Paper, 24
M
Memory Unit (SDRAM module), 36
N
Network, 57, 63
Network Data Protection Unit, 53
O
Option Installation Flow Chart, 30
P
Paper Feed Unit Type 610, 33
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 77 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
Q
Quick Install, 73
S
Safety Information, 2
Setting Up, 17
T
Test Printing, 28
Toner Cartridge, 21
Tray 1, 24
Turning the Power On, 26
U
Unpacking, 20
USB Port, 59
W
Where to Put the Printer, 17
Wireless LAN, 66
77
KirP4GB_Setup-F4_FM_forPaper.book Page 78 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:05 AM
MEMO
78
GB
GB
G116-8600
Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=80 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 4.000000 mm
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.
Power Source
220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 4.5 A or more
Please be sure to connect the power cable to a power source as above.
Laser Safety:
This machine is considered a class I laser device, safe for office/ EDP use. The machine contains 7
milliwatt, 645 - 660 nanometer wavelength, A1GaInp Laser Diode. Safety precautions and interlock
mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
Declaration of Conformity
“The Product complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and its amending directives and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and its amending directives.”
The following label is attached behind the front cover, left side, front facing.
Notice to Users in EEA Countries
802.11b Interface Unit Type F (R-WL11B):
This product complies with the essential requirements and provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 March 1999 on radio equipment and telecommunications
terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.
Important
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or operating the machine.
This product is only for use in EEA or other authorized countries. Outdoor use of this product in Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, or the Netherlands is prohibited.
The CE Declaration of Conformity is available on the Internet at URL:
http://www.ricoh.co.jp/fax/ce_doc/.
This product is only for use in EEA or other authorized countries. Outdoor use of this product in
Belguim,France,Germany,Italy,or the Netherlands is prohibited.
Caution:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licenses.
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility for its
completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing certain items, consult with your legal advisor.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the metric version.
For good print quality, the supplier recommends that you use genuine toner, maintenance kits and parts
from the supplier.
The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of consumables (toner, maintenance kits and parts) other than genuine consumables from the supplier with
your office products.
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Copyright © 2004
Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=80 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 4.000000 mm
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
15-5, Minami Aoyama 1-chome,
Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-8544, Japan
Phone: +81-3-3479-3111
Setup Guide
Setup Guide
Setup Guide
Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A.
RICOH CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
Phone: +1-973-882-2000
The Netherlands
RICOH EUROPE B.V.
Groenelaan 3, 1186 AA, Amstelveen
Phone: +31-(0)20-5474111
United Kingdom
RICOH UK LTD.
Ricoh House,
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,
Middlesex, TW13 7HG
Phone: +44-(0)20-8261-4000
Germany
RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Wilhelm-Fay-Strasse 51,
D-65936 Frankfurt am Main
Phone: +49-(0)69-7104250
France
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
383, Avenue du Général de Gaulle
BP 307-92143 Clamart Cedex
Phone: +33-(0)-821-01-74-26
Model number: Aficio AP610N
Printed in The Netherlands
GB GB G116-8600
Spain
RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.
Avda. Litoral Mar, 12-14,
Blue Building, Marina Village,
08005 Barcelona
Phone: +34-(0)93-295-7600
Italy
RICOH ITALIA SpA
Via della Metallurgia 12,
37139 Verona
Phone: +39-045-8181500
China
RICOH CHINA CO.,LTD.
29/F., Lippo Plaza, No.222
Huai Hai Zhong Road,
Lu Wan District,
Shanghai P.C.:200021
Phone: +86-21-5396-6888
1
Guide to the Printer
2
Setting Up
3
Installing Options
4
Connecting the Printer
5
Configuration
6
Installing the Printer Driver
Singapore
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE.LTD.
260 Orchard Road,
#15-01/02 The Heeren,
Singapore 238855
Phone: +65-6830-5888
Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, please be sure to read
the Safety Information in this manual before using the machine.
G1168600
Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=96 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 4.800000 mm
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
15-5, Minami Aoyama 1-chome,
Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-8544, Japan
Phone: +81-3-3479-3111
Maintenance Guide
Maintenance Guide
Maintenance Guide
Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A.
RICOH CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
Phone: +1-973-882-2000
The Netherlands
RICOH EUROPE B.V.
Groenelaan 3, 1186 AA, Amstelveen
Phone: +31-(0)20-5474111
United Kingdom
RICOH UK LTD.
Ricoh House,
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,
Middlesex, TW13 7HG
Phone: +44-(0)20-8261-4000
Germany
RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Wilhelm-Fay-Strasse 51,
D-65936 Frankfurt am Main
Phone: +49-(0)69-7104250
France
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
383, Avenue du Général de Gaulle
BP 307-92143 Clamart Cedex
Phone: +33-(0)-821-01-74-26
Model number: Aficio AP610N
Printed in The Netherlands
GB GB G116-8606
Spain
RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.
Avda. Litoral Mar, 12-14,
Blue Building, Marina Village,
08005 Barcelona
Phone: +34-(0)93-295-7600
Italy
RICOH ITALIA SpA
Via della Metallurgia 12,
37139 Verona
Phone: +39-045-8181500
China
RICOH CHINA CO.,LTD.
29/F., Lippo Plaza, No.222
Huai Hai Zhong Road,
Lu Wan District,
Shanghai P.C.:200021
Phone: +86-21-5396-6888
Singapore
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE.LTD.
260 Orchard Road,
#15-01/02 The Heeren,
Singapore 238855
Phone: +65-6830-5888
1
Paper and Other Media
2
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
3
Cleaning the Printer
4
Adjusting the Printer
5
Troubleshooting
6
Removing Misfed Paper
7
Appendix
Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, please be sure to read
the Safety Information in the “Setup Guide” before using the machine.
G1168606
Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=96 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 4.800000 mm
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
Copyright © 2004
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page i Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Trademarks............................................................................................................. 1
How to Read This Manual ..................................................................................... 2
1. Paper and Other Media
Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer............................................. 3
Paper Recommendations...................................................................................... 9
Loading Paper............................................................................................................9
Storing Paper .............................................................................................................9
Types of Paper and Other Media .............................................................................10
Paper not supported by this printer ..........................................................................12
Print Area .................................................................................................................13
Loading Paper ......................................................................................................14
Loading Paper in Tray 1 and the optional paper feed unit .......................................14
Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray ...........................................................................21
Loading Envelopes...................................................................................................26
Switching between Paper Trays...............................................................................30
2. Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
Replacing the Toner Cartridge ........................................................................... 31
Replacing the Maintenance Kit........................................................................... 34
Before Replacing......................................................................................................34
Replacing the Friction Pad .......................................................................................35
Replacing the Transfer Roller ..................................................................................37
Replacing the Paper Feed Rollers ...........................................................................39
Replacing the Fusing Unit ........................................................................................41
3. Cleaning the Printer
Cautions to Take When Cleaning .......................................................................45
Cleaning the Friction Pad....................................................................................46
Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller.......................................................................... 47
Cleaning the Registration Roller ........................................................................49
4. Adjusting the Printer
Adjusting the Image Density............................................................................... 51
Adjusting Tray Registration................................................................................52
i
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page ii Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
5. Troubleshooting
Error & Status Messages on the Control Panel ................................................ 55
Printer Does Not Print .........................................................................................62
Checking the port connection...................................................................................64
Other Printing Problems .....................................................................................66
Additional Troubleshooting ................................................................................69
6. Removing Misfed Paper
Removing Misfed Paper ......................................................................................71
When “Remove Misfeed Paper Tray” Appears ................................................. 72
When “Remove Misfeed Internal Path” Appears ..............................................73
When “Remove Misfeed Paper Exit Cover” Appears ....................................... 75
When “Remove Misfeed Duplex Unit” Appears................................................ 78
7. Appendix
Moving and Transporting the Printer................................................................. 81
Moving the Printer ....................................................................................................82
Consumables .......................................................................................................83
Toner Cartridge ........................................................................................................83
Maintenance Kit .......................................................................................................84
Specifications.......................................................................................................85
Mainframe ................................................................................................................85
Options.....................................................................................................................88
INDEX......................................................................................................... 92
ii
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 1 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
IPS-PRINT Printer Language Emulation Copyright© 1999-2000 Oak Technology, Inc., All rights reserved.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth-SIG Inc. worldwide.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might
be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to
those marks.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• Microsoft® Windows® 95 operating system
• Microsoft® Windows® 98 operating system
• Microsoft® Windows® Millennium Edition (Windows Me)
• The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
• The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition
• The product names of Windows ServerTM 2003 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows ServerTM 2003 Web Edition
• The product names of Windows NT® 4.0 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0
1
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 2 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
How to Read This Manual
The following set of symbols is used in this manual.
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in
death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety Information section.
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in minor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury
when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this
symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety
Information section.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
This symbol indicates information or preparations required prior to operating.
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after abnormal operation.
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
This symbol indicates a reference.
Keys that appear on the machine's display.
Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display.
Keys built into the machine's control panel.
Keys on the computer's keyboard.
2
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 3 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
1. Paper and Other Media
Paper and Other Media Supported by This
Printer
This section describes the paper size, feed direction, and the maximum amount
of paper that can be loaded into each paper tray in this printer.
Note
❒ The following symbols and terminology are used to represent the feed direction.
In this manual
K↑(Feed direction)
L↑(Feed direction)
On the display
A4 (297 x 210)
8 1/2 x 11
A5 (210 x 148)
8 1/2 x 5 1/2
Paper feed direction
Short-edge feed direction
Long-edge feed direction
❒ Be careful of the paper feed direction. The direction is determined for each paper size.
3
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 4 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Paper and Other Media
×
B4 JIS
K
257 × 364
×
A4
K
210 × 297
×
L
297 × 210
×
K
182 × 257
×
L
257 × 182
×
K
148 × 210
L
210 × 148
A6
K
105 × 148
11 × 17
K
279 × 432
×
Legal (LG, 81/2 × 14)
K
216 × 356
×
Letter (LT, 8 /2 × 11)
K
216 × 279
×
L
279 × 216
×
B5 JIS
A5
1
×
×
Envelope
Feeder Unit
297 × 420
Paper Tray
(Tray1)
Size (mm)
K
Bypass Tray
Feed direction
A3
1
×
×
×
×
×
×
5 /2 × 8 /2
K
140 × 216
×
Executive
(Exec., 71/4 × 101/2)
K
184 × 276
×
L
276 × 184
×
Folio (81/4 × 13)
K
210 × 330
×
Foolscap (F4, 81/2 × 13)
K
216 × 330
×
F/GL (8 × 13)
K
203 × 330
×
Com#10 Env (4 /8 × 9 /2)
K
104.8 × 241.3
×
×
C5 Env (6.38 × 9.02)
K
162 ×229
×
×
C6 Env (4.49 × 6.38)
K
114 ×162
×
×
DL Env (4.33 × 8.66)
K
110 × 220
×
×
Monarch Env (37/8 × 71/2)
K
98.4 × 190.5
×
×
Custom Size
-
-
×
8K (101/2 × 15.35)
K
267 × 390
×
16K (7.68 × 10 /2)
K
195 × 267
×
L
267 × 195
×
1
1
1
1
4
Paper Feed Unit
(Tray2/3)
❖ Input Paper Sizes (Metric version)
1
×
×
×
×
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 5 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer
•
The size is supported and indicated on the tray dial. Be sure to set the paper size dial to match the actual paper size loaded in the tray.
•
1
The size is supported but not indicated on the tray dial. You should set the
tray dial to “p”, and select the paper size with the control panel.
•
The size is supported but the paper size should be set with the control panel. There is no dial on the tray.
See p.21 “Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray”
See p.26 “Loading Envelopes”
•
The size is supported, but it should be set as a custom size using the control
panel.
The supported size may differ depending on the printer language you use.
Set as a custom size setting using the control panel.
The following sizes are supported:
• Bypass Tray: approximately 90 - 305 mm in width, and 148 - 432 mm in
length.
• Paper Feed Unit (Tray 2/3): approximately 182 - 297 mm in width, and
160 - 432 mm in length.
•
The size is not supported.
5
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 6 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Paper and Other Media
×
Legal (LG)
K
81/2 × 14
×
Letter (LT)
K
81/2× 11
×
L
11 × 81/2
×
51/2× 81/2
K
51/2× 81/2
×
Executive (Exec.)
K
7 /4× 10 /2
×
L
10 /2× 7 /4
×
A3
K
11.26 × 16.54
×
B4 JIS
K
10.12 × 14.33
×
A4
K
8.26 × 5.83
×
L
5.83 × 8.26
×
K
7.17 × 10.12
×
L
10.12 × 7.17
×
K
5.83 × 8.26
B5 JIS
A5
1
1
1
×
Envelope
Feeder Unit
11 × 17
Paper Tray
(Tray1)
Size (inch)
K
Bypass Tray
Feed direction
11 × 17
1
6
Paper Feed Unit
(Tray2/3)
❖ Input Paper Sizes (Inch version)
×
×
1
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
L
8.26 × 5.83
A6
K
4.13 × 5.63
Folio
K
81/4 × 13
×
Foolscap F4
K
81/2 × 13
×
F/GL
K
8 × 13
×
Com#10 Env
K
41/8 × 91/2
×
×
C5 Env
K
6.38 × 9.02
×
×
C6 Env
K
4.49 × 6.38
×
×
DL Env
K
4.33 × 8.66
×
×
Monarch Env
K
37/8 × 71/2
×
×
Custom Size
-
-
×
8K
K
101/2× 15.35
×
16K
K
7.68 × 101/2
×
L
10 /2× 7.68
×
1
×
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 7 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer
•
The size is supported and indicated on the tray dial. Be sure to set the paper size dial to match the actual paper size loaded in the tray.
•
1
The size is supported but not indicated on the tray dial. You should set the
tray dial to “p”, and select the paper size with the control panel.
•
The size is supported but the paper size should be set with the control panel. There is no dial on the tray.
See p.21 “Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray”
See p.26 “Loading Envelopes”
•
The size is supported, but it should be set as a custom size using the control
panel.
The supported size may differ depending on the printer language you use.
Set as a custom size setting using the control panel.
The following sizes are supported:
• Bypass Tray: approximately 3.54 - 12.01 inches in width, and 5.83 - 17.01
inches in length.
• Paper Feed Unit (Tray 2/3): approximately 7.17 - 11.69 inches in width,
and 6.3 - 17.01 inches in length.
•
The size is not supported.
7
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 8 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Paper and Other Media
❖ Paper weight and number of sheets to be set
1
Supported paper weight
Maximum number of
sheets (plain paper)
Tray 1
60 - 105 g/m2 (16 - 28 lb.)
500 (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Bypass Tray
52 - 162 g/m2 (14 - 43 lb.)
100 (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
For other kind of papers,
see p.21 “Loading Paper
in the Bypass Tray”.
Paper Feed Unit (Tray 2, Tray 3)
60 - 105 g/m2 (16 - 28 lb.)
Envelope Feeder Type 2600
See p.26 “Loading Envelopes”.
500 (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Note
❒ Check that the top of the stack is not higher than the limit mark inside the
tray.
❒ The Envelope Feeder Unit requires the installation of the optional Paper
Feed Unit.
❖ Paper size not supported by both side printing
The following paper sizes cannot be printed on both sides:
• Metric version: A5K, A6K, 51/2 × 81/2K, Executive (184 × 246)K, Com#10
Env (104.8 × 241.3)K, C5 Env (162 ×229)K, C6 Env (114 ×162)K, DL Env
(110 × 220)K, Monarch Env(98.4 × 190.5)K.
Custom Size supported by approximately 182 to 297 mm in width, and approximately 148 to 432 mm in length.
• Inch version: A5K, A6K, 51/2 × 81/2K, Executive (71/4 × 101/2)K, Com#10
Env (41/8 × 91/2)K, C5 Env (6.38 × 9.02)K, C6 Env (4.49 × 6.38)K, DL Env
(4.33 × 8.66)K, Monarch Env (37/8 × 71/2)K.
Custom Size supported by approximately 7.18 - 11.68 inches in width, and
approximately 5.83 - 17.00 inches in length.
8
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 9 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Paper Recommendations
Paper Recommendations
Loading Paper
1
Important
❒ Do not use ink-jet printer paper because it may stick to the fusing unit and
cause a paper misfeed.
❒ When printing on OHP transparencies that have a print side, load them with
the print side over on the bypass tray. Not taking this precaution may cause
them to stick to the fusing unit and cause misfeeds.
❒ Set the paper as described below.
• Tray 1: Print side facing down
• Bypass Tray: Print side facing up
• Paper Feed Unit (Tray 2, Tray 3): Print side facing down
❒ Print quality cannot be guaranteed if paper other than the ones recommended
is used. For more information about recommended paper, contact your sales
or service representative.
❒ Do not use paper that has already been printed onto by other printers.
Storing Paper
• Paper should always be stored properly. Improperly stored paper might result in poor print quality, paper misfeeds, or printer damage. Recommendations are as follows:
• Avoid storing paper in humid areas.
• Avoid exposing paper to direct sunlight.
• Store on a flat surface.
• Keep paper in the package in which the paper came.
9
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 10 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Paper and Other Media
Types of Paper and Other Media
Plain Paper
1
Paper thickness
60 - 105 g/m2 (16 - 28 lb.)
Printer setup
Press [Paper Input] menu, [Paper Type], and then [Plain Paper].
Note
❒ The paper type selected using the printer driver overrides that
selected using the control panel.
Printer driver setup
Click [Plain] or [Plain & Recycled] in the [Type:] list.
Enabled paper feeding tray Any input tray can be used.
Number of sheets that can
be set
• Tray 1: 500
• Tray 2, Tray 3 (Paper Feed Unit Type 610): 500
• Bypass Tray: 100
Note
❒ Make sure paper is not stacked higher than the upper limit
mark (T) inside the tray. Make sure paper is not stacked higher
than the paper guides inside the bypass tray.
Both-side printing
Possible
Additional cautions
When printing on 91 - 105 g/m2 paper, print speed is slightly
slower to when printing on paper of 60 - 91 g/m2.
Thick Paper
Paper thickness
105 - 162 g/m2(28 - 43 lb.)
Printer setup
Press [Paper Input] menu, [Paper Type] and then [Thick Paper] on the
control panel.
Note
❒ The paper type selected using the printer driver overrides that
selected using the control panel.
Printer driver setup
Click [Thick] in the [Type:] list.
Enabled paper feeding tray Bypass Tray
Number of sheets that can
be set
10
Make sure paper is not stacked higher than the upper limit mark
(T) inside the tray. Make sure paper is not stacked higher than the
paper guides inside the bypass tray.
Both-side printing
Not possible
Additional cautions
Print speed is slightly slower than when using plain paper.
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 11 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Paper Recommendations
OHP transparencies
Printer setup
Press [Paper Input] menu, [Paper Type], and then [Transparency] on
the control panel.
1
Note
❒ The paper type selected using the printer driver overrides that
selected using the control panel.
Printer driver setup
Click [Transparency] in the [Type:] list.
Enabled paper feeding tray Bypass tray
Number of sheets that can
be set
Load only one OHP transparency at the same time onto the bypass
tray.
Both-sided printing
Not possible
Additional cautions
• Print speed for OHP transparencies is slower than for plain paper.
• Due to switching modes, the machine will be on standby for
thirty or forty seconds after the job was received.
Envelopes
Printer setup
Press [Paper Input] menu, [Paper Type], and then press [Thick Paper]
on the control panel.
Note
❒ The paper type selected using the printer driver overrides that
selected using the control panel.
Printer driver setup
Click [Thick] in the [Type:] list.
Enabled paper feeding tray Any input tray can be used.
Note
❒ Make sure paper is not stacked higher than the upper limit
mark (T) inside the tray. Make sure paper is not stacked higher
than the paper guides inside the bypass tray.
Both-sided printing
Not possible
Additional cautions
• Check the print side is facing up.
• Check there is no air in the envelopes before loading.
• For better print quality, we recommend the right, left, top, and
bottom print margins to be at least 20 mm (0.8”) each.
• Load only one size and type of envelope at a time.
• Before loading envelopes, flatten their leading edges (the edge
going into the printer) by running a pencil or ruler across them.
• Some kinds of envelope might cause misfeeds, wrinkles or
print poorly.
• Print quality on envelopes may be uneven if parts of an envelope have differing thicknesses. Print one or two envelopes to
check print quality.
11
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 12 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Paper and Other Media
Paper not supported by this
printer
1
Avoid using the following paper as
they are not supported by this printer.
• Paper meant for an ink-jet printer
• Bent, folded, or creased paper
• Curled or twisted paper
• Torn paper
• Wrinkled paper
• Damp paper
• Paper that is dry enough to emit
static electricity
• Paper that has already been printed onto, except a preprinted letterhead
Malfunctions are especially likely
when using paper printed on by
other than a laser printer (e.g.
monochrome and color copiers,
ink-jet printers, etc.)
• Special paper, such as thermal paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper
and conductive paper
• Paper whose weight is heavier or
lighter than the limitation
• Paper with windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
• Adhesive label paper on which
glue or base paper is exposed
• Paper with clips or staples
12
• Envelopes in the following conditions:
• damp
• excessively curled or twisted
• stuck together
• damaged in any way
• with stamps attached
• with windows, holes, perforations, cutouts or embossing
• with metal clasps, string ties or
metal folding bars
• designed to be interlocked
• with nicked edges or bent corners
• with rough, wrinkled or laid
finishes
• with any exposed adhesive,
when the flap is in the sealed or
closed position
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 13 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Paper Recommendations
Print Area
❖ Envelope
The following shows the print area
for this printer. Be sure to set the print
margins correctly by the application.
1
❖ Paper
A
B
C
D
Print area
Feed direction
Approx. 4.2 mm (0.18 inches)
Approx. 4.2 mm (0.18 inches)
Note
❒ The print area may vary depending on the paper size,
printer language and printer
driver settings.
A
B
C
D
Print area
Feed direction
Approx. 4.2 mm (0.18 inches)
Approx. 4.2 mm (0.18 inches)
Note
❒ The print area may vary depending on the paper size,
printer language and printer
driver settings.
13
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 14 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Paper and Other Media
Loading Paper
This describes how to load paper into
the paper tray and bypass tray.
1
R CAUTION:
• Do not pull out the paper tray
forcefully. If you do, the tray
might fall and cause an injury.
A Lift the paper tray slightly, and
then pull it out until it stops.
Loading Paper in Tray 1 and
the optional paper feed unit
The following example explains loading procedure for the standard paper
tray (Tray 1). The same procedure can
be used for the optional paper feed
unit.
Important
❒ Make sure paper is not stacked
above the limit mark inside the
tray. Misfeeds might occur.
❒ Do not put different types of paper
in a single paper tray.
❒ Up to 500 sheets of paper can be
loaded in the paper feed unit. This
means a maximum of 1,600 sheets
can be simultaneously loaded
when two additional paper feed
units are installed.
AGN029S
B Lift the front side of the tray, and
then pull it out of the printer.
ZKGY140E
C Load paper into the tray with the
print side down.
ZKGY130E
14
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 15 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Loading Paper
Important
❒ Confirm that the top of the stack
is not higher than the limit mark
inside the tray.
❒ Confirm that paper fits under
the rear guide.
D Lift the front of the tray, and then
slide it carefully into the printer
until it stops.
Changing the paper size
Important
❒ Confirm that the setting of the paper size dial matches the paper size
and feed direction of the paper in
the tray, otherwise the printer
might be damaged, or printing
problems might occur.
The following explanation uses the
example of “Tray 1” for the paper
tray.
1
A Lift the paper tray slightly, and
then pull it out until it stops. Adjust the paper size dial to match
the size and feed direction of paper in the paper tray.
ZKGY150E
Important
❒ Do not slide the paper tray in
with force. If you do, the front
and side guides might move.
Reference
For more information about
type, size and feed direction of
paper that can be loaded in the
tray, see p.3 “Paper and Other
Media Supported by This Printer”.
When you change the paper
size see p.15 “Changing the paper size”.
AGN025S
Important
❒ If you want to use the paper size
and feed direction that are not
indicated on the paper size dial,
set the dial to “p”. In this case,
you should set the paper size
using the control panel.
15
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 16 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Paper and Other Media
B Lift the front side of the tray, and
then pull it out of the printer.
E Slide the tray until it stops.
1
ZKGY170E
ZKGY140E
C If
you load paper larger than
A4K or 81/2 × 11K, you should extend the tray as follows:
F Return the catches to their original positions.
Note
❒ You cannot load paper smaller
than A4K or 81/2 × 11K, if the
tray is extended. In this case, return the tray to its standard
length.
D Slide the catches inwards to un-
ZKGY180E
lock the tray.
Important
❒ Confirm that the catches return
to their original positions securely. If they are not locked securely, paper misfeeds might
occur.
G Adjust the rear and side guides to
the paper size you want to load.
ZKGY160E
ZKGY120E
16
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 17 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Loading Paper
Important
❒ To avoid damage, pinch the paper guides when moving them.
J Attach the paper tray cover pro-
vided when you have pulled out
the tray extension.
H Load paper into the tray with the
1
print side down.
ZKGH240E
ZKGY130E
Important
❒ Confirm that the top of the stack
is not higher than the limit mark
inside the tray.
❒ Confirm that paper fits under
the rear guide.
I Lift the front side of the tray, and
then place it into the printer.
Carefully slide it into the printer
until it stops.
Note
❒ The paper tray cover contains
four mounting holes.
• Use the two outer holes when
attaching the paper tray cover as a cover for the standard
tray.
• Use the two inner holes when
attaching the paper tray cover as a cover for an additional
tray.
ZKGY150E
Important
❒ Do not slide the paper tray in
with force. If you do, the front
and side guides might move.
17
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 18 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Paper and Other Media
D Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
If you load a paper size that is not
selected automatically
play the target paper tray, and
then press the {# Enter} key.
To load paper whose size cannot be
selected automatically, set the paper
size on the control panel. Follow the
procedure described below to set the
paper size.
1
A Press the {Menu} key.
Tray Paper Size:
Tray 2
The paper size selection menu appears.
E Press the {U} or {T} key to display the loaded paper size, and
then press the {# Enter} key.
Tray 2:
8 1/2 x 13
After about two seconds, the display returns to the menu.
AGN200S
The [Menu] screen appears on the
display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Paper Input], and then press
the {# Enter} key.
Menu:
Paper Input
The paper selection menu appears.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [Tray Paper Size], and then
press the {# Enter} key.
The paper tray selection menu appears.
18
F Press the {Online} key.
The initial screen appears.
This completes the setting change.
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 19 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Loading Paper
Specifying custom size paper for the
optional paper feed unit
Important
❒ When printing on custom size paper, specify the paper size using
the control panel or printer driver.
❒ The custom size paper selected using the printer driver overrides
that selected using the control panel. Do not make settings using the
control panel if you have already
made settings using the printer
driver. However, when printing
with a printer driver other than the
RPCS printer driver, you must
configure the settings using control panel.
❒ The following is the range of paper
sizes that can be loaded in each
type of the paper trays:
• Optional paper feed unit (Tray
2, Tray 3): 182 - 297 mm in width
and 60 - 432 mm
❒ The printer cannot print from applications that do not support custom size paper.
A Press the {Menu} key.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Paper Input], and then press
the {# Enter} key.
1
Menu:
Paper Input
The paper selection menu appears.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Tray Paper Size], and then
press the {# Enter} key.
The paper tray selection menu appears.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play the target paper tray, and
then press the {# Enter} key.
Tray Paper Size:
Tray 2
The paper size selection menu appears.
E Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [Custom Size], and then press
the {# Enter} key.
F Press the {U} or {T} key to set
horizontal value, and then press
the {# Enter} key.
Custom Size:
Horiz. 210.0 mm
AGN200S
The [Menu] screen appears on the
display.
Press the {T} or {U} key scrolls
the value in increments of 0.1 mm.
Pressing the {T} or {U} key scrolls
the value in increments of 1 mm.
The screen for entering the length
appears.
19
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 20 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Paper and Other Media
G Press the {U} or {T} key to set the
vertical value, and then press the
{# Enter} key.
1
Custom Size:
Vert.
297.0 mm
After about two seconds, the display returns to the menu.
H Press the {Online} key.
The initial screen appears.
Specifying a paper type for paper tray
and the optional paper feed unit
Improve printer performance by selecting the optimum paper type for
the tray. You can select from the following paper types:
• Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Special Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead.
A Press the {Menu} key.
AGN200S
The [Menu] screen appears on the
display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Paper Input], and then press
the {# Enter} key .
Menu:
Paper Input
The paper type selection menu appears.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Paper Type], and then press
the {# Enter} key .
The paper tray selection menu appears.
20
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 21 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Loading Paper
D Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play the target paper tray, and
then press the {# Enter} key .
When the optional paper feed
units are installed in the printer,
[Tray 2] and [Tray 3] will appear depending on the number of the installed units.
Paper Type:
Tray 2
Loading Paper in the Bypass
Tray
1
Opening and Closing the Bypass Tray
Open the bypass tray
A Open the bypass tray.
The paper type selection menu appears.
E Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play the target paper tray, and
then press the {# Enter} key .
Tray 2:
*Recycled Paper
After about two seconds, the display returns to the menu.
F Press the {Online} key.
The initial screen appears.
Note
❒ The following paper types cannot be printed on both sides:
• Special Paper, Color Paper,
Preprinted.
AGN026S
Close the bypass tray
When you have finished using the bypass tray, close it as shown in the next
step.
A Close by pressing the mark in the
center of the bypass tray.
AGN027S
21
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 22 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Paper and Other Media
Specifying standard size paper for the
Bypass Tray
Important
❒ Shuffle the paper before loading
the stack onto the tray, so multiple
sheets are not fed in together.
❒ Set the size and direction of the
loaded paper on the control panel
or with the printer driver. Make
sure the settings do not conflict.
Otherwise, the paper may jam or
the print quality may be affected.
1
A Slide
the side guides outward,
and load paper until it stops with
the print side up.
ZKGY200E
Note
❒ If you load A4K or larger, or
81/2 × 11 Kor larger, slide out
the bypass tray extension ( )
and then flip it open ( ).
AGN028S
22
B Adjust the side guides to the paper width.
ZKGY220E
Important
❒ Confirm that paper fits under
the side guides.
❒ Sheets of A4K or 81/2 x 11K
length or longer must be loaded
one at a time. Support the paper
by hand so it feeds in properly.
Additionally, since paper feeding and image quality may differ depending on paper
thickness and width, check
print results in advance using
paper you intend to print on.
Note
❒ 45 kg paper or paper of A4K or
8 1/2 x 11 K or longer may not
feed in properly unless it is cut
at right angles.
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 23 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Loading Paper
C To set the paper size and feed direction, Press the {Menu} key.
G Press the {Online} key.
The initial screen appears.
AGN200S
The [Menu] screen appears on the
display.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Paper Input], and then press
the {# Enter} key.
Menu:
Paper Input
The paper selection menu appears.
E Check [Bypass Size] appears, and
then press the {# Enter} key.
The paper size selection menu appears.
Note
❒ To load thick paper, OHP transparencies, or envelopes, make
settings for thick paper or OHP
transparencies using the control
panel and printer driver.
❒ The number of pages that can be
loaded in the bypass tray differs
depending on paper type. Make
sure paper is not stacked above
the paper guides inside the bypass tray.
1
Reference
For details about control panel
settings for custom size paper or
special paper, see p.24 “Specifying custom size paper for the
Bypass Tray”.
For control panel settings when
using thick paper, OHP transparencies, or post cards, see
p.25 “Specifying a paper type
for the Bypass Tray”.
F Press the {U} or {T} key to display the size and orientation of
the paper in the bypass tray.
Bypass Size:
*A4 (210 x 297)
After about two seconds, the display returns to the menu.
23
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 24 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Paper and Other Media
Specifying custom size paper for the
Bypass Tray
Important
❒ The settings of custom sized paper
that take effect are not the settings
made on the control panel but the
settings made in the printer driver.
There is no need to change the settings on the control panel. However, when using a printer driver
other than RPCS, you will need to
change the settings on the control
panel.
❒ Applications that do not allow a
custom paper size to be set cannot
print on custom sized paper.
1
Note
❒ If you print on A3 or longer sheets,
prints may become blurred.
C Check [Bypass Size] appears, and
then press the {# Enter} key.
The paper size selection menu appears.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [Custom Size], and then press
the {# Enter} key.
E Press the {U} or {T} key to set the
horizontal value, and then press
the {# Enter} key.
Custom Size:
Horiz. 210.0 mm
By pressing the key, the value increases or decreases by 0.1 mm. By
pressing and holding the key, the
value varies by 1 mm.
F Press the {U} or {T} key to set the
vertical value, and then press the
{# Enter} key.
A Press the {Menu} key.
Custom Size:
Vert.
297.0 mm
After about two seconds, the display returns to the menu.
G Press the {Online} key.
The initial screen appears.
AGN200S
The [Menu] screen appears on the
display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Paper Input], and then press
the {# Enter} key.
Menu:
Paper Input
The paper selection menu appears.
24
Reference
For details about the printer
driver, see the printer driver
Help.
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 25 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Loading Paper
Specifying a paper type for the Bypass
Tray
By selecting the paper type you want
to load, the printer performs better.
You can select from the following paper types:
• Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Special Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead, Transparency, Thick Paper.
Important
❒ When you load Thick Paper or
transparencies in the Bypass Tray,
always specify the type of paper.
Duplex printing is not possible on
paper in a tray for which Thick Paper or Transparency has been set.
❒ The paper type selected using the
printer driver overrides that selected using the control panel.
A Press the {Menu} key.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Paper Type], and then press
the {# Enter} key.
The paper tray selection menu appears.
1
D Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [Bypass Tray], and then press
the {# Enter} key.
The paper type selection menu appears.
E Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play the type of paper you have
loaded, and then press the {# Enter} key .
Bypass Tray:
Thick Paper
After about two seconds, the display returns to the menu.
F Press the {Online} key.
The initial screen appears.
Note
❒ The following paper types cannot be printed on both sides:
• Special Paper, Color Paper,
Preprinted, Transparency,
Thick Paper.
AGN200S
The [Menu] screen appears on the
display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Paper Input], and then press
the {# Enter} key .
Menu:
Paper Input
The paper selection menu appears.
25
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 26 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Paper and Other Media
Loading Envelopes
As there are many kinds of envelopes,
be sure to check if those to be used are
supported by this printer.
1
A Load
envelopes until they stop,
with the print side up and the
sides of the flaps on the left as
shown below.
Reference
For more information about envelopes, see p.11 “Envelopes”.
Important
❒ Even if the optional envelope feeder is not installed, you can select
envelope sizes for Tray 2 and Tray
3 using the control panel. However, you cannot load envelopes until
the optional envelop feeder unit is
installed.
❒ To install the envelope feeder unit,
the optional paper feed unit must
be installed. See “Attaching Envelope Feeder Unit Type 610”, Setup
Guide.
Loading envelopes onto the Bypass Tray
Reference
With the bypass tray, you can load
up to 10 envelopes at the same
time. For more information about
envelopes, see p.11 “Envelopes”.
To open and close the bypass tray,
see p.21 “Opening and Closing the
Bypass Tray”
26
ZKGY411E
Important
❒ Confirm that the envelope flaps
are securely folded down, and
that there is no air inside the envelopes.
Note
❒ Confirm that the top of the stack
is not higher than the limit mark
on the side guides.
❒ Do not push the stack of envelopes with too much force.
B Slide the side guides against the
edge of the envelope stack.
Note
❒ Confirm that the edges of envelopes fit under the side guides.
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 27 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Loading Paper
C Set the envelope size and feed direction. Press the {Menu} key.
G Press the {# Enter} key to apply
the settings. Wait for a while.
After about two seconds, the display returns to the menu.
1
H Press the {Online} key.
The initial screen appears.
Loading envelopes into the Envelope
Feeder Unit
AGN200S
The [Menu] screen appears on the
display.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Paper Input], and then press
the {# Enter} key.
Menu:
Paper Input
The paper selection menu appears.
E Check [Bypass Size] appears, and
then press the {# Enter} key.
The paper size selection menu appears.
Important
❒ With the optional envelope feeder
unit, you can load up to 60 envelopes at the same time. For more
information about envelopes, see
p.11 “Envelopes”.
The following explanation uses the
example of installing the envelope
feeder unit in “Tray 2”.
A Slide the optional paper feed unit
(Tray 2) out until it stops. Then,
lift it slightly, and then slide it
out.
F Press the {U} or {T} key to select
the envelope type you want to
use.
Bypass Size:
C5 Env(162x229)
ZKGP330E
Reference
For information about types of
envelopes you can select, see p.3
“Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer”.
Note
❒ Keep the paper tray with paper
in a cool and dry place.
B Prepare the envelope feeder Unit.
27
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 28 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Paper and Other Media
C Pinch the side guides, and then
slide them outward until they
stop. Pinch the rear guide, and
then slide it toward the back.
1
ZKGY260E
D Push the bottom plate down until
it locks into place.
Important
❒ Confirm that the envelope flaps
are securely folded down, and
that there is no air inside the envelopes.
Note
❒ Confirm that the top of the stack
is not higher than the limit mark
on the side guides.
❒ Confirm that the envelopes fit
under the side guides.
❒ Do not push the stack of envelopes with too much force.
F Pinch the side guides, and then
slide them along the edge of the
envelope stack.
ZKGP360E
ZKGY370E
E Load envelopes into the envelope
feeder unit, with the print side
down and the flap on the left as
shown in the illustration.
ZKGP380E
28
G Pinch
the rear guide, and then
slide it along the edge of the envelope stack.
ZKGY390E
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 29 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Loading Paper
H Lift the front of the tray, and then
slide it carefully into the printer
until it stops.
K Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Tray Paper Size], and then
press the {# Enter} key.
The paper tray selection menu appears.
1
L Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play the target paper tray, and
then press the {# Enter} key.
Menu:
Tray 2
ZKGP340E
Important
❒ Do not slide the paper tray in
with force. If you do, the front
and side guides might move.
I Press the {Menu} key.
The paper size selection menu appears.
M Press the {U} or {T} key to select
the envelope type you want to
use.
Tray 2:
C5 Env(162x229)
Reference
For more information about
types of envelopes you can select, see p.3 “Paper and Other
Media Supported by This Printer”.
AGN200S
The [Menu] screen appears on the
display.
J Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Paper Input], and then press
the {# Enter} key.
N Press the {# Enter} key to apply
the settings. Wait for a while.
After about two seconds, the display returns to the menu.
O Press the {Online} key.
The initial screen appears.
Menu:
Paper Input
The paper selection menu appears.
29
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 30 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Paper and Other Media
Switching between Paper Trays
When paper of the same size is loaded in both the standard tray and the
paper feed unit (option), paper will be
fed from the standard tray when you
start printing. To print on paper loaded in the paper feed unit, switch the
tray to be used to the paper feed unit
using [Tray Priority] in the [Paper Input]
menu.
1
A Press the {Menu} key.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Tray Priority], and then press
the {# Enter} key.
The paper tray selection menu appears.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to select
the tray type you want to use, and
then press the {# Enter} key.
The following message appears on
the display:
Tray Priority:
*Tray 2
E Press the {Online} key.
The initial screen appears.
AGN200S
The [Menu] screen appears on the
display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Paper Input], and then press
the {# Enter} key .
Menu:
Paper Input
The paper selection menu appears.
30
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 31 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
2. Replacing Consumables
and Maintenance Kit
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
R WARNING:
• Do not incinerate spilled toner
or used toner. Toner dust is
flammable and might ignite
when exposed to an open
flame.
• Disposal should take place at
an authorized dealer or an appropriate collection site.
• If you dispose of the used toner cartridges yourself, dispose of them according to
local regulations.
• Do not store toner, used toner,
or toner containers in a place
with an open flame. The toner
might ignite and cause burns
or a fire.
R CAUTION:
• Keep toner (used or unused) and
the toner cartridge out of reach
of children.
• If toner or used toner is inhaled,
gargle with plenty of water and
move into a fresh air environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.
• If your skin comes into contact
with toner or used toner, wash
the affected area thoroughly with
soap and water.
R CAUTION:
• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large
amount of water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
• Avoid getting toner on your
clothes or skin when removing a
paper jam or replacing toner. If
your skin comes into contact with
toner, wash the affected area
thoroughly with soap and water.
• If toner gets on your clothing,
wash with cold water. Hot water
will set the toner into the fabric
and may make removing the
stain impossible.
Replace the toner cartridge if the following message appears on the display:
Replace
Toner Cartridge
Important
❒ Do not expose the toner cartridge
to light for a long time. Do not
leave the front cover open for a
long time. If the toner cartridge is
exposed to a light for a long time,
the toner cartridge might be damaged and print quality might be reduced.
• If toner or used toner gets into
your eyes, flush immediately
with large amounts of water.
Consult a doctor if necessary.
31
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 32 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
Note
❒ When handling toner cartridges,
never stand them up on either end
or position them upside down.
❒ Store toner cartridges in a cool dark
place.
❒ Actual printable numbers vary depending on image volume and
density, number of pages printed
at a time, paper type and size, and
environmental conditions such as
temperature and humidity. Toner
quality degrades over time. You
may have to replace the toner cartridge prematurely. We recommend you prepare a new toner
cartridge beforehand.
2
A Open the front cover by pushing
the front cover release button.
Note
❒ Do not put the toner cartridge
on an unstable or tilted surface.
C Wipe
around the metallic registration roller by turning with a
soft damp cloth.
ZKGX461E
Important
❒ Do not use chemical cleaner or
organic solvent such as thinner
or benzene.
D Take the new toner cartridge from
the box.
E Place the toner cartridge on a flat
AGN020S
surface. Pull out the tape inside
the unit horizontally while holding the cartridge with one hand as
shown in the illustration.
B Be sure to put the toner cartridge
on a stable, flat surface.
ZKGT151E
AGN022S
32
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 33 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Note
❒ Be sure to remove the tape completely before installing the new
toner cartridge, otherwise the
printer might be damaged.
❒ Keep the toner cartridge horizontal when pulling out the toner seal. Pulling out the toner seal
with the cartridge upright or
tilted can cause printer failure.
❒ Be careful not to get toner dust
on your hands or clothes.
❒ Do not shake or shock the toner
cartridge after pulling out the
toner seal to avoid dirt on paper
surfaces, toner spillage, or
printer failure.
F Hold
the grips of the cartridge,
and then insert it into the printer
until it stops.
H Close the front cover by pressing
the left and right side indentations.
2
ZKGH130E
Important
❒ Do not close the front cover
with force. If you cannot close
the cover easily, pull out the
toner cartridge from the printer
and insert it again. After that,
close the front cover again.
Note
❒ Please cooperate with the toner
cartridge recycling program,
whereby are collected used toner cartridges. For details, consult with the store where the
printer was purchased or with a
sales or service representative.
AGN023S
G Push down the toner cartridge to
settle it in appropriate position.
AGN024S
33
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 34 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
Replacing the Maintenance Kit
R WARNING:
• Do not risk electric shock by
handling the power cord or
plug with wet hands.
2
R CAUTION:
• The inside of this printer becomes very hot. Do not touch
parts labelled “v” (indicating a
hot surface). Touching these
parts will result in burns.
• Grip the plug, not the cord, when
pulling the plug from the socket.
Pulling the cord causes wear
and tear that can result in fire or
electric shock.
• Wait at least one hour after power off before replacing parts. Not
allowing the printer to cool may
result in burns.
The maintenance kit contains parts
for maintaining the printer.
Replace the maintenance kit if the following message appears on the display:
Replace
Maintenance Kit
34
Before Replacing
Replace all the parts included in
Maintenance Kit at the same time. Replace them according to the following
procedure.
A Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable.
Important
❒ Wait at least an hour after power off to allow internal parts to
cool down before replacing the
Maintenance Kit.
B Check
the box contains the following items:
• Friction Pad × 3
See p.35 “Replacing the Friction
Pad”.
• Transfer Roller (with gloves)
See p.37 “Replacing the Transfer Roller”.
• Paper Feed Roller × 3
See p.39 “Replacing the Paper
Feed Rollers”.
• Fusing Unit
See p.41 “Replacing the Fusing
Unit”.
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 35 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Replacing the Maintenance Kit
C Remove
Replacing the Friction Pad
Replace all friction pad of the tray.
There are two kinds of friction pads.
One is for the paper tray (Tray 1), and
the other are for the paper feed unit(s)
(Tray 2, 3). The following procedure
shows how to replacing friction pad
of the paper tray (Tray1).
paper from the paper
tray. Place the tray upside down
on a flat surface.
2
A Lift the paper
tray slightly, and
then pull it out until it stops.
ZKGM160E
D Use a sharp-pointed item like a
ball-point pen, to release the two
catches that lock the friction pad.
AGN029S
B Lift the front side of the tray, and
then pull it out of the printer.
Note
❒ The friction pad may fall off
when the catches are released.
Place your hand over the friction pad while releasing the
catches.
❒ The friction pad spring may
come off. Be careful not to lose
the friction pad spring.
❒ The catches that lock the friction
pad are located at the very back.
ZKGY140E
ZKGM170E
35
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 36 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
E Return the paper tray to its original position, and then remove the
friction pad from the tray.
Note
❒ The friction pad spring may
come off. Be careful not to lose
the friction pad spring.
2
ZKGM180E
F Insert the new friction pad in the
paper tray.
Attach the center projection of the
new friction pad to the spring, and
then align the projection of both
sides of the friction pad to the
holes of the paper tray. Then push
the friction pad as shown in the illustration until it clicks.
ZKGM190E
After pushing in the friction pad,
try pushing it several times to
check it is properly installed. If it
jumps back into position due to the
force of the spring, it is properly installed.
36
G Push the friction pad until it locks
securely.
H If your printer is equipped with
the optional paper feed unit(s),
follow the same procedure when
replacing the friction pad.
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 37 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Replacing the Maintenance Kit
Replacing the Transfer Roller
D Hold the lock levers (“
” parts),
and then pull them.
A Open the front cover by pushing
the front cover release button.
2
ZKGM200E
E Hold the green parts of the roller
AGN020S
B Pull the toner cartridge out of the
on both sides, and then remove
the roller from the printer as
shown in the illustration.
printer, while lifting the front
side.
ZKGM210E
AGN022S
Note
❒ Be sure to place the used cartridge on the level place.
F Insert the new transfer roller on
the socket with the gear of the
roller positioned on the left.
C To
avoid making your hands
dirty with toner from the transfer
roller, wear the gloves included
in the maintenance kit.
ZKGM220E
37
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 38 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
Important
❒ Do not insert the roller on the
back of the socket, or the printer
might be damaged.
❒ Insert the metallic part of the
roller on the socket. If you insert
the sponge part of the roller, the
roller might be damaged.
2
J Lower the toner cartridge when it
touches the back.
G Push
down the green parts of
both sides of the printer until it
clicks as shown in the illustration.
AGN024S
K Close the front cover by pressing
the left and right side indentations.
ZKGM221E
Note
❒ When the transfer roller is set,
the transfer roller cover will return to its original position automatically.
H Take the gloves off.
I Hold the grips of the toner cartridge, and then insert it into the
printer until it stops.
AGN023S
38
ZKGH130E
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 39 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Replacing the Maintenance Kit
Replacing the Paper Feed Rollers
Replace all feed rollers including the
printer and the optional paper feed
unit(s). The following procedure
shows how to replace the printer's paper feed rollers.
A If the optional duplex unit is installed, uninstall them from the
printer.
B Move the printer to the edge of a
sturdy and stable table or desk.
2
R CAUTION:
• When lifting the machine, use
the inset grips on both sides.
Otherwise the printer could
break or cause injury if dropped.
R CAUTION:
• Lifting the paper feed unit carelessly or dropping it may cause
injury.
Important
❒ The following are examples of replacing the paper feed roller on the
paper tray.
❒ You can replace the paper feed
roller on the optional paper feed
unit by following the procedures
below. The paper feed roller on the
optional paper feed unit differs
from the one on the paper tray.
Confirm the type of paper feed
roller you are installing.
AGN021S
Important
❒ Always move the printer horizontally. Moving the printer
facing up on down may cause
the toner to scatter.
❒ Do not put the printer on an unstable or tilted surface.
Note
❒ If the printer is equipped with
the optional paper feed unit, do
not move the printer and the
unit together, because they are
not securely attached.
C Slide the green lock lever to the
left ( ), and then remove the paper feed roller ( ).
AGN017S
A
B
For the paper tray
For the paper feed unit
ZKGM120E
39
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 40 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
D While sliding the green lock lever
to the left ( ), set the new roller
( ). Then return the green lock lever to its original position ( ).
F Place paper in the paper trays and
additional removed paper trays.
Lift the front of the tray, and then
slide it carefully into the printer
until it stops.
2
ZKGM130E
ZKGY150E
Note
❒ Check the green lock lever secures the roller correctly by
making sure the new roller rotates smoothly.
E If the printer is equipped with the
optional paper feed unit(s), follow the same procedure when replacing the paper feed roller.
If you installed two paper feed
units, also replace both paper feed
rollers.
40
G Reinstall the optional duplex unit
if it was removed.
Reference
See p.81 “Moving and Transporting the Printer” , Appendix.
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 41 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Replacing the Maintenance Kit
C Lift the lock levers of the fusing
Replacing the Fusing Unit
unit as shown in the illustration.
R CAUTION:
• The fusing unit becomes very
hot. When installing the new fusing unit, turn off the printer and
wait about an hour. After that, install the new fusing unit. Not
waiting for the unit to cool down
can result in a burn.
2
AGN006S
Replacing the fusing unit
A Open the rear cover by pushing
D Pull the fusing unit out.
the two knobs.
AGN007S
AGN004S
B Remove the rear cover in a hori-
E Pull out the pins on both sides of
the new fusing unit.
zontal direction.
ZKGM010E
ZKGX220E
41
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 42 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
F Replace the new fusing unit into
the printer.
I Close the rear cover.
2
AGN005S
AGN008S
G Push the lock levers of the fusing
unit down until it clicks.
J Print a configuration page to con-
firm that the printer works properly.
Reference
For more information about
printing the configuration page,
s e e “ T e s t P ri n t i n g ” , S e t u p
Guide.
AGN009S
H Insert the rear cover to the inside
grooves on both sides of the printer in a horizontal direction.
ZKGX221E
42
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 43 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Replacing the Maintenance Kit
Replacing the fusing unit with the
duplex unit attached
D Pull out the pins on both sides of
the new fusing unit.
A Push down the lever on the right
side of the duplex unit ( ), and
then pull it out until it stops ( ).
2
ZKGM010E
E Replace the new fusing unit into
the printer.
ZKGX320E
B Lift the lock levers of the fusing
unit as shown in the illustration.
AGN008S
F Push the lock levers of the fusing
unit down until it clicks.
AGN006S
C Pull the fusing unit out.
AGN009S
AGN007S
43
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 44 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
G Align
the power cable with the
groove of the left slide of the duplex unit, and then insert the duplex unit into back of the printer
aligning the rails inside of the
printer until it is connected.
2
ZKGX240E
H Print a configuration page to confirm that the printer works properly.
Reference
For more information about
printing the configuration page,
see “Test Printing”, Setup
Guide.
44
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 45 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
3. Cleaning the Printer
Cautions to Take When Cleaning
R WARNING:
• Do not remove any covers or screws other than those specified in this
manual. Some parts of the machine are at a high voltage and could
give you an electric shock. Also, if the machine has laser systems, direct (or indirect) reflected eye contact with the laser beam may cause
serious eye damage. When the machine needs to be checked, adjusted, or repaired, contact your service representative.
• Do not take apart or attempt any modifications to this machine. There
is a risk of fire, electric shock, explosion or loss of sight. If the machine has laser systems, there is a risk of serious eye damage.
R CAUTION:
• When removing misfed paper, do not touch the fusing unit because it could
be very hot.
Clean the printer periodically to maintain fine printing.
Dry wipe the exterior with a soft cloth. If dry wiping is not enough, wipe with a
soft, wet cloth that is wrung out well. If you still cannot remove the stain or
grime, use a neutral detergent, and then wipe over with a well-wrung wet cloth,
dry wipe, and let it dry.
Important
❒ To avoid deformation, discoloration, or cracking, do not use volatile chemicals, such as benzine and thinner, or spray insecticide on the printer.
❒ If there is dust or grime inside the printer, wipe with a clean, dry cloth.
❒ You must disconnect the plug from the wall outlet at least once a year. Clean
away any dust and grime from the plug and outlet before reconnecting. Accumulated dust and grime pose a fire hazard.
45
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 46 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Friction Pad
If the friction pad is dirty, a multifeed or a misfeed might occur. In this
case, clean the pad as follows:
A Lift the paper tray slightly then
D Load
paper into the paper tray
with the print side up. Carefully
slide the paper tray into the printer until it stops.
pull it out until it stops, and while
lifting the front side of the tray,
pull it out of the printer.
3
ZKGY150E
ZKGY140E
B Place
the tray on a flat surface.
When there is paper in the tray,
remove paper.
C Wipe the brown part of the fric-
tion pad with a soft damp cloth.
Then, wipe it with a dry cloth to
remove the water.
TS3Y250E
Important
❒ Do not use chemical cleaner or
organic solvent such as thinner
or benzene.
46
Important
❒ Do not slide the paper tray in
with force. If you do, the front
and side guides might move.
Note
❒ If misfeeds or multi-feeds of paper occur after cleaning the friction pad, contact your sales or
service representative.
❒ Follow the same procedure to
clean the friction pad of the optional paper feed unit and the
envelope feeder unit.
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 47 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller
Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller
If the paper feed roller is dirty, a misfeed might occur. In this case, clean
the roller as follows:
R CAUTION:
• When lifting the printer, use the
grips on both sides of the printer,
otherwise the printer might fall
and cause personal injury.
• When you move the printer, unplug the power cord from the wall
outlet to avoid a fire or an electric
shock.
A Turn off the power.
B Pull out the plug from the socket.
Remove all the cables from the
printer.
C Lift the paper tray slightly, and
then pull it out until it stops. Lift
the front side of the tray, and then
pull it out of the printer.
3
• When you pull out the plug from
the socket, grip the plug to avoid
damaging the cord and causing
a fire or an electric shock.
Important
❒ The following are examples of
cleaning the paper feed roller on
the paper tray.
❒ You can clean the paper feed roller
on the optional paper feed unit by
following the procedures below.
The paper feed roller on the optional paper feed unit differs from
the one on the paper tray. Confirm
the type of paper feed roller you
are installing.
ZKGY140E
D Move the printer to the edge of a
stable table or desk.
AGN021S
AGN017S
A
B
For the paper tray
For the paper feed unit
Important
❒ Do not put the printer on an unstable or tilted surface.
❒ If the printer is equipped with the
optional paper feed unit, do not
move the printer and unit together
as they are not securely attached.
❒ When lifting the printer, confirm
that the optional paper feed unit
is not attached to the printer.
47
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 48 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Cleaning the Printer
E Slide the green lock lever to the
left ( ), so that the paper feed
roller can be released ( ).
H Move
the printer to the place
where it was placed. Carefully
slide the paper tray into the printer until it stops.
3
ZKGM120E
F Wipe the rubber part of the roller
with a soft damp cloth. Then,
wipe it with a dry cloth to remove
the water.
Important
❒ Do not use chemical cleaner or
organic solvent such as thinner
or benzene.
G While sliding the green lock lever
to the left ( ), set the paper feed
roller to its original position ( ).
Then, return the green lock lever
to its original position ( ).
ZKGM130E
Note
❒ Check the green lock lever secures the roller correctly by
making sure the new roller rotates smoothly.
48
ZKGY150E
Important
❒ Do not slide the paper tray in
with force. If you do, the front
and side guides might move.
Note
❒ Follow the same procedure to
clean the paper feed roller of the
optional paper feed Unit.
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 49 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Cleaning the Registration Roller
Cleaning the Registration Roller
If the registration roller is dirty, a misfeed might occur. In this case, clean
the roller as follows:
R WARNING:
• Be sure to turn off the power
and wait for about 30 minutes
before cleaning the registration roller. Not waiting for the
printer to cool down can result
in a burn.
R CAUTION:
• The inside of this printer becomes very hot. Do not touch
parts labelled “v” (indicating a
hot surface). Touching these
parts will result in burns.
Clean the registration roller if dots
(caused by specks of paper stuck to
the roller) appear on printed OHP
transparencies.
A Turn off the power, and then unplug the power cable.
C Pull the toner cartridge out of the
printer by holding the grips of the
cartridge.
3
AGN022S
Note
❒ Do not hold the toner cartridge
upside down or stand it vertically.
❒ Do not put the toner cartridge
on an unstable or tilted surface.
D Wipe
around the metallic registration roller by turning with a
soft damp cloth.
B Open the front cover by pushing
the front cover release button.
ZKGX461E
AGN020S
Important
❒ Do not use chemical cleaner or
organic solvent such as thinner
or benzene.
49
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 50 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Cleaning the Printer
E Hold the grips of the toner cartridge, and then insert it into the
printer until it stops.
3
AGN023S
F Lower the toner cartridge when it
touches the back.
AGN024S
G Close the front cover by pressing
the left and right side indentations.
ZKGH130E
50
Important
❒ Carefully close the front cover.
If you cannot close the cover
easily, pull the toner cartridge
out of the printer and insert it
again. After that, close the front
cover again.
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 51 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
4. Adjusting the Printer
Adjusting the Image Density
You can adjust the image density
when the print side of the page is a
shaded or print image is too light.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to set the
Important
❒ Extreme settings may create printouts that appear dirty.
❒ Image density settings should be
made from the application or the
printer driver whenever possible.
Image Density:
(-3 +3)
0
A Press the {Menu} key.
image density value.
Note
❒ To maintain a darker image under high volume printing conditions, we highly recommended
that you select 3 from the control panel.
❒ You can adjust the image density in seven steps from -3 to +3.
Increasing the value makes the
printouts darker and decreasing
the value makes the printouts
lighter.
E Press the {# Enter} key .
AGN200S
The [Menu] screen appears on the
display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
Return to the maintenance menu.
F Press the {Online} key.
The initial screen appears.
play [Maintenance], and then press
the {# Enter} key .
Menu:
Maintenance
The maintenance menu appears.
C Check [Image Density] is displayed,
and then press the {# Enter} key.
51
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 52 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Adjusting the Printer
Adjusting Tray Registration
You can adjust the registration of
each tray. The vertical adjustment is
used for all trays. Normally, you need
not update the registration. But when
the optional paper feed unit or the
duplex unit is installed, updating is
useful in some cases.
The following procedure describes
how to adjust tray 2. The same procedure applies to other trays as well.
A Press the {Menu} key.
4
D Print the test sheet to preview the
settings. Confirm that [Prt. Test
Sheet] is displayed, and then press
the {# Enter} key.
A screen prompting you to select
the tray to be adjusted appears.
E Press the {U} or {T} key to select
the tray to adjust, and then press
the {# Enter} key.
Prt. Test Sheet:
Tray 2
The test sheet prints out. The display returns to the registration
menu. Press the {Escape} key.
F Confirm the position of the image
on the test sheet, and then adjust
the registration value.
AGN200S
The [Menu] screen appears on the
display.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to dis-
play [Maintenance], and then press
the {# Enter} key .
Menu:
Maintenance
The maintenance menu appears.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Registration], and then press
the {# Enter} key .
The registration menu appears.
52
ZKGX480E
G Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Adjustment], and then press
the {# Enter} key.
Adjustment:
Horiz: Tray 2
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 53 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Adjusting Tray Registration
H Press the {U} or {T} key to set the
registration value (mm).
Horiz: Tray 2:
(-4.0 +4.0) 0.0
I Press the {U} or {T} key to set the
digit of the registration value
(mm).
Increase the value to shift the print
area in the positive direction, and
decrease to shift in the negative direction.
4
TS3X001N
Note
❒ Pressing the {U} or {T} key
makes the value increase or decrease by 1.0 mm steps.
J Press the {# Enter} key.
K Press the {Escape} key.
The display returns to the print
area [Adjustment] menu.
Registration:
Adjustment
L Print the test sheet to confirm the
adjustment result.
M Press the {Online} key.
The initial screen appears.
53
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 54 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Adjusting the Printer
4
54
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 55 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
5. Troubleshooting
Error & Status Messages on the Control Panel
This section explains what the messages that appear on the control panel mean
and what to do when a particular message appears.
❖ Messages (in alphabetical order)
Messages
/Second messages
Call Service: EC
Power Off On
/ If Error Reoccur
Description
Solution
A communication error sent
from the engine to the controller has occurred in the printer.
Turn the power off, and then on. If the
message appears again, call your sales
or service representative.
Call Service
Cannot check
Signal in Ad hoc
Change Setting
Tray #
/ Paper Size:
Paper Type:
An attempt to check the radio sig- To check the radio signal , select Infranal was made while the commu- structure in the communication mode
nication mode was set to [802.11 settings.
Ad hoc] in the interface settings.
The paper size and type setting
in the tray differs from that of
actual paper size and type in
the tray.
#: tray number
Load paper of the selected size in the
tray, and then change the paper size
setting with the control panel. Or,
press {Form Feed}, and then select the
tray using the control panel. Or, press
{Job Reset} to cancel the print job.
You can make to setting to print disregarding the error message.
Close Duplex
Unit Cover
The cover of the optional duplex unit is open.
Close the cover of the optional Duplex
Unit.
Close
The front cover is open.
Close the front cover by pressing the
left and right side indentations.
The paper exit cover or the rear
cover is open.
Close the paper exit cover or the rear
cover.
Front Cover
Close Rear/Paper
Exit Cover
DHCP assigned
Cannot change
An attempt to change the IP ad- Make the change after setting DHCP
dress, subnet mask or gateway to [Off].
address was made while
DHCP was set to [On].
Energy Save Mode
The printer is in Energy Saver
mode.
Error: Enter 5
An ID with an invalid number of
Enter the correct number of digits for
digits was entered for the WEP key. the WEP key.
or 13 characters
Error: Enter 10
or 26 characters
No action required.
An ID with an invalid number of
Enter the correct number of digits for
digits was entered for the WEP key. the WEP key.
55
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 56 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Troubleshooting
Messages
/Second messages
Hardware Problem
Ethernet
Hardware Problem
HDD
Description
Solution
An error has occurred in the
optional Network Interface
Board.
Turn the power off, and then on. If the
message appears again, call your sales
or service representative.
An error has occurred in the
optional Hard Disk Drive.
Turn the power off, and then on, If the
message appears again, call your sales
or service representative.
Turn off the power. Replace the Hard
Disk Drive and turn on the power.
See “Attaching Hard Disk Drive Type
2600 ”, Setup Guide.
Turn off the power. Remove the Hard
Disk Drive and turn on the power.
Note
❒ If the Hard Disk Drive is not installed, you cannot send the sample print job, locked print job and
download the font to Hard Disk
Drive using the PS Utility for Mac.
5
Hardware Problem
IEEE1394
The printer identified an IEEE
1394 interface board error.
Turn the power off, and then on.
Remove and re-install the IEEE 1394
interface board correctly.
A Check the IEEE 1394 interface
board is correctly attached to the
computer.
B Check the IEEE 1394 interface ca-
ble is securely connected.
C Unplug the IEEE 1394 interface cable
which is connected to the printer.
D Restart the computer. If the mes-
sage appears even after executing
above operation, proceed to the
following steps.
E Execute the utility tool for IEEE
1394 interface board that is stored
in the following path in the CDROM labeled “Printer Drivers and
Utilities”: UTILITY\ 1394
Important
❒ For details about using the utility
tool for IEEE 1394, see the README file in the same directory in
the CD-ROM. If the message appears again, contact your sales or
service representative.
See “Attaching 1394 Interface Unit
Type 4510”, Setup Guide.
56
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 57 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Error & Status Messages on the Control Panel
Messages
/Second messages
Hardware Problem
Option RAM
Description
The printer identified an optional RAM error.
Solution
Turn the power off, and then on. Remove and re-install the optional
RAM. If the message appears again,
contact your sales or service representative.
See “Attaching Memory Unit Type C
256MB (SDRAM Module)”, Setup
Guide.
Turn off the power, remove the memory unit, and then turn on the power.
Note
❒ If you remove the memory unit,
you must set up the option with
the printer driver.
❒ In this case, you might not be able
to print complex print jobs.
Hardware Problem
Parallel I/F
Hardware Problem
USB
Hardware Problem
Wireless Board
There is a problem with the
parallel interface.
If you use the parallel I/F, replace the
interface cable that caused the error. If
the message appears again, contact
your sales or service representative.
There is a problem related to
the Universal Serial Bus Connection and Hardware.
Turn the power off, and then on. If the
message appears again, contact your
sales or service representative.
An error was detected in the
IEEE 802.11b interface unit or
the Bluetooth interface unit.
Turn the power off, and then on. Remove and re-install the IEEE 802.11b
interface unit or the Bluetooth interface unit correctly.
5
If the message appears again, contact
your sales or service representative.
See “ Attaching 802.11b Interface Unit
Type F ” or “Attaching Bluetooth Interface Unit Type C ”, Setup Guide.
Hardware Problem
Wireless Card
The IEEE 802.11b interface unit
or the Bluetooth interface unit
could not be detected when the
power was turned on. The IEEE
802.11b interface card or the
Bluetooth interface card was
removed after the power was
turned on. An error was detected in the IEEE 802.11b interface
card or the Bluetooth interface
card.
Turn the power off, and then on. Remove and re-install the IEEE 802.11b
interface unit or the Bluetooth interface unit correctly.
If the message appears again, contact
your sales or service representative.
See “ Attaching 802.11b Interface Unit
Type F ” or “Attaching Bluetooth Interface Unit Type C ”, Setup Guide.
57
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 58 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Troubleshooting
Messages
/Second messages
HDD Full
Solution
The maximum HDD area size Delete the disused form/font types.
for form/font has been exceeded.
The optional Hard Disk Drive
is full. The sample print job or
locked print job to be sent from
the computer is too large to
store.
Delete any unnecessary stored files.
You cannot print the sample
print and the locked print jobs,
because the optional Hard Disk
Drive is not installed.
Install the Hard Disk Drive.
Hex Dump Mode
The printer is in Hex Dump
Mode.
No action required.
Invalid Data
The printer has received irregular data.
Turn the power off, and then on. If the
message appears again, contact your
sales or service representative.
HDD not Installed
5
Description
Power Off On
Invalid Password
Try again
Load Correct
Size Paper
/ Press #
See “Attaching Hard Disk Drive Type
2600”, Setup Guide.
The password entered using
Enter the correct password using the
the control panel is not correct. control panel.
The paper size setting on the
tray differs from that of actual
paper size in the tray.
to continue
Load { paper size } paper of the selected feed direction and paper size into
the tray. Printing will not automatically resume if the paper size and direction setting is incorrect. Make sure
that the paper feed directions set in
the printer driver and on the control
panel are the same. There are two
methods to resume printing.
A Use the control panel to set the cor-
rect paper size and direction of the
paper in tray. Then Press the {# Enter} key .
B Press {Form Feed} and select the
tray with the control panel.
Load Paper
The paper type and size settings for this tray do not match
the size and type of paper actually loaded.
Load paper into the tray indicated,
then press the {# Enter} key to resume
printing. Or press {Form Feed} and select the tray that holds a different type
of paper. To cancel printing, press {Job
Reset}. Then Press the {# Enter} key .
There is no paper left in this
tray.
Load paper into the tray indicated.
or Form Feed
/ Paper Size:
#: tray number
or Form Feed
/ Paper Size:
Paper Type:
Load Paper:Tray #
Paper Type:
58
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 59 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Error & Status Messages on the Control Panel
Messages
/Second messages
Description
Solution
The menu is protected and the
settings cannot be changed.
Wait for two seconds until the previous display appears.
No Files exist
There are no files available for
the sample print job or the
locked print job.
Wait for two seconds until the previous display appears.
Offline
The printer is offline and cannot print data.
Press {Online} key.
Menu Protected
Cannot change
P= XX I= XXXXXXXX A controller error. The SC
number indicates the problem.
Power Off On
/ If Error Reoccur
Turn the power off, and then on. If the
message appears again, call your sales
or service representative.
Call Service
Processing...
Print data is being processed.
Wait a while.
RC Gate
Cannot communicate with RC
Gate.
Check the device or the RC Gate network connection.
Ready
The default ready message. The
printer is ready to use.
No action required.
Remove Misfeed
There is misfeed in the Duplex
Unit.
Remove the misfed paper.
There is a misfeed in the printer.
Remove the misfed paper.
There is a misfeed in the paper
exit cover.
Remove the misfed paper.
Paper is jammed in the specified input paper tray.
Remove the misfed paper.
The standard tray is full, and
the print job is suspended.
Remove paper from the standard tray,
and the print job will be resumed automatically.
connection error
Duplex Unit
/ Open Duplex
5
See p.78 “When “Remove Misfeed
Duplex Unit” Appears”.
Unit Cover
Remove Misfeed
Internal Path
/ Open
See p.73 “When “Remove Misfeed Internal Path” Appears”.
Front Cover
Remove Misfeed
Paper Exit Cover
/ Open Paper
See p.75 “When “Remove Misfeed Paper Exit Cover” Appears”.
Exit Cover
Remove Misfeed
Paper Tray
/ Pull out Tray
Remove Paper
Standard Tray
Replace
Maintenance Kit
See p.72 “When “Remove Misfeed Paper Tray” Appears”.
It is time to replace the mainte- Replace the new maintenance kit.
nance kit (friction pad, paper
See p.34 “Replacing the Maintenance
feed roller, transfer roller and
Kit”.
fusing Unit).
59
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 60 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Troubleshooting
Messages
/Second messages
Replace
Toner Cartridge
Description
Solution
The toner cartridge is not set
correctly or toner is almost run
out.
Set the toner cartridge correctly.
The toner dust is full.
Prepare a new toner cartridge. If the
image density gets too light, replace
the toner cartridge with a new one.
See p.31 “Replacing the Toner Cartridge”.
See p.31 “Replacing the Toner Cartridge”.
Reset Duplex
Unit correctly
Reset Toner
Cartridge
5
A communication error sent
Set the duplex unit correctly. If the
from the system unit to the du- problem persists, call your service
plex unit.
provider.
The toner cartridge is not set
correctly.
Set the toner cartridge correctly.
See p.31 “Replacing the Toner Cartridge”.
The toner cartridge is not set in- If the cartridge is installed, close the
stalled.
front cover and turn the off power
switch and then on. If the message appears again, contact your sales or
service representative.
Reset Tray #
Set the indicated paper input tray correctly.
or Form Feed
The indicated paper input tray
is not set correctly, or not set.
Resetting Job...
The print job is being reset.
Wait for a while.
ROM Update
The printer is waiting for updated data.
Don't turn off the printer while it is
waiting for data.
Receiving Data
The printer is receiving updated data.
Don't turn off the printer while it is receiving data.
SC XXX-X
An error has occurred.
Turn the power off, and then on. If the
message appears again, contact your
sales or service representative.
Supply order has failed.
The use is required to reset the job.
Authentication for the SD card
has failed.
Turn the power off, and then on. If the
message appears again, contact your
sales or service representative.
A setting change is currently in
process on the computer side.
The user must wait until the change is
complete.
#: tray number
Waiting for Data
ROM Update
Power Off On
If Error Reoccur
Call Service
Supply order
failed
SD authenticatn
failed
Setting change
in process
60
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 61 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Error & Status Messages on the Control Panel
Messages
/Second messages
Setting changed
Description
Solution
[RAM Disk] or [Notify by E-mail]
setting has been changed.
Restart the printer so the new settings
can take effect.
SSID not entered
This message appears if the
SSID has not been entered.
Enter the SSID.
Toner is almost
The toner is almost run out.
Prepare a new toner cartridge. If the
image density gets too light, replace
the toner cartridge with a new one.
Restart Printer
empty
See p.31 “Replacing the Toner Cartridge”.
Update Mode Err.
The printer has failed to start
updating data.
Turn the power off, and then on to restart.
Waiting...
The printer is waiting for the
next print job.
Wait a while.
Warming up...
The printer is warming up or
toner is being supplied.
Wait until the panel display change
the [Ready].
Power Off On
5
61
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 62 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Troubleshooting
Printer Does Not Print
Possible Cause
Is the power on ?
Solutions
Confirm that the cable is securely plugged into the power outlet
and the printer.
Turn on the power.
Does the Online indicator
stay on ?
If not, Press the {Online} key to light it.
Does the Alert indicator
stay red ?
If so, check the error message on the display and take the required
action.
Is paper loaded ?
Load paper into the paper tray or onto the bypass tray.
Can you print a configura- If you cannot print a configuration page, it probably indicates a
tion page ?
printer malfunction. Contact your sales or service representative.
See “Test Printing”, Setup Guide.
Connect the interface cable securely. If it has a fastener, fasten it
Is the interface cable consecurely as well.
nected securely to the
printer and the computer ?
5
Are you using the correct
interface cable ?
The type of interface cable you should use depends on the computer you use. Be sure to use the correct one.
If the cable is damaged or worn, replace it with a new one.
Is the Data In indicator
blinking or lit after starting
the print job ?
If not blinking or lit, the data is not being sent to the printer.
❖ If the printer is connected to the computer using the interface cable
Check the port connection setting is correct. For details about
checking the port connection, see p.64 “Checking the port connection”.
❖ Network Connection
Contact your network administrator.
How is the signal strength
when using the wireless
LAN ?
❖ Ad hoc Mode or 802.11 Ad hoc Mode
Either move to a location where the signal is good, or remove
obstructions.
❖ Infrastructure Mode
Check the signal status from the [Maintenance] menu on the
control panel. If the signal is poor, either move to a location
where it is good, or remove obstructions.
How is the signal strength
when using Bluetooth ?
Try the following:
• Check the Bluetooth interface unit is installed properly.
• Check there are no obstructions between computer, printer
and other devices.
• Change the location of the computer.
• Change the location of the printer.
62
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 63 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Printer Does Not Print
Possible Cause
When you use the optional
Bluetooth interface unit.
Solutions
SPP
A Make sure the machine you want to use appears in the 3Com
Bluetooth Connection Manager.
B Make sure “Bluetooth Serial Client (COMx)” appears under
Client Ports in the 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.
C Restart computer, this printer, and the other devices.
D Make sure no IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) or other Bluetooth
devices are in use.
Note
❒ Interference may occur with the IEEE 802.11b wireless
LAN interface board. Such interference may affect the
transmission speed and other functions.
E Transmissions between computers, other devices, and this
printer can be blocked by obstructions. Move this printer, computers, and other devices, if necessary.
HCRP, BIP
5
A Restart the computer, this printer, and other devices.
B Make sure no IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) or other Bluetooth
devices are in use.
Note
❒ Interference may occur with the IEEE 802.11b wireless
LAN interface board. Such interference may affect the
transmission speed and other functions.
C Transmissions between computers, other devices, and this
printer can be blocked by obstructions. Move this printer, computers, other devices, if necessary.
If printing still does not start, contact your sales or service representative. Consult with the store where the printer was purchased for information about the
location of sales or service representatives.
63
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 64 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Troubleshooting
Checking the port connection
When the printer is directly connected via the PC cable and the data-in indicator
does not flash or light up, the method of checking the port connection is as follows.
• For a parallel port connection, port LPT 1 or LPT 2 should be set.
• For a USB port connection, port USB00 (n) *1 should be set.
• For a IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) port connection, port 1394_00(n) *1 should be set.
*1
(n) is the number of printers connected.
Windows 95/98/Me
A Click [Start], point to [Settings] and then click [Printers].
B Click to select the icon of the printer. Next, on the [File] menu, click [Properties].
5
C Click the [Details] tab.
D Check the [Print to the following port] box to confirm that the correct port is selected.
Windows 2000
A Click [Start], point to [Settings] and then click [Printers].
B Click to select the icon of the printer. Next, on the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Port] tab.
D Check the [Print to the following port] box to confirm that the correct port is selected.
Windows XP Professional, Windows Server 2003
A Select the [Printers and Faxes] window from [Start] on the taskbar.
B Click to select the icon of the printer. Next, on the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Port] tab.
D Check the [Print to the following port(s).] box to confirm that the correct port is
selected.
64
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 65 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Printer Does Not Print
Windows XP Home Edition
A Select the [Control Panel] window from [Start] on the taskbar.
B Click [Printers and Other Hardware].
C Click [Printers and Faxes].
D Click to select the icon of the printer. Next, on the [File] menu, click [Properties].
E Click the [Port] tab.
F Check the [Print to the following port(s).] box to confirm that the correct port is
selected.
Windows NT 4.0
5
A Click [Start], point to [Settings] and then click [Printers].
B Click to select the icon of the printer. After that, on the [File] menu, click
[Properties].
C Click the [Port] tab.
D Check the [Print to the following port] box to confirm that the correct port is selected.
65
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 66 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Troubleshooting
Other Printing Problems
Status
The print side of the page
is a hazy gray.
Possible Causes, Descriptions, and Solutions
Adjust the image density.
See p.51 “Adjusting the Image Density”.
If paper is curled, correct it.
If you continuously print data that contains extremely small
amount of words or images in the printable area, the printed side
of the page could be a hazy gray. Adjust the image density.
See p.51 “Adjusting the Image Density”.
Shaking the toner cartridge after pulling out the toner seal can
cause dirt on paper surfaces, toner spillage, or printer failure. If you
have accidentally shaken the toner cartridge, print some pages
(about 50 pages) until the dirt disappear.
The paper's reverse side is
dirty.
5
Paper loaded in the Paper Tray or Paper Feed Unit may not match
the paper size dial setting. Set the paper size dial so it matches the
size and feed direction of the paper in the tray.
See p.14 “Loading Paper in Tray 1 and the optional paper feed
unit”.
The size and feed direction of paper in the Bypass Tray may not
match the control panel settings. Check the control panel settings
so they match the size and feed direction of the paper in the tray.
See p.21 “Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray”.
The next sheet of paper printed may have a dirtied reverse side if
the data size is larger than the paper being printed onto, such as A4
data onto B5 paper.
Image quality varies
when printing on thick
paper or on OHP transparencies.
Switch to Thick Paper mode.
Some parts of the print
image are not clear.
Make the image density darker.
• When toner is not fused enough, set it to “On”.
• When the image is blurred, set it to “----”.
See “Making Printer Setting Using Control panel”, Software Guide.
See p.51 “Adjusting the Image Density”.
If Toner Saving mode is selected using the control panel, the whole
image gets lighter.
The print image is not
clear.
Due to a sudden change in temperature, condensation might appear inside the printer, reducing print quality. If this occurs, when
you move the printer from a cold room to a warmer room, do not
use the printer until it acclimatizes to the temperature.
Nothing is printed on the
paper.
Check if the tape of the toner cartridge is completely removed. Be sure
to remove the tape completely when replacing the toner cartridge.
See p.31 “Replacing the Toner Cartridge”.
Note
❒ If the power switch is turned on with the tape still attached to
the toner cartridge, the printer might be damaged.
66
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 67 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Other Printing Problems
Status
Multiple pages are fed
through the printer at
once.
Possible Causes, Descriptions, and Solutions
Clean the friction pad if it is dirty.
See p.46 “Cleaning the Friction Pad”.
If the problem persists, set the paper the other way up, and then
print it.
Note
❒ This method cannot be used with the adhesive label paper.
Remove all paper from the tray and fan it gently to get air between
the sheets. After that, load it back into the tray.
Set the paper the other way up.
The image is printed on
the reverse side of the paper.
Paper misfeeds occur frequently.
Check the paper size settings. The size set with the paper size dial might
be different from the actual paper size. Make the correct dial setting.
See p.14 “Loading Paper”.
5
Use the recommended paper. Avoid using curled, folded, wrinkled, perforated or glossy paper.
See p.9 “Paper Recommendations”.
Clean the paper feed roller, friction pad and/or registration roller,
if they are dirty.
See p.46 “Cleaning the Friction Pad”, p.47 “Cleaning the Paper
Feed Roller”, or p.49 “Cleaning the Registration Roller”.
If the problem persists, set the paper the other way up, and then print it.
Note
❒ This method cannot be used with the adhesive label paper.
Thin paper, if printed on both sides, may curl up at the corners and
get wrinkled and clogged. Select [Curl Prevention] [On] from the
[Maintenance] menu.
Open the front cover of the printer and then close it.
The control panel error
message stays on after re- See p.71 “Removing Misfed Paper”.
moving the misfed paper.
Output are not delivered Check the paper size settings. The size selected with the paper size
to the selected tray you re- dial might be different from the actual paper size. Make the correct
quire.
dial setting.
See p.14 “Loading Paper in Tray 1 and the optional paper feed
unit”.
When using the Bypass Tray, set the paper size using the control
panel.
See p.21 “Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray”.
When you are using a Windows operating system, the printer driver settings override those set using the control panel. Set the desired output tray using the printer driver.
See the driver's online Help file.
67
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 68 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Troubleshooting
Status
Possible Causes, Descriptions, and Solutions
The printed image is different from the image on
the computer.
When you use some functions, such as enlargement and reduction,
the layout of the image might be different from that shown in the
computer display.
It takes too much time to
resume printing.
The data is so large or complex that it takes time to process it. If the
Data In indicator is blinking, the data processing is being done.
Just wait until it resumes.
Changing the paper feed direction may sometimes reduce the time
to resume printing.
The image is printed in
the wrong orientation.
Set the correct orientation under the “PCL Menu” with the control
panel. See “Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel”, Software Guide.
Confirm that the setting of orientation has been set in the application you use.
Set the correct paper size and feed direction that matches tray settings on the RPCS printer driver.
5
Part of the image cannot
be printed.
A paper size which is smaller than that selected in the application
is used for printing. Load the correct size of paper.
Network configurations
Print a configuration page and check the network settings.
you have made do not become effective.
A portion of the image is You can print using the procedure below.
not printed or an error oc- • Set [Memory Usage] in the System Menu to [Font Priority] on the
curred in the PostScript
control panel.
printer driver when printing with PCL or the PostImportant
Script printer driver.
❒ Return the setting to [Font Priority] after you have finished
printing. If the setting is left as [Font Priority], continuous
printing speed may decrease, two-sided printing may be
canceled or a job reset may occur during continuous printing.
• If the entire image is not printed out properly even after changing the above setting, add an additional memory unit.
The paper size appears on
the control panel and
printing is not performed
with PDF Direct Print.
When using PDF Direct Print, printout requires paper set within
the PDF file. When a message indicating a paper size appears, either place the indicated size in the paper tray, or perform Form
Feed.
Also, if [Sub Paper Size] in the System Menu is set to [On], printing
is performed assuming letter size and A4 size to be the same size.
For example, When a PDF file set to A4 size paper is printed using
PDF Direct Print and letter size paper is installed in the paper tray,
the file will print out. This applies similarly to the opposite case.
If the problem cannot be solved, contact your sales or service representative.
68
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 69 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Additional Troubleshooting
Additional Troubleshooting
Problems
Solutions
Strange noise is heard.
If a supply was recently replaced or an option attached in the
area the strange noise is coming from, check the supply or
option is properly attached. If the strange noise persists, contact your sales or service representative.
No e-mail is received when an
Alert occurs, and after resolving
an Alert.
Confirm [Notify by E-mail] is [On] using the System Menu on
the Control Panel. See “System Menu”, Software Guide.
Access the printer through the Web browser, log on as an
Administrator on the Web Image Monitor, and then confirm
the following settings in [E-mail Notification] :
• Device E-mail Address
• Groups to Notify
• Select Groups/Items to Notify
5
Reference
For details about the settings, see Web Image Monitor
Help.
Access the printer through the Web browser, log on as an
Administrator on the Web Image Monitor, and then confirm
the settings of the SMTP server in [E-mail].
Reference
For details about the settings, see Web Image Monitor
Help.
When the power is turned off before the e-mail is transmitted, the e-mail will not be received.
Check the e-mail address set for the destination. Confirm the
printer's operation history using the Web Image Monitor's
System Log menu in [Network]. If the e-mail was sent but not
received, it is possible the destination was incorrect. Also
check the information concerning error mail from the e-mail
server.
The setting for [Notify by Email]
After changing the setting, turn the main unit's power off
on the System Menu was
and then back on again.
changed from [Off] to [On], but email is not arriving.
Error notification e-mail was re- Check e-mail is set for sending using the Web Image Moniceived, but no error-solved etor's [E-mail Notification] at the time the error was fixed. You
mail is received.
must click the [Edit] button of [Detailed Settings of Each Item] in
[E-mail Notification], and set [Notify when error:] to [Occurs &
Fixed] on the displayed screen.
Reference
For details about the settings, see Web Image Monitor
Help.
69
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 70 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Troubleshooting
Problems
Solutions
Alert Resolving is set for sending e-mail, but no Alert-resolved e-mail is sent.
If the power of the main unit is turned off after an Alert occurs, the Alert is resolved during the time the power is off: no
Alert-resolved e-mail is sent.
Alert Occurrence and Alert Resolving are set for sending email, but while no Alert Occurrence mail is received, Alert-resolved e-mail is received.
Alert-notification e-mail is not sent if the problem is resolved
before sending. However, an Alert-resolved e-mail is sent.
If an Alert-notification e-mail, set with the earlier notification
Alert-notification level was
changed, and e-mail stopped ar- level, arrives, later e-mail will not be sent, even if the notification level is changed after.
riving.
When no date information is in- Make the setting for obtaining time information from the
SNTP server. Refer to the Web Image Monitor's Help to the
cluded in sent e-mail, the mail
settings.
server has a malfunction.
Printing using Bluetooth is
slow.
5
When using the optional Bluetooth interface unit, do the following;
• Transmit fewer print jobs.
• Make sure no IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) or other Bluetooth devices are in use.
Note
❒ Interference may occur with the IEEE 802.11b wireless
LAN interface board. Such interference may affect the
transmission speed and other functions.
• Transmissions between the client computer and the machine can be blocked by obstructions. Move the machine
or client computer if necessary.
Note
❒ When you use a Bluetooth connection, print jobs are
transmitted relatively slowly.
If the machine is still not operating satisfactorily, contact your sales or service
representative. Consult with the store where the printer was purchased for information about the location of sales or service representatives.
70
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 71 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
6. Removing Misfed Paper
Removing Misfed Paper
An error message appears if a paper misfeed occurs. The error message gives the
location of the misfeed.
Important
❒ Misfed paper may be covered in toner. Be careful not to get toner on your
hands or clothes.
❒ Toner on prints made after removing misfed paper may be loose (inadequately fused). Make a few test prints until smudges no longer appear.
❒ Do not forcefully remove misfed paper, as it will tear. Torn pieces remaining
inside the printer will cause further misfeeds and possibly damage the printer.
71
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 72 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Removing Misfed Paper
When “Remove Misfeed Paper Tray” Appears
Important
❒ Forcefully removing misfed paper
may cause paper to tear and leave
scraps of paper in the printer. This
might cause a misfeed and damage
the printer.
C Open the front cover by pushing
the front cover release button,
and then close it to reset the misfeed condition.
A Lift the paper tray slightly. Pull it
out until it stops, and then remove the misfed paper.
ZKGY300E
6
ZKGY280E
B Carefully slide the paper tray into
the printer until it stops.
ZKGY290E
Important
❒ Do not slide the paper tray in
with force. If you do, the front
and side guides might move.
72
Note
❒ You can apply this procedure
for both the paper tray and the
optional paper feed unit.
❒ To reset the misfeed condition,
open and close the front cover,
then the indicator will be off.
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 73 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
When “Remove Misfeed Internal Path” Appears
When “Remove Misfeed Internal Path” Appears
Important
❒ Forcefully removing misfed paper
may cause paper to tear and leave
scraps of paper in the printer. This
might cause a misfeed and damage
the printer.
C Pull
out the misfed paper by
holding both sides of paper. Be
careful not to get toner dust on
your hands or clothes.
A Open the front cover by pushing
the front cover release button.
AGN030S
D Hold the grips of the toner cartridge, and then insert it into the
printer until it stops.
6
AGN020S
B Lift the front side of the toner cartridge, and then pull it out of the
printer.
Important
❒ Be sure to put the toner cartridge on a stable, flat surface.
❒ Do not hold the toner cartridge
upside down or stand it vertically.
AGN023S
E Push down the toner cartridge to
settle it in appropriate position.
AGN022S
AGN024S
73
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 74 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Removing Misfed Paper
F Close the front cover by pressing
the left and right side indentations.
ZKGH130E
Important
❒ If paper is fed from the bypass
tray, be sure to remove all the
paper from the bypass tray and
close it before opening the front
cover.
6
74
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 75 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
When “Remove Misfeed Paper Exit Cover” Appears
When “Remove Misfeed Paper Exit Cover”
Appears
R CAUTION:
• When removing misfed paper,
do not touch the fusing section
because it becomes very hot.
• The fusing unit becomes very
hot. When installing the new fusing unit, turn off the printer and
wait about an hour. After that, install the new fusing unit. Not
waiting for the unit to cool down
can result in a burn.
Important
❒ Forcefully removing misfed paper
may cause paper to tear and leave
scraps of paper in the printer. This
might cause a misfeed and damage
the printer.
Removing misfed paper from the
exit cover
A Open the paper exit cover.
ZKGY391E
6
B Remove the misfed paper.
ZKGY380E
C Close the paper exit cover until it
clicks.
ZKGY400E
75
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 76 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Removing Misfed Paper
Removing misfed paper from the
fusing unit
D Pull the fusing unit out.
A Open the rear cover by pushing
the two knobs.
AGN007S
E Hold the tab, and then remove the
misfed paper.
AGN004S
B Remove the rear cover in a horizontal direction.
6
ZKGY410E
ZKGX220E
C Lift the lock levers of the fusing
unit as shown in the illustration.
Important
❒ Do not touch the metal part of
the fusing unit. It becomes very
hot. Touching it could result in a
burn.
F Insert
the fusing unit until it
stops.
AGN006S
AGN008S
76
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 77 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
When “Remove Misfeed Paper Exit Cover” Appears
G Push the lock levers of the fusing
unit down until it clicks.
AGN009S
H Insert the rear cover to the inside
grooves on both sides of the printer in a horizontal direction.
6
ZKGX221E
I Close the rear cover.
AGN005S
77
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 78 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Removing Misfed Paper
When “Remove Misfeed Duplex Unit” Appears
R CAUTION:
• When removing misfed paper,
do not touch the fusing section
because it becomes very hot.
C Close the rear cover of the duplex
unit.
Important
❒ Forcefully removing misfed paper
may cause paper to tear and leave
scraps of paper in the duplex unit.
This might cause a misfeed and
damage the printer.
ZKGY330E
Removing the misfed paper inside
the cover
A Open the rear cover of the duplex
D Lift the lever (
), and then open
the cover of the duplex unit ( ).
unit.
6
ZKGY340E
ZKGY310E
E Remove the misfed paper.
B Remove the misfed paper.
ZKGY350E
ZKGY320E
78
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 79 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
When “Remove Misfeed Duplex Unit” Appears
F Close the cover of the duplex unit.
Important
❒ When A5L paper misfeeds,
you might not be able to remove
it by pulling the duplex unit
out. In this case, pull the paper
tray out, and then remove the
paper.
C Align
ZKGY360E
Removing misfed paper inside the
duplex unit
the power cable with the
groove of the left slide of the duplex unit, and then insert the duplex unit into back of the printer
aligning the rails inside of the
printer until it is connected.
A Push down the lever on the right
side of the duplex unit ( ), and
then pull it out until it stops ( ).
6
ZKGX240E
ZKGX320E
B Lift
the guide board inside the
duplex unit, and then remove the
misfed paper.
Reference
If the error message appears
again, the misfed paper might
be left in the printer. Confirm
that any torn paper scraps are
not in the inside of the printer.
For more information, see p.73
“When “Remove Misfeed Internal Path” Appears”.
ZKGY440E
79
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 80 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Removing Misfed Paper
6
80
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 81 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
7. Appendix
Moving and Transporting the Printer
R CAUTION:
• When lifting the machine, use the inset grips on both sides. Otherwise the
printer could break or cause injury if dropped.
• When you move the printer, remember to unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet to avoid a fire or an electric shock.
• When you pull out the plug from the socket, grip the plug to avoid damaging
the cord and causing a fire or an electric shock.
Repack the printer in its original packing materials for transporting.
Important
❒ Be sure to disconnect all cables from the printer before transporting it.
❒ The printer is a precision piece of machinery. Take care to avoid damage during shipment.
❒ If the optional paper feed unit is installed, remove it from the printer, and
then move them separately.
81
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 82 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Appendix
Moving the Printer
R CAUTION:
• The machine weight is approximately 20 kg (44.1 lb.).
• When lifting the machine, use the inset grips on both sides. Otherwise the
printer could break or cause injury if dropped.
• Before moving the machine, unplug the power cord from the outlet. If the
cord is unplugged abruptly, it could become damaged. Damaged plugs or
cords can cause an electrical or fire hazard.
Moving the printer in the short distance
A Be sure to check the following points:
• The power of the printer is turned off.
• The power cable is unplugged from the wall outlet.
• The interface cable is unplugged from the printer.
B If the external options are installed, remove them.
See Setup Guide and follow the steps backwards for removing options.
C Be sure to close the Bypass Tray and the front cover.
D Lift the printer and move it to the place where you want to install it.
7
AGN038S
Important
❒ When lifting the machine, use the inset grips on both sides. Otherwise the
printer could break or cause injury if dropped.
❒ Be sure to move the printer horizontally. Moving the printer facing up on
down may cause the toner to scatter.
❒ If the optional paper feed unit(s) is installed, detach and move the printer
separately. Never move the printer with the paper feed unit(s) attached.
E If you removed options, reinstall them.
See Setup Guide for installing options.
82
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 83 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Consumables
Consumables
R CAUTION:
• Our products are engineered to meet the highest standards of quality and
functionality. When purchasing expendable supplies, we recommend using
only those specified by an authorized dealer.
Toner Cartridge
Name
Toner Cartridge
*1
Average printable number of pages *1
20,000 pages
A4, 3% test chart
Note
❒ The actual number of printed pages you get from a particular toner cartridge
depends on the type and size of paper you are using, the contents of your
print images, and printing environment conditions. All this means that a toner cartridge might require replacement sooner than the normal life described
above.
❒ The number of printable pages that can be expected from the starter toner cartridge included in the printer is about 10,000 pages (A4, 3% chart).
❒ Toner cartridge may need to be changed sooner than indicated above due to
deterioration over the period of use.
❒ Toner cartridge (consumable) is not covered by warranty. However, if there
is problem, contact the store where they were purchased.
❒ When you first use this printer, use the toner cartridge packaged with the
printer.
❒ Numbers of pages that can be printed using the toner cartridge supplied with
this printer are as follows:
Name
Toner Cartridge
7
Average printable number of pages
3,000 pages
83
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 84 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Appendix
Maintenance Kit
❖ Maintenance Kit Type 610
Name
Average printable number of pages *1
Fusing Unit
90,000 pages
Transfer Roller
90,000 pages
Paper Feed Roller × 3
90,000 pages
Friction Pad × 3
90,000 pages
*1
A4, 3% test chart
Note
❒ The actual number of printable pages varies depending on the image volume
and density, number of pages to be printed at a time, paper type and paper
size used, and environmental conditions such as temperature and humidity.
❒ Maintenance kit (consumables) are not covered by warranty. However, if
there is problem, contact the store where they were purchased.
❒ It is required to change the maintenance kit after every 90,000 pages have
been printed. However, it may be necessary to change the parts earlier depending on their operating period.
7
84
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 85 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Specifications
Specifications
Mainframe
❖ Configuration:
Desktop
❖ Print Process:
Laser beam scanning & Electrophotographic printing
Dual component toner development
❖ First Print Speed:
7.5 sec or less (A4K, 81/2×11K)
Note
❒ If the printer has not been used for a while, there may be a short delay before the first page starts printing.
❖ Printing Speed:
Maximum 35 pages per minute (A4L, 81/2 × 11L)
Note
❒ Continuous printing on sheets with a width of 230 mm or smaller may decrease the printing speed depending on the temperature control of the fusing unit.
7
❖ Interface:
Standard 36-pin printer cable and a parallel port on the host computer
IEEE 1284 I/F (Compatible, ECP, Nibble)
• Do not use a cable more than 2.5 meters (8.2 feet) long.
• USB 2.0
• Bidirectional IEEE1284
• 10/100Base-TX
❖ Resolution:
1,200 × 1,200 dpi (PCL 6, RPCS, PS, PDF)
600 × 600 dpi (PCL 6, PCL 5e, RPCS, PS, PDF)
300 × 300 dpi (PCL 5e, PDF)
❖ Printer Language:
PCL 6 (XL) , PCL 5e, RPCS, Adobe PostScript 3
85
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 86 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Appendix
❖ Fonts:
PCL 6, PCL 5e
Agfa Font Manager 35 Intellifonts, 10 TrueType fonts, and 1 bitmap font
Font Manager available, plus 31 additional fonts.
PostScript, PDF
136 fonts (Type 2:24, Type 14:112)
❖ Paper size:
See p.3 “Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer”.
❖ Paper Weight:
See p.3 “Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer”.
❖ Media Type:
See p.10 “Types of Paper and Other Media”.
❖ Power Source:
220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 4.5 A or more
❖ Power Consumption:
• With Options
7
Maximum
920 W or less
Energy Saver
10.5 W
• Printer Only
Maximum
850 W or less
Energy Saver
6.5 W
❖ Noise Emission: *1
Sound Power Level
Mainframe only
During Printing
67 dB (A)
Stand-by
40 dB (A)
Sound Pressure level *2
Mainframe only
During Printing
*1
*2
86
56 dB (A)
The following measurements are actual values made in accordance with ISO7779.
Measured at the position of a bystander.
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 87 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Specifications
❖ Dimensions: *1
Width
Depth
Height
Printer only
(tray not extended)
478 mm (18.4 inches) 437 mm (17.2 inches) 343 mm (13.5 inches)
Printer only
(tray extended)
478 mm (18.4 inches) 572 mm (22.6 inches) 343 mm (13.5 inches)
With one optional
feed unit
478 mm (18.4 inches) 437 mm (17.2 inches) 473 mm (18.6 inches)
With two optional
feed units
478 mm (18.4 inches) 437 mm (17.2 inches) 603 mm (23.7 inches)
*1
Measurement conditions: With paper tray, Bypass Tray and output tray extension
closed.
❖ Weight:
Approximately 20 kg (44.1 lb.) (toner cartridge and power cable included)
❖ Warm-up Time:
Less than 19 seconds (23°C, 73F)
❖ Paper Capacity:
Standard paper tray
500 sheets *1 (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Bypass Tray *2
100 sheets *1 (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Optional Paper Feed Unit × 2
500 sheets × 2 *1 (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Optional Envelope Feeder *3
60 envelopes *4
*1
*2
*3
*4
7
Paper weight: 60 - 105 g/m2 (16 - 28 lb.)
You can load up to 10 envelopes (55 - 157 g/m2, 14 - 42 lb.) at the same time.
To use the envelope feeder unit, the optional paper feed unit is required. The paper tray of the feed unit can be replaced with the envelope feeder unit.
For more information about envelopes, see p.11 “Envelopes”.
❖ Paper Output Capacity:
250 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
❖ Memory:
Standard 128 MB, up to 256 MB (with the optional memory unit)
❖ Network:
Topology: Ethernet (10BaseT/100BaseTX)
Protocol: TCP/IP, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk
87
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 88 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Appendix
❖ Optional Equipment:
• Paper Feed Unit Type 610
• Envelope Feeder Type 610
• Duplex Unit AD610
• Memory Unit Type C 256MB
• Hard Disk Drive Type 2600
• 1394 Interface Unit Type 4510
• 802.11b Interface Unit Type F
• Bluetooth Interface Unit Type C
Options
Paper Feed Unit Type 610
❖ Dimensions (W×D×H):
468 × 410 × 130 mm (18.4 × 14.8 × 5.1 inches)
(without pins on the unit)
❖ Paper Weight:
60 - 105 g/m2 (16 - 28 lb.)
7
❖ Paper Size:
See p.3 “Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer”.
Envelope Feeder Type 610
❖ Dimensions (W×D×H):
468 × 410 × 130 mm (18.4 × 16.1 × 5.1 inches)
❖ Paper Weight:
72 - 90 g/m2 (19 - 24 lb.)
❖ Paper Size:
See p.3 “Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer”.
88
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 89 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Specifications
Duplex Unit AD610
❖ Dimensions (W×D×H):
419 × 378 × 257 mm (16.5 × 14.9 × 10.2 inches)
❖ Paper Size:
See p.3 “Paper and Other Media Supported by This Printer”.
❖ Paper Weight:
60 - 105 g/m2 (17 - 28 lb.)
❖ Weight:
6 kg (13.2 lb.)
Hard Disk Drive Type 2600
❖ Storage Capacity (Formatted):
6 GB
You can install PostScript fonts with this optional Hard Disk Drive. With a
Macintosh, types of fonts supported are PostScript Type 1 and PostScript
Type 2. To download them, use PS Utility for Mac.
Memory Unit Type C 256MB
7
❖ Module Type:
SO-DIMM (Small Outline Dual-in-line Memory Module)
❖ Memory Type:
SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic RAM)
❖ Number of Pins:
144 pins
1394 Interface Unit Type 4510
❖ Transmission Spec.:
IEEE 1394
❖ Device Class:
SCSI print, IP over 1394
❖ Interface Connector:
IEEE 1394 (6 pins × 2)
89
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 90 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Appendix
❖ Required cable:
1394 interface cable (6 pins x 4 pins, 6 pins x 6 pins)
Important
❒ You cannot plug devices together to create loops.
❒ Do not use a cable more than 4.5 meters (14.8 feet) long.
❖ Connectable number of device in a bus:
Maximum 63
❖ Allowed cable hops in a bus:
Maximum 16
❖ Power supply:
Nonpower supply
Cable Power repeated (IEEE 1394a-2000 compliant)
802.11b Interface Unit Type F
❖ Transmission Spec.:
Based on IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN)
❖ Protocol:
TCP/IP, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk
7
Note
❒ SmartDeviceMonitor and Web Image Monitor are supported.
❖ Data Transfer Speed:
Auto select from below speed
1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 11 Mbps
❖ Frequency Range:
• Inch version:
2412-2464 MHz (1-11 channels)
• Metric version:
2412-2472 MHz (1-13 channels)
❖ Transmittable Distance:
1 Mbps 400 m *1
2 Mbps 270 m *1
5.5 Mbps 200 m *1
11 Mbps 140 m *1
*1
These figures are a guideline for outdoor use. In general, the transmittable distance indoors is 10-100 m, depending on the environment.
❖ Transmission Mode:
ad hoc mode and infrastructure mode
90
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 91 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
Specifications
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type C
❖ Supported Profiles:
SPP (Serial Port Profile)
HCRP (Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile)
BIP (Basic Imaging Profile)
❖ Frequency Range:
2 GHz ISM band
❖ Data Transmission Speed:
732 kbps
Note
❒ The transmission speed is adjusted according to factors such as the distance and obstacles between the devices, radio signal condition and Bluetooth adaptor.
❖ Maximum Range:
10 m
7
91
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 92 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
INDEX
H
1394 Interface Unit Type 4510, 89
802.11b Interface Unit Type F, 90
A
Additional Troubleshooting, 69
Adjusting the Image Density, 51
Adjusting Tray Registration, 52
Appendix, 81
B
Bluetooth Interface Unit Type C, 91
C
Cleaning the Friction Pad, 46
Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller, 47
Cleaning the Printer, 45
Cleaning the Registration Roller, 49
Consumables, 83
D
Display panel, messages, 55
Duplex Unit AD610, 89
E
Envelope Feeder Type 610, 88
Envelope Feeder Unit, 27
Envelopes, 11
Error, 55
F
Friction Pad, 35, 46, 84
Fusing Unit, 41, 84
92
Hard Disk Drive Type 2600, 89
How to Read This Manual, 2
L
Loading Envelopes, 26
Bypass Tray, 26
Envelope Feeder Unit, 27
Loading Paper, 9
Bypass Tray, 22
Optional Paper Feed Unit, 14
Tray 1, 14
M
Maintenance Kit, 34, 84
Memory Unit Type C, 89
Messages, 55
Moving and Transporting the Printer, 81
O
OHP transparencies, 11
Options, 88
Other Printing Problems, 66
P
Paper and Other Media, 3
Paper Feed Roller, 39, 47, 84
Paper Feed Unit Type 610, 88
Paper not supported, 12
Paper Recommendations, 9
Plain Paper, 10
Print Area, 13
Printer Does Not Print, 62
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 93 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
R
Registration Roller, 49
Remove Misfed Paper
Duplex Unit, 78
Internal Path, 73
Paper Exit Cover, 75
Paper Tray, 72
Removing Misfed Paper, 71
Replacing Consumables
and Maintenance Kit, 31
Replacing the Maintenance Kit, 34
Friction Pad, 35
Fusing Unit, 41
Paper Feed Roller, 39
Transfer Roller, 37
Replacing the Toner Cartridge, 31
S
Specifications, 85
Specifying a paper type
Bypass Tray, 25
Optional Paper Feed Unit, 20
Tray 1, 20
Specifying custom size paper
Bypass Tray, 24
Optional Paper Feed Unit, 19
Specifying standard size paper
Bypass Tray, 22
Optional Paper Feed Unit, 14
Tray 1, 14
Storing Paper, 9
Switching between Paper Trays, 30
T
Thick Paper, 10
Toner Cartridge, 31, 83
Transfer Roller, 37, 84
Troubleshooting, 55
93
KirP4GB_Mainte-F5_FM_forPaper.book Page 94 Wednesday, December 8, 2004 6:13 PM
MEMO
94
GB
GB
G116-8606
Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=96 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 4.800000 mm
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
Copyright © 2004
Paper type: Wood Free 80g/m2, Paper Thickness=100 µm // Pages in book=96 // Print scale=81%
Gap (when printed at 81% scale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 4.800000 mm
RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
15-5, Minami Aoyama 1-chome,
Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-8544, Japan
Phone: +81-3-3479-3111
Maintenance Guide
Maintenance Guide
Maintenance Guide
Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A.
RICOH CORPORATION
5 Dedrick Place
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006
Phone: +1-973-882-2000
The Netherlands
RICOH EUROPE B.V.
Groenelaan 3, 1186 AA, Amstelveen
Phone: +31-(0)20-5474111
United Kingdom
RICOH UK LTD.
Ricoh House,
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham,
Middlesex, TW13 7HG
Phone: +44-(0)20-8261-4000
Germany
RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Wilhelm-Fay-Strasse 51,
D-65936 Frankfurt am Main
Phone: +49-(0)69-7104250
France
RICOH FRANCE S.A.
383, Avenue du Général de Gaulle
BP 307-92143 Clamart Cedex
Phone: +33-(0)-821-01-74-26
Model number: Aficio AP610N
Printed in The Netherlands
GB GB G116-8606
Spain
RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.
Avda. Litoral Mar, 12-14,
Blue Building, Marina Village,
08005 Barcelona
Phone: +34-(0)93-295-7600
Italy
RICOH ITALIA SpA
Via della Metallurgia 12,
37139 Verona
Phone: +39-045-8181500
China
RICOH CHINA CO.,LTD.
29/F., Lippo Plaza, No.222
Huai Hai Zhong Road,
Lu Wan District,
Shanghai P.C.:200021
Phone: +86-21-5396-6888
Singapore
RICOH ASIA PACIFIC PTE.LTD.
260 Orchard Road,
#15-01/02 The Heeren,
Singapore 238855
Phone: +65-6830-5888
1
Paper and Other Media
2
Replacing Consumables and Maintenance Kit
3
Cleaning the Printer
4
Adjusting the Printer
5
Troubleshooting
6
Removing Misfed Paper
7
Appendix
Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, please be sure to read
the Safety Information in the “Setup Guide” before using the machine.
G1168606
Operating Instructions
Software Guide
Read This First
Manuals for This Printer........................................................................................8
Preparing for Printing
Quick Install............................................................................................................9
Confirming the Connection Method...................................................................11
Network Connection.................................................................................................11
Local Connection .....................................................................................................13
Using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port..................................................15
Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ..................................................................15
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver (TCP/IP).................................................16
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver (NetBEUI) ..............................................17
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver (IPP) ......................................................19
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me - TCP/IP)..................21
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me - NetBEUI) ...............22
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me - IPP) .......................24
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - TCP/IP).........................26
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - NetBEUI) ......................27
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - IPP) ..............................28
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - TCP/
IP) ..........................................................................................................................30
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - IPP)
31
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - TCP/IP)......................33
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - NetBEUI) ...................34
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - IPP)............................35
Changing the Port Settings for SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ................................37
G1168612_1.00 GB GB EN USA G112-8612
Copyright © 2004
1
Using the Standard TCP/IP Port .........................................................................39
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver................................................................39
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000) .......................................40
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003) .....41
Using the LPR Port ..............................................................................................44
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver................................................................44
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000) .......................................45
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003) .....46
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0).....................................47
Using as the Windows Network Printer .............................................................49
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver................................................................49
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me) ................................50
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000) .......................................51
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003) .....52
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0).....................................54
Using as the NetWare Print Server/Remote Printer..........................................56
When using the PostScript 3 Printer Driver..............................................................57
Form Feed................................................................................................................58
Banner Page ............................................................................................................58
Printing after Resetting the Printer ...........................................................................58
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB .............................................................59
Windows 98 SE/Me - USB .......................................................................................59
Windows 2000 - USB ...............................................................................................61
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - USB .............................................................62
Troubleshooting USB ...............................................................................................63
Printing with Parallel Connection.......................................................................65
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver................................................................65
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me) ................................66
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000) .......................................67
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows Server 2003) .....68
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0).....................................69
Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394 (SCSI print)...............................70
Windows 2000..........................................................................................................70
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003........................................................................72
Printing with Bluetooth Connection...................................................................74
Supported Profiles....................................................................................................74
Printing with Bluetooth Connection ..........................................................................74
If a Message Appears during Installation ..........................................................77
Making Option Settings for the Printer ..............................................................78
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication ............................................................78
If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled ..............................................................79
Setting Up the Printer Driver
PCL - Accessing the Printer Properties.............................................................81
Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties ............................................81
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ...................................................82
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer Properties .................84
2
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................................85
RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties ..........................................................88
Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties ............................................88
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ...................................................89
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer Properties .................91
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ................................................93
PostScript 3 - Setting Up for Printing ................................................................96
Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties ............................................96
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties ...................................................97
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer Properties .................99
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties ..............................................100
Mac OS - Setting Up for Printing............................................................................102
Other Print Operations
Printing a PDF File Directly............................................................................... 104
Using DeskTopBinder Lite .....................................................................................104
Installing DeskTopBinder Lite ................................................................................104
Using Commands...................................................................................................105
Sample Print ....................................................................................................... 106
Printing the First Set...............................................................................................106
Printing the Remaining Sets...................................................................................107
Deleting a Sample Print File...................................................................................108
Checking the Error Log ..........................................................................................108
Locked Print ....................................................................................................... 110
Sending Print Job to the Printer .............................................................................110
Entering a Password ..............................................................................................111
Deleting a Locked Print File ...................................................................................112
Checking the Error Log ..........................................................................................113
Form Feed...........................................................................................................115
Canceling a Print Job ........................................................................................116
Windows - Canceling a Print Job ...........................................................................116
Mac OS - Canceling a Print Job.............................................................................117
Caution During Printing .................................................................................... 119
Collate ....................................................................................................................119
Spool Printing.........................................................................................................119
Cover......................................................................................................................121
Memory Capacity and Paper Size..........................................................................121
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
Menu Chart ......................................................................................................... 124
Paper Input Menu............................................................................................... 128
Changing the paper input menu.............................................................................128
Paper Input menu parameters ...............................................................................129
List/Test Print Menu........................................................................................... 131
Printing a Configuration Page ................................................................................131
Interpreting the configuration page ........................................................................131
3
List/Test menu parameters ....................................................................................133
Maintenance Menu............................................................................................. 135
Changing the maintenance menu ..........................................................................135
Maintenance menu parameters .............................................................................137
System Menu...................................................................................................... 141
Changing the system menu ...................................................................................141
System menu parameters ......................................................................................141
Host Interface Menu........................................................................................... 149
Changing the Host Interface menu ........................................................................149
Host Interface menu parameters............................................................................149
PCL Menu ...........................................................................................................156
Changing the PCL menu........................................................................................156
PCL Menu parameters ...........................................................................................156
PS Menu.............................................................................................................. 159
Changing the PS menu ..........................................................................................159
PS Menu parameters .............................................................................................159
PDF Menu ...........................................................................................................161
Changing the PDF menu........................................................................................161
PDF Menu parameters...........................................................................................161
Language Menu..................................................................................................163
Changing the language menu ................................................................................163
Language menu parameters ..................................................................................163
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Using Web Image Monitor................................................................................. 164
Displaying Top Page ..............................................................................................165
About Menu and Mode...........................................................................................166
Access in the Administrator Mode..........................................................................167
Displaying Web Image Monitor Help......................................................................167
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ............................................................. 169
Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ...............................................................170
Changing the Network Interface Board Configuration............................................171
Locking the Menus on the Printer's Control Panel .................................................171
Changing the Paper Type ......................................................................................172
Managing User Information....................................................................................173
Configuring the Energy Saver Mode ......................................................................176
Setting a Password ................................................................................................176
Checking the Printer Status ...................................................................................177
Changing Names and Comments ..........................................................................177
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client .............................................................. 179
Monitoring Printers .................................................................................................179
Checking the Printer Status ...................................................................................179
When Using IPP with SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ............................................180
Printer Status Notification by E-Mail................................................................181
Remote Maintenance by telnet ......................................................................... 183
Using telnet ............................................................................................................183
access ....................................................................................................................184
4
appletalk.................................................................................................................184
autonet ...................................................................................................................185
btconfig...................................................................................................................185
devicename............................................................................................................186
dhcp .......................................................................................................................186
diprint .....................................................................................................................187
dns .........................................................................................................................188
domainname ..........................................................................................................189
help ........................................................................................................................190
hostname ...............................................................................................................190
ifconfig....................................................................................................................191
info .........................................................................................................................192
ipp ..........................................................................................................................192
netware ..................................................................................................................193
passwd ...................................................................................................................194
prnlog .....................................................................................................................195
rendezvous.............................................................................................................195
route .......................................................................................................................197
set ..........................................................................................................................198
show.......................................................................................................................199
slp...........................................................................................................................200
smb ........................................................................................................................200
snmp ......................................................................................................................201
sntp ........................................................................................................................204
spoolsw ..................................................................................................................204
sprint ......................................................................................................................205
status......................................................................................................................205
syslog .....................................................................................................................206
upnp .......................................................................................................................206
web.........................................................................................................................206
wiconfig ..................................................................................................................207
wins ........................................................................................................................209
SNMP................................................................................................................... 211
Getting Printer Information over the Network................................................. 212
Current Printer Status ............................................................................................212
Printer configuration ...............................................................................................218
Understanding the Displayed Information ......................................................220
Print Job Information ..............................................................................................220
Print Log Information..............................................................................................220
Configuring the Network Interface Board ...............................................................221
Message List ...................................................................................................... 227
System Log Information .........................................................................................227
Using a Printer Server
Preparing Printer Server ................................................................................... 233
Printing notification via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ..........................................233
Using NetWare ...................................................................................................235
Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 3.x) ...........................................................236
5
Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, 6/6.5) .......................................237
Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5/5.1 or 6/6.5 Environment.....................................238
Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 3.x) ......................................................241
Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, 6/6.5) ..................................243
Special Operations under Windows
Printing Files Directly from Windows .............................................................. 247
Setup......................................................................................................................247
Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address........................................................247
Printing Commands................................................................................................249
Mac OS Configuration
Mac OS................................................................................................................ 252
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver and PPD File ..........................................252
Setting Up PPD Files .............................................................................................253
Creating a Desktop Printer Icon .............................................................................253
Setting Up Options .................................................................................................254
Installing the ColorSync Profiles ............................................................................254
Installing Adobe Type Manager .............................................................................255
Installing Screen fonts............................................................................................256
Using USB Interface...............................................................................................256
Changing to EtherTalk ...........................................................................................257
Mac OS X ............................................................................................................259
Installing the PPD Files ..........................................................................................259
Setting Up the PPD File .........................................................................................259
Setting Up Options .................................................................................................260
Using USB Interface...............................................................................................260
Using Rendezvous .................................................................................................260
Changing to EtherTalk ...........................................................................................261
Configuring the Printer......................................................................................262
Using PostScript 3 ............................................................................................. 263
Job Type ................................................................................................................263
Duplex Printing.......................................................................................................265
Color Mode.............................................................................................................266
Gradation ...............................................................................................................266
Color Profile ...........................................................................................................266
Color Setting ..........................................................................................................267
CMYK Simulation Profile........................................................................................268
Dithering.................................................................................................................268
Gray Reproduction .................................................................................................268
Color Matching .......................................................................................................268
Printer Utility for Mac......................................................................................... 269
Installing Printer Utility for Mac...............................................................................269
Starting Printer Utility for Mac ................................................................................270
Printer Utility for Mac Functions .............................................................................270
6
Appendix
Software and Utilities Included on the CD-ROM .............................................277
Printer Drivers for This Printer................................................................................277
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ..............................................................................278
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ...............................................................................279
Cautions to Take When Using in a network .................................................... 282
Connecting a Dial-up Router to a Network.............................................................282
Using DHCP...........................................................................................................282
Configuring the WINS Server.................................................................................284
Using the Dynamic DNS Function..........................................................................286
Configuring SSL Encryption.............................................................................288
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption................................................................288
User Settings for SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) ......................................................291
Installing Font Manager 2000............................................................................293
Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5, or 7.0 ............................................294
When Using Windows Terminal Service/MetaFrame...................................... 295
Operating Environment ..........................................................................................295
Supported Printer Drivers.......................................................................................295
Limitations ..............................................................................................................295
Cautions When Using Bluetooth Interface Unit ..............................................297
Information about Installed Applications ........................................................298
expat ......................................................................................................................298
JPEG LIBRARY .....................................................................................................298
NetBSD ..................................................................................................................298
Samba(Ver 2.2.2-1.1).............................................................................................300
RSA BSAFE® .........................................................................................................301
7
Read This First
Manuals for This Printer
For particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual.
❖ Setup Guide
Provides information about printer setup and options.
❖ Maintenance Guide
Provides information about paper, replacing supplies, and dealing with paper
jams and error messages.
❖ Software Guide (HTML) (this manual)
Provides basic information about installing the printer driver and software, using the printer in a network environment, and configuration and setup.
Also, provides information about configuring and monitoring printer status using software and a Web browser.
❒ Some functions cannot be used depending on your printer.
G1168612_1.00
Copyright © 2004
8
Preparing for Printing
Quick Install
Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0 users
can easily install this software using the CD-ROM provided.
Using Quick Install, the PCL printer driver and/or RPCS printer driver and SmartDeviceMonitor for Client is installed under network environment, and TCP/IP
port will be set.
❒ To install printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage
Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator.
❒ The Quick Install is not available when using this printer under USB connection. If you connect using USB, see p.59 “Installing the Printer Driver Using
USB”.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “ Setup.exe ” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
D Click [Quick Install].
The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog box.
E After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement], and then click
[Next].
F Select the printer model you want to use in the [Select Printer] dialog box.
For network connection via TCP/IP, select the printer whose IP address is displayed in [Connect To].
For parallel connection, select the printer whose printer port is displayed in
[Connect To].
G Click [Install].
The printer driver installation starts.
H Click [Finish].
A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer
to complete installation.
G1168612_1.00
Copyright © 2004
9
Preparing for Printing
I Click [Exit] in the first dialog box of the installer, and then take out the
CD-ROM.
❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
❒ Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
❒ Select a printer to whose IP address is displayed in [Connect To] to install
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client when using TCP/IP.
Quick Install is not available unless bidirectional communication between
the printer and computer is enabled via parallel connection. See p.79 “If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled” for details about bidirectional communication between printer and computer.
10
Preparing for Printing
Confirming the Connection Method
This printer supports network and local connection.
Before installing the printer driver, check how the printer is connected. Follow the
driver installation procedure that is appropriate to the connection method.
Network Connection
This printer can be used as a Windows printing port or network printer.
Using this printer as the Windows printing port
Network connections can be established through Ethernet, IEEE 802.11b, and
IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394).
Available ports are determined based on the combination of Windows operating
system version and connection method used.
❖ Windows 95/98
Connection Method
Available Ports
Ethernet/ IEEE 802.11b
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)
None
❖ Windows Me
Connection Method
Available Ports
Ethernet/ IEEE 802.11b
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
❖ Windows 2000
Connection Method
Available Ports
Ethernet/ IEEE 802.11b
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
Standard TCP/IP
LPR port
11
Preparing for Printing
Connection Method
Available Ports
IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)
None
❖ Windows XP
Connection Method
Available Ports
Ethernet/ IEEE 802.11b
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
Standard TCP/IP
LPR port
IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
Standard TCP/IP
❖ Windows Server 2003
Connection Method
Available Ports
Ethernet/ IEEE 802.11b
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
Standard TCP/IP
LPR port
IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
Standard TCP/IP
❖ Windows NT 4.0
Connection Method
Available Ports
Ethernet/ IEEE 802.11b
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port
LPR port
IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394)
None
See the explanation of how to install the printer driver for each type of port.
For the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port, see p.15 “Using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Port”.
For the Standard TCP/IP port, see p.39 “Using the Standard TCP/IP Port”.
For the LPR port, see p.44 “Using the LPR Port”.
12
Preparing for Printing
Using as a network printer
This printer can be used as the Windows network printer, the NetWare print server, or the NetWare remote printer.
See the explanation of how to install the printer driver for each type of network
printer.
For the Windows network printer, see p.49 “Using as the Windows Network
Printer”.
For the NetWare print server and remote printer, see p.56 “Using as the NetWare Print Server/Remote Printer”.
Local Connection
Local connections can be established via parallel, USB, IEEE 1394 (SCSI print),
and Bluetooth connections.
Windows operating system version determines the available connection methods.
• Windows 95:
• Parallel connections
• Windows 98:
• Parallel and Bluetooth connections
• Windows 98 SE/Me:
• USB, Parallel, and Bluetooth connections
• Windows 2000:
• USB, Parallel, IEEE 1394 (SCSI print), and Bluetooth connections
• Windows XP:
• USB, Parallel, IEEE 1394 (SCSI print), and Bluetooth connections
• Windows Server 2003:
13
Preparing for Printing
• USB, Parallel, IEEE 1394 (SCSI print), and Bluetooth connections
• Windows NT 4.0:
• Parallel and Bluetooth connections
See the explanation of how to install the printer driver for each method of
connection.
For the USB connection, see p.59 “Installing the Printer Driver Using USB”.
For the parallel connection, see p.65 “Printing with Parallel Connection”.
For the IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) connection, see p.70 “Installing the Printer
Driver Using IEEE 1394 (SCSI print)”.
For the Bluetooth connection, see p.74 “Printing with Bluetooth Connection”.
14
Preparing for Printing
Using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
Port
Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
❒ To install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account
that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrator.
❒ Install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client before installing the printer driver when
using the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
D Click [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client/Admin].
E The SmartDeviceMonitor for Client installer starts.
F Click [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client], and then click [Next >].
The SmartDeviceMonitor for Client installer starts.
G The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box. After reading through its contents, click [Yes] to accept it.
H Follow the instructions on the display to install SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client.
I Click [OK].
If you are required to restart the computer after installing SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client, restart the computer.
❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
15
Preparing for Printing
❒ SmartDeviceMonitor for Client supports the following languages: Czech,
Danish, German, English, Spanish, French, Italian, Hungarian, Dutch, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Finnish, Swedish, Chinese Simple and Chinese Traditional.
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver (TCP/IP)
❒ To install this printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows
Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group
member.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
D Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement], and then click [Next].
F Select the printer driver you want to use in the [Printer Program] dialog
box.
You can select several printer drivers.
G Select the printer model you want to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
❒ The details shown in [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the
operating system, printer model, and port.
I Click [Port:], and then click [Add].
J Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [New Port...].
K Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
16
Preparing for Printing
A list of printers using TCP/IP appears.
L Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use
a printer not listed here, click [Specify address], and then enter the IP address
or host name of the printer.
Under Windows 95/98/Me, you cannot add an IP address partially similar to
the one already used. For example, if “192.168.0.2” is in use, “192.168.0.2xx”
cannot be used. Similarly, if “192.168.0.20” is in use, “192.168.0.2” cannot be
used.
M Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port:].
N Set a user code, if necessary.
This allows a SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin user to display and check statistics about the number of sheets which each user prints. For details, see
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
Up to 8 numeric characters can be entered. Neither alphabetic characters nor
symbols are available.
O Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
P Click [Finish].
Installation starts.
Q Click [Finish] in the installation completion dialog box.
A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer
to complete installation.
A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already
installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If
you still want to install the printer driver, install use [Add Printer]. See p.77
“If a Message Appears during Installation”.
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver (NetBEUI)
❒ To install this printer driver under Windows 2000, and Windows NT 4.0, you
must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.
❒ Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 do not support NetBEUI.
❒ You cannot print using printers beyond routers.
A Quit all applications currently running.
17
Preparing for Printing
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe”on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
D Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement] , and then click
[Next].
F Select the printer driver you want to use in the [Printer Program] dialog
box.
You can select several printer drivers.
G Select the printer model you want to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
❒ The details shown in [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the
operating system, printer model, and port.
I Click [Port:], and then click [Add].
J Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [New Port...].
K Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search].
A list of printers using NetBEUI appears.
L Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use
a printer not listed here, click [Specify address], and then enter the NetBEUI address. The NetBEUI address can be checked with the configuration page. For
information about printing a configuration page, see p.131 “Printing a Configuration Page”. The NetBEUI address appears in the format of “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Enter the printer's network path in the
format of “%%Computer name\Share name”. Use “\\” instead of “%%” at the
beginning.
M Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port:].
N Set a user code, if necessary.
18
Preparing for Printing
This allows a SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin user to display and check statistics about the number of sheets which each user prints. For details, see
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
Up to 8 numeric characters can be entered. Neither alphabetic characters nor
symbols are available.
O Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
P Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
Q Click [Finish] in the installation completion dialog box.
A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer
to complete installation.
❒ The protocol is set to inactive as default. Enable it using Web Image Monitor or Telnet.
❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already
installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If
you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add Printer]. See p.77 “If a
Message Appears during Installation”.
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver (IPP)
❒ To install printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage
Printers permission. For this, log on as an Administrators or Power Users
group member.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
D Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
19
Preparing for Printing
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement], and then click [Next].
F Select a printer driver you want to use in the [Printer Program] dialog box.
You can select several printer drivers.
G Select the printer model you want to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
❒ The details shown in [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the
operating system, printer model, and port.
I Click [Port:], and then click [Add].
J Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [New Port...].
K Click [IPP].
L In the [Printer URL] box, enter “http://printer's address/printer”
as the
printer's address.
If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL( a protocol for encrypted
communication), enter “https://printer's address/printer” (Internet Explorer
5.01, or a higher version must be installed).
(example IP address: 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
https://192.168.15.16/printer
You can enter “http://printer's address/ipp” as the printer's address.
M Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name dif-
ferent from the one of any existing port.
If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box
becomes the IPP port name.
N Click [Detailed Settings] to make necessary settings.
For information about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
O Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port:].
P Set a user code, if necessary.
This allows a SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin user to display and check the
number of sheets each user prints. For details, see SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin Help.
20
Preparing for Printing
Up to 8 numeric characters can be entered. No alphabetic characters or symbols can be entered.
Q Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
R Click [Finish].
Installation starts.
S Click [Finish] in the installation completion dialog box.
A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer
to complete installation.
❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already
installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If
you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add Printer]. See p.77 “If a
Message Appears during Installation”.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me TCP/IP)
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
21
Preparing for Printing
G Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then
click [Next].
H In the [Available ports:] box, click [Printer Port], and then click [Next].
I Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
J Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
K On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
L Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click
[Properties].
M On the [Details] tab, click [Add Port…].
N Click [SmartDeviceMonitor] in the [Other] list, and then click [OK].
O Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
A list of printers using TCP/IP appears.
P Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use
a printer not listed here, click [Specify address], and then enter the IP address
or host name of the printer.
You cannot add an IP address partially similar to the one already used. For
example, if “192.168.0.2” is in use, “192.168.0.2xx” cannot be used. Similarly,
if “192.168.0.20” is in use, “192.168.0.2” cannot be used.
Q Click [OK].
R Check that the selected port is highlighted in [Printer to the following port],
and then click [OK].
S Restart the computer to complete installation.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me NetBEUI)
A Quit all applications currently running.
22
Preparing for Printing
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe”on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
G Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then
click [Next].
H In the [Available ports:] box, click [Printer Port], and then click [Next].
I Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
J Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
K On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
L Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click
[Properties].
M On the [Details] tab, click [Add Port…].
N Click [Other] in the [SmartDeviceMonitor] list, and then click [OK].
O Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search].
A list of printers using [NetBEUI] appears.
P Click the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
23
Preparing for Printing
Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use
a printer not listed here, click [Specify address], and then enter the NetBEUI address. The NetBEUI address can be checked with the configuration page. For
information about printing a configuration page, see p.131 “Printing a Configuration Page”. The NetBEUI address appears in the format of “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Enter the printer's network path in the
format of “%%Computer name\Share name”. Use “\\” instead of “%%” at the
beginning.
You cannot print using printers beyond routers.
Q Click [OK].
R Check that the selected port is highlighted in [Printer to the following port],
and then click [OK].
S Restart the computer to complete installation.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me - IPP)
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
24
Preparing for Printing
G Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then
click [Next].
H In the [Available ports:] box, click [Printer Port], and then click [Next].
I Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
J Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
K On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
L Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click
[Properties].
M On the [Details] tab, click [Add Port…].
N Click [SmartDeviceMonitor] in the [Other] list, and then click [OK].
O Click [IPP].
P In the [Printer URL] box, enter “http://(printer's address)/printer” as the
printer's address.
If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted
communication), enter “https://(printer's address)/printer” (Internet Explorer
5.01, or a higher version must be installed).
(example IP address: 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
https://192.168.15.16/printer
You can enter “http://(printer's address)/ipp” as the printer's address.
Q Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name dif-
ferent from the one of any existing port.
If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box
becomes the IPP port name.
R Click [Detailed Settings] to configure proxy server, IPP user name, and other settings. Make these settings, and then click [OK]. For details, see
Help on the CD-ROM.
❒ For information about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
Help.
S Click [OK].
25
Preparing for Printing
T Check that the selected port is highlighted in [Printer to the following port],
and then click [OK] .
U Restart the computer to complete installation.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - TCP/IP)
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Local printer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Add Port...].
H Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [Next >].
I Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
A list of printers using TCP/IP appears.
J Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
26
Preparing for Printing
Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use
a printer not listed here, click [Specify address], and then enter the IP address
or host name of the printer.
K Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
L Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
M Click [Next >].
N Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
O Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 NetBEUI)
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
27
Preparing for Printing
F Click [Local printer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Add Port...].
H Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [Next >].
I Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search].
A list of printers using NetBEUI appears.
J Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use
a printer not listed here, click [Specify address], and then enter the NetBEUI address. The NetBEUI address can be checked with the configuration page. For
information about printing a configuration page, see p.131 “Printing a Configuration Page”. The NetBEUI address appears in the format of “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Enter the printer's network path in the
format of “%%Computer name\Share name”. Use“%%” instead of “\\” at the
beginning.
You cannot print using printers beyond routers.
K Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
L Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
M Click [Next >].
N Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
O Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000 - IPP)
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
28
Preparing for Printing
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Local printer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Add Port...].
H Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [Next >].
I Click [IPP].
J In the [Printer URL] box, enter “http://(printer's address)/printer” as the
printer's address.
If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted
communication), enter “https://(printer's address)/printer” (Internet Explorer
5.01, or a higher version must be installed).
(example IP address: 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
https://192.168.15.16/printer
You can enter “http://(printer's address)/ipp” as the printer's address.
K Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name dif-
ferent from the name of any existing port.
If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box
becomes the IPP port name.
L Click [Detailed Settings] to configure proxy server, the IPP user name and
other settings. Specify the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
For information about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
M Click [OK].
N Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
29
Preparing for Printing
O Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
P Click [Next >].
Q Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
R Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows
Server 2003 - TCP/IP)
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe”on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Local printer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Create a new port:].
H Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [Next >].
I Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
30
Preparing for Printing
A list of printers using [TCP/IP] appears.
J Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use
a printer not listed here, click [Specify address], and then enter the IP address
or host name of the printer.
K Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
L Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
M Click [Next >].
N Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
O Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows
Server 2003 - IPP)
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
31
Preparing for Printing
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Local printer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Create a new port:].
H Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [Next >].
I Click [IPP].
J In the [Printer URL] box, enter “http://(printer's address)/printer” as the
printer's address.
If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted
communication), enter “https://(printer's address)/printer” (Internet Explorer
5.01, or a higher version must be installed).
(example IP address: 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
https://192.168.15.16/printer
You can enter “http://(printer's address)/ipp” as the printer's address.
K Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name dif-
ferent from the one of any existing port.
If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box
becomes the IPP port name.
L Click [Detailed Settings] to make necessary settings.
For information about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
M Click [OK].
N Check that the name of the printer driver you want to install is selected,
and then click [Next >].
O Change the name of the printer if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
P Click [Next >].
Q Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
R Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
32
Preparing for Printing
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 TCP/IP)
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click [Add Port:].
G Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [New Port...].
H Click [TCP/IP], and then click [Search].
A list of printers using [TCP/IP] appears.
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer appear. To use
a printer not listed here, click [Specify address], and then enter the IP address
or host name of the printer.
J Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
K Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
L Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
33
Preparing for Printing
The printer driver installation starts.
M Restart the computer to complete installation.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation . For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 NetBEUI)
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click [Add Port:].
G Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [New Port...].
H Click [NetBEUI], and then click [Search].
A list of printers using NetBEUI appears.
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
34
Preparing for Printing
Only printers that respond to a broadcast from the computer are displayed. To
use a printer not listed here, click [Specify address], and then enter the NetBEUI address. The NetBEUI address can be checked with the configuration
page. For information about printing a configuration page, see p.131 “Printing
a Configuration Page”. The NetBEUI address appears in the format of “\\RNPxxxx\xxx” on the configuration page. Enter the printer's network path in the
format of “%%Computer name\Share name”. Use “%%” instead of “\\” at the
beginning.
You cannot print using printers beyond routers.
J Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
K Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
L Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
M Restart the computer to complete installation.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0 - IPP)
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
35
Preparing for Printing
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click [Add Port:].
G Click [SmartDeviceMonitor], and then click [New Port...].
H Click [IPP].
I In the [Printer URL] box, enter “http://(printer's address)/printer”as the
printer's address.
If the server authentification is issued, to enable SSL (a protocol for encrypted
communication), enter “https://(printer's address)/printer” (Internet Explorer
5.01, or a higher version must be installed).
(example IP address: 192.168.15.16)
http://192.168.15.16/printer
https://192.168.15.16/printer
You can enter “http://(printer's address)/ipp” as the printer's address.
J Enter a name for identifying the printer in [IPP Port Name]. Use a name dif-
ferent from the one of any existing port.
If a name is not specified here, the address entered in the [Printer URL] box
becomes the IPP port name.
K Click [Detailed Settings] to make necessary settings.
For information about the settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
L Click [OK].
M Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
N Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
O Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
P Restart the computer to complete installation.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
36
Preparing for Printing
Changing the Port Settings for SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
Follow the procedure below to change the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client settings, such as TCP/IP timeout, recovery/parallel printing, and printer groups.
❒ There are no settings for NetBEUI protocol.
Windows 95/98:
A Open [Printers] window from [Start] menu.
B In the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On
the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Details] tab, and then click [Configure Port].
The [Port Settings] dialog box appears.
Windows 2000 / Windows NT 4.0:
A Open [Printers] window from [Start] menu.
B In the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On
the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C On the [Ports] tab, click [Configure Port].
The [Port Settings] dialog box appears.
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003:
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B In the [Printers] window, click the icon of the printer you want to use. On
the [File] menu, click [Properties].
C Click the [Details] tab, and then click [Configure Port].
The [Port Settings] dialog box appears.
• For TCP/IP, timeout setting can be configured.
❒ If no settings on the [Recovery/Parallel Printing] tab are available, follow
the procedure below.
A Click [Cancel] to close the [Port Configuration:] dialog box.
B Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, and then right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon on the taskbar.
37
Preparing for Printing
C
Click [Extended Features Settings], and then select the [Set Recovery/Parallel Printing for each port] check box.
D Click [OK] to close the [Extended Features Settings] dialog box.
• User, proxy, and timeout settings can be configured for IPP.
For information about these settings, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
Help.
38
Preparing for Printing
Using the Standard TCP/IP Port
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver
❒ To install printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, and Windows
Server 2003, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission.
Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
D Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement], and then click [Next].
F Select a printer driver you want to use in the [Printer Program] dialog box.
You can select several printer drivers.
G Select the printer model you want to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
❒ The details shown in [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the
operating system, printer model, and port.
I Click [Port:], and then click [Add].
J Click [Standard TCP/IP], and then click [New Port...].
Configure the Standard TCP/IP port settings, and then see Windows Help if
[Standard TCP/IP Port] does not appear.
K Click [Next] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
L Enter the printer name or IP address in the [Printer Name or IP Address] box.
39
Preparing for Printing
The [Port Name] text box automatically obtains a port name. Change this name
if necessary.
When screen for Device selection appears, select “RICOH NetworkPrinter
Driver C Model”.
M Click [Finish] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
The installation start dialog box reappears.
N Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port:].
O Configure the default printer as necessary.
P Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
Q Click [Finish] in the installation completion dialog box.
A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer
to complete installation.
❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already
installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If
you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add Printer]. See p.77 “If a
Message Appears during Installation”.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000)
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
40
Preparing for Printing
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Local printer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Add Port...].
H Click [Standard TCP/IP], and then click [New Port...].
I Click [Next] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
J Enter the printer name or IP address in the [Printer Name or IP Address] box,
and then click [Next>].
When screen for Device selection appears, select “RICOH NetworkPrinter
Driver C Model”.
K Click [Finish] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
L Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
M Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
N Click [Next >].
O Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
P Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation . For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows
Server 2003)
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
41
Preparing for Printing
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Local printer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Create a new port:].
H Click [Standard TCP/IP] in [Create a new Port], and then click [Next].
I Click [Standard TCP/IP], and then click [OK].
J Click [Next] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
K Enter the printer name or IP address in the [Printer Name or IP Address] box,
and then click [Next >].
When screen for Device selection appears, select “RICOH NetworkPrinter
Driver C Model”.
L Click [Finish] in the [Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] dialog box.
M Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
N Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
O Click [Next >].
P Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
Q Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
42
Preparing for Printing
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
43
Preparing for Printing
Using the LPR Port
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver
❒ To install this printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows
Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group
member.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
D Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement], and then click [Next].
F Select a printer driver you want to use in the [Printer Program] dialog box.
You can select several printer drivers.
G Select the printer model you want to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
❒ The details shown in [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the
operating system, printer model, and port.
I Click [Port:], and then click [Add].
J Click [LPR Port], and then click [New Port...].
If [LPR Port] does not appear, see Windows Help and install it.
K Enter the printer's IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd]
box.
44
Preparing for Printing
L Enter “lp” in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, and then
click [OK].
The port is added.
M Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port:].
N Configure the default printer as necessary.
O Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts
P Click [Finish] in the installation completion dialog box.
A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer
to complete installation.
A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already
installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If
you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add Printer]. See p.77 “If a
Message Appears during Installation”.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000)
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
45
Preparing for Printing
F Click [Local printer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Add Port...].
H Click [LPR Port], and then click [New Port...].
I Enter the printer's IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd]
box.
J Enter “lp” in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, and then
click [OK].
K Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
L Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
M Click [Next >].
N Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
O Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows
Server 2003)
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
46
Preparing for Printing
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next >].
F Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next >].
G Click [Create a new port:].
H Click [LPR Port] in [Create a new Port], and then click [Next >].
I Enter the printer's IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd]
box.
J Enter “lp” in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server box], and then
click [OK].
K Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
L Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
M Click [Next >].
N Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Next >].
O Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0)
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
47
Preparing for Printing
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click [Add Port:].
G Select [LPR Port], and then click [OK].
H Enter the printer's IP address in the [Name or address of server providing lpd
box] box.
I Enter “lp” in the [Name of printer or print queue on that server] box, and then
click [OK].
J Check that the name of the printer whose driver you want to install is selected, and then click [Next >].
K Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
L Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
M Restart the computer to complete installation.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
48
Preparing for Printing
Using as the Windows Network Printer
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver
To use the print server, install the printer driver by selecting “Network printer
server”, and then select the Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 shared printer.
This section assumes that the client has already been configured to communicate with a Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0 print
server. Do not begin the following procedure before the client is set up and configured correctly.
❒ To install printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage
Printers permission. For this, log on as an Administrators or Power Users
group member.
❒ If you print with a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDeviceMonitor port, Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing cannot be used from the
client.
❒ If you print with a Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 print server, notification functions of SmartDeviceMonitor may not be used with the client.
❒ If you print with a Windows NT 4.0 print server, install the printer driver before
you connect the print server to the printer.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
D Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement], and then click [Next].
F Select a printer driver you want to use in the [Printer Program] dialog box.
You can select several printer drivers.
49
Preparing for Printing
G Select the [Printer Name:] check box to select the printer models you want
to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
The details shown in [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the
operating system, printer model, and port.
I Click [Port:], and then click [Add].
J Click [Network Printer], and then click [OK].
K Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the
[Browse for Printer] window.
L Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
M Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port:].
N Configure the user code as necessary.
For an RPCS printer driver, a user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information about user code, see the printer driver Help.
O Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
P Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
Q Click [Finish] in the installation completion dialog box.
A message about restarting the computer may appear. Restart the computer
to complete installation.
A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already
installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If
you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add Printer]. See p.77 “If a
Message Appears during Installation”.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me)
❒ If you print from a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDeviceMonitor port, the client cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
50
Preparing for Printing
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click [Network Printer], and then click [Next].
G Click [Browse].
H Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the
[Browse for Printer] window.
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [OK].
J Check the location of the selected printer is shown, and then click [Next].
K Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
L Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
M Restart the computer.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000)
❒ Installing a printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an
account that has Administrators permission.
❒ If you print from a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDeviceMonitor port, the client cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.
A Quit all applications currently running.
51
Preparing for Printing
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click [Network printer], and then click [Next].
G Click [Next].
H Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the
[Shared printers] window.
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [Next].
J The printer driver installation starts.
K Click [Next>].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
L Click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows
Server 2003)
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
52
Preparing for Printing
❒ If you print from a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDeviceMonitor port, the client cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.
❒ If you print with a Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 print server, SmartDeviceMonitor notification functions may not be possible for the client.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click [Network printer] and then click [Next].
G Click [Next].
H Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the
[Shared printers] window.
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [Next].
J The printer driver installation starts.
K Click [Next >].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
L Click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
53
Preparing for Printing
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0)
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
❒ If you print from a print server connected to the printer using the SmartDeviceMonitor port, the client cannot use Recovery Printing and Parallel Printing.
❒ To print from a Windows NT 4.0 print server, install the printer driver before
you connect the print server to the printer.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click [Network printer], and then click [Next].
G Click [Next].
H Double-click the computer name you want to use as a print server in the
[Shared printers] window.
I Select the printer you want to use, and then click [Next].
J Check the location of the selected printer is shown, and then click [Next].
K Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next].
L Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
Restart the computer to complete installation.
54
Preparing for Printing
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
55
Preparing for Printing
Using as the NetWare Print Server/Remote
Printer
This explains how to set up the Windows computer used as the NetWare client.
❒ To install this printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows
Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group
member.
The following explanation assumes NetWare Client is installed on the client computer and the NetWare server environment is correctly set up. Install all necessary client applications before following this procedure.
Set up the printer driver while logging on to the NetWare file server.
The following values are used in the example:
• Operating system: Windows 98
• NetWare version: 4.1
• File server name: CAREE
• Queue name: R-QUEUE
A Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
B Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
C Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
D The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement], and then click [Next].
E Select the printer driver you want to use in the [Printer Program] dialog
box.
You can select several printer drivers.
F Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer models you want
to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
G Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
56
Preparing for Printing
The details shown in [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the
operating system, printer model, and port.
H Click [Port:], and then click [Add].
I Click [Network Printer], and then click [OK].
J Double-click the name of the NetWare file server on the network tree.
The created queue is displayed.
K Select the print queue, and then click [OK].
L Check that the port of the selected printer is displayed in [Port:].
M Click [Finish].
The printer driver installation starts.
N Click [Finish] in the [Component selection] dialog box.
O Click [Finish] in the [Introduction complete] dialog box.
P In the [Printers] window, open the printer properties.
Under Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, open the printer properties from
the [Printers and Faxes] window.
Q On the [Printer Settings] tab, clear the [Form Feed] and [Enable Banner] check
boxes.
Under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, click
the [NetWare setting] tab.
Do not select these check boxes since they are automatically selected by the
printer driver. If you select the check boxes, the printer may not print correctly.
R Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.
❒ The protocol is set to inactive as default. Enable it using Web Image Monitor or Telnet
When using the PostScript 3 Printer Driver
Follow the procedure below to set up the PostScript 3 printer driver.
A In the [Printers] or [Printers and Faxes] window, open the printer properties.
B Click the [PostScript] tab.
❒ When using Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT 4.0, click the [Device Settings] tab, and then proceed to step to clear the check box.
57
Preparing for Printing
C Click [Advanced].
D Clear the [Send CTRL+D before job] and [Send CTRL+D after job] check boxes,
and then click [OK].
E Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.
Form Feed
Do not use NetWare to configure form feed. Form feed is controlled by the printer
driver on Windows. If NetWare form feed is configured, the printer may not print
properly.
Follow the procedure below to disable form feed according to the operating system used:
• Under Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [Form feed] check box on the [Printer Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
• Under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, clear
the [Form feed] check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties
dialog box.
Banner Page
Do not use NetWare to configure a banner page.
Follow the procedure below to disable banner pages according to the operating
system used:
• Under Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [Enable banner] check box on the [Printer
Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
• Under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, clear
the [Enable banner] check box on the [NetWare Settings] tab in the printer properties dialog box.
Printing after Resetting the Printer
Printer to print server connection requires 30 - 40 seconds to resume after the
printer is reset. During this period, jobs may be accepted (depending on NetWare specifications) but not printed.
To print after resetting the printer as the remote printer, check on the print server
that the remote printer is disconnected, or wait for two minutes before trying to
print.
58
Preparing for Printing
Installing the Printer Driver Using USB
This section explains how to install printer drivers using USB.
❒ Make sure that printer is connected to the computer's USB ports using the
USB interface cable.
Before installing, check that only the operating system is running on the computer and no print jobs are in progress.
The printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided with this printer.
Windows 98 SE/Me - USB
❒ Installation via USB is not possible under Windows 95/98. Upgrade to Windows 98 SE/Me.
If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the
icon of the printer connected to the “USB” port is added to the [Printers] window.
A Check that the power of the printer is off.
B Connect the printer and computer using the USB cable.
C Turn on the power of the printer.
The plug and play function starts and the [New Hardware Found], [Device Driver
Wizard], or [Add New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, depending on the operating system.
D Click [Next >].
E Click [Search for the best driver for your device. {Recommended}.], and then click
[Next >].
F Select the [Specify a location:] check box, and then click [Browse...].
The [Browse for Folder] dialog box appears.
G Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
❒ When Auto Run starts, click [Exit].
❒ To disable Auto Run, press the {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM into
the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the
CD-ROM.
H Specify the location where USB Printing Support is located, and then
click [Next >].
59
Preparing for Printing
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of USB Printing Support are stored
in the following location:
D:DRIVESRPCSWIN98_ME
I Check the location, and then click [Next].
USB Printing Support is installed.
J Click [Finish].
If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and
the icon of the printer connected to the “USB001” port is added to the [Printers]
window.
K Click [Next >].
L Click [Search for the best driver for your device. {Recommended}.], and then click
[Next >].
M Select the [Specify a location:], check box, and then click [Browse...].
The [Browse for Folder] dialog box appears.
N Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
❒ When Auto Run starts, click [Exit].
❒ To disable Auto Run, press the {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM into
the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the
CD-ROM.
O Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored,
and then click [Next >].
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the
following location:
• RPCS
D:DRIVESRPCSWIN98_ME(Language)DISK1
• PCL 5e
D:DRIVESPCL5EWIN98_ME(Language)DISK1
• PCL 6
D:DRIVESPCL6WIN98_ME(Language)DISK1
• PostScript 3
D:DRIVESPS3WIN98_ME(Language)DISK1
P Check the location, and then click [Next].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
Q Click [Finish].
60
Preparing for Printing
Installation is complete. If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the “USB001” port is added to the [Printers] window.
❒ The number after “USB” varies depending on the number of printers connected.
❒ It is not necessary to reinstall USB Printing Support when connecting a different printer via USB interface when USB Printing Support is installed.
❒ After installing USB Printing Support, if the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the printer.
❒ Install the printer driver from the CD-ROM provided with the printer.
Windows 2000 - USB
❒ Installing a printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an
account that has Administrators permission.
If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the
icon of the printer connected to the “USB” port is added to the [Printers] window.
If the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the
printer to install it from the CD-ROM provided.
A Check that the power of the printer is off.
B Connect the printer and computer using the USB cable.
C Turn on the power of the machine.
Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed automatically.
D Click [Next] in the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box.
E Select the [Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)] check box,
and then click [Next].
F Select the [Specify location] check box, and then click [Next].
G Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
❒ When Auto Run starts, click [Exit].
❒ To disable Auto Run, press the left {Shift} key when inserting the CD-ROM
into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from
the CD-ROM.
H Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored.
61
Preparing for Printing
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the
following location:
• RPCS
D:DRIVESRPCSWIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1
• PCL 5e
D:DRIVESPCL5EWIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1
• PCL 6
D:DRIVESPCL6WIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1
• PostScript 3
D:DRIVESPS3WIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1
I Check the printer driver location, and then click [OK].
J Click [Next].
K Click [Finish].
If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and
the icon of the printer connected to the “USB001” port is added to the [Printers]
window.
❒ The number after “USB” varies depending on the number of printers connected.
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - USB
❒ Installing a printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using an
account that has Administrators permission.
If the printer driver has already been installed, plug and play is enabled, and the
icon of the printer connected to the “USB” port is added to the [Printers] window.
The printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided with this printer.
If the printer driver is not installed, follow the plug-and-play instructions of the
printer to install it from the CD-ROM provided.
A Check that the power of the printer is off.
B Connect the printer and computer using the USB cable.
C Turn on the power of the machine.
Found New Hardware Wizard starts, and USB Printing Support is installed automatically.
D In the Found New Hardware Wizard display, click [Search for a suitable driver
for my device [recommended]], and then click [Next >].
62
Preparing for Printing
E To disable Auto Run, press the left {SHIFT} key when inserting the CD-
ROM into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD-ROM.
❒ If Auto Run starts, click [Cancel], and then [Exit].
F Select the [Include this location in the search] check box under [Search for the
best driver in these location], and then click [Browse] to select the printer driver location.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the
following location:
• RPCS
D:DRIVESRPCSWIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1
• PCL 5e
D:DRIVESPCL5EWIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1
• PCL 6
D:DRIVESPCL6WIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1
• PostScript 3
D:DRIVESPS3WIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1
G Check the printer driver location, and then click [Next].
H Click [Continue].
I Click [Finish].
If installation is successful, the icon of the printer connected to the “USB001”
port is added to the [Printers] window.
❒ The number after “USB” varies depending on the number of printers connected.
Troubleshooting USB
Problem
Solutions
The printer is not recognized automatically.
Turn off the power of the printer, reconnect the USB cable,
and then turn it on again.
63
Preparing for Printing
Windows has already configured
the USB settings.
Open Windows' Device Manager, and then, under [Universal Serial Bus controllers], remove any conflicting devices.
Conflicting devices have a yellow [!] or [?] icon by them.
Take care not to accidentally remove required devices.
For details, see Windows Help.
❒ When using Windows 2000/XP or Windows Server
2003, an erroneous device is displayed under [USB
Controller]in the [Device Manager] dialog box.
64
Preparing for Printing
Printing with Parallel Connection
To use a printer connected using a parallel interface, click [LPT1] when installing
the printer driver.
Installing the PCL or RPCS Printer Driver
❒ To install this printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows
Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group
member.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
D Click [PCL/RPCS Printer Drivers].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box.
After reading the agreement, click [I accept the agreement], and then click [Next].
F Select a printer driver you want to use in the [Printer Program] dialog box.
You can select several printer drivers.
G Select the [Printer Name] check box to select the printer models you want
to use.
The printer name can be changed in the [Change settings for 'Printer Name'] box.
H Double-click the printer name to display the printer settings.
The details shown in [Comment:], [Driver:], and [Port:] vary depending on the
operating system, printer model, and port.
I Check that [LPT1:] is shown in [Port:].
J Select the [Default Printer] check box to configure the printer as default.
K Click [Finish].
65
Preparing for Printing
The printer driver installation starts.
L Click [Finish] in the installation completion dialog box.
❒ To stop installation of the selected software, click [Cancel] before installation is complete.
A message appears if there is a newer version of the printer driver already
installed. If there is, you cannot install the printer driver using Auto Run. If
you still want to install the printer driver, use [Add Printer]. See p.77 “If a
Message Appears during Installation”.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 95/98/Me)
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
G Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then
click [Next].
H In the [Available ports:] box, click [Printer Port], and then click [Next].
I Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next].
Select the [Yes] check box to configure the printer as default.
J Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
66
Preparing for Printing
K Restart the computer to complete installation.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows 2000)
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
G Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then
click [Next].
H Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
I Restart the computer to complete installation.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
67
Preparing for Printing
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows XP, Windows
Server 2003)
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next].
F Click [Local Printer], and then click [Next].
G Select the port you want to use, and then click [Next].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
H Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then
click [Next].
I Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next].
J Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
K Restart the computer to complete installation.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
68
Preparing for Printing
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver (Windows NT 4.0)
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
Auto Run may not work with certain operating system settings. If this happens, launch “Setup.exe” on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
❒ The printer driver with the selected language will be installed. The English
printer driver is installed when the following language is selected: Cestina,
Magyar, Polski, Portugues, Suomi.
D Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].
Add Printer Wizard starts.
E Click [Next].
F Select the port you want to use, and then click [Next].
A dialog box for selecting the printer manufacturer and model name appears.
G Select the name of the printer whose driver you want to install, and then
click [Next].
H Change the printer name if you want, and then click [Next].
I Click [Next].
J Specify whether or not to print a test page, and then click [Finish].
K Restart the computer to complete installation.
❒ A user code can be set after the printer driver installation. For information
about user code, see the printer driver Help.
69
Preparing for Printing
Installing the Printer Driver Using IEEE 1394
(SCSI print)
The printer drivers can be installed from the CD-ROM provided with this printer.
❒ Quit all applications currently running, and do not print during installation.
❒ Do not connect IEEE 1394 or USB devices to the computer or turn on another
printers during installation.
❒ Before uninstalling the printer driver, check that the IEEE 1394 interface cable
is disconnected from the computer.
❒ SCSI print must be set to “active” from the control panel. For details, see
p.149 “Host Interface Menu”.
❒ This printer can receive print data from one computer at a time only. An message may appear if jobs from different computers collide.
❒ If jobs collide, the first received is printed first.
❒ When the printer driver is properly installed, connecting or disconnecting the
optional IEEE 1394 cable causes the printer icon to change.
Windows 2000
❒ If [Found New Hardware Wizard] appears every time the computer is started or
the cable is connected, disable the device. To install another printer driver after setting the “1394_00n” port, click [1394_00] as a port during the printer
driver installation.
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
❒ The optional 1394 interface unit can be used only with Service Pack 1 (SP1)
or higher.
A Connect the printer and computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable.
B Click [Next] in the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box.
C When the message “This wizard will complete the installation for this
Device: Unknown” appears, click [Specify a location], and then click [Next
>].
D When the message “Locate Driver Files” appears, select the [Optional
search locations] check box, and then click [Specify a location], and then click
[Next >].
70
Preparing for Printing
E To disable Auto Run, press the left {SHIFT} key when inserting the CD-
ROM into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD-ROM.
If Auto Run starts, click [Cancel], and then [Exit].
F Click [Browse].
G Select the printer driver you want to use.
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the
following location:
• RPCS
D:DRIVESRPCSWIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1
• PCL 5e
D:DRIVESPCL5EWIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1
• PCL 6
D:DRIVESPCL6WIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1
• PostScript 3
D:DRIVESPS3WIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1
H Click [Open].
I Click [OK].
J Follow the instructions.
When installation is complete, the printer connected to “1394_00n” appears
in the [Printers] window. (“n” shows the number of printers connected.)
❒ If the printer driver has already been installed, the printer icon is added to
the [Printers] window. In this case, printer driver installation is not necessary.
❒ If printing does not work properly after the installation, delete the port and
reinstall the printer driver. For details, see “Printer Does Not Print”, Maintenance Guide.
❒ If you do not want to install the printer when Found New Hardware Wizard
starts under an operating system that supports SCSI print, disable the device by following the procedure below.
A When the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, click [Next >].
B When the message “This wizard will complete the installation for this
Device: Unknown” appears, select the [Search for a suitable driver for my
device [recommended]] check box, and then click [Next >].
C When the message “Please choose your search and installation option.”
appears, clear all check boxes from [Search for the best driver in these locations.], and then click [Next >].
71
Preparing for Printing
D
When the message “Driver Files Search Results” appears, select the
[Disable the device. The Add/Remove Hardware Wizard in the control Panel can
be able to complete the driver installations.] check box, and then click [Finish].
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
❒ SCSI print must be set to “active” from the control panel. For details, see
p.149 “Host Interface Menu”.
❒ Installing this printer driver requires Administrators permission. Log on using
an account that has Administrators permission.
❒ This printer can receive print data from one computer at a time only. If a job
from a computer collides with other data, a message may appear on the computer.
❒ To install another printer driver after setting the “1394_00n” port, click
[1394_00] as a port during the printer driver installation.
❒ When the printer driver is properly installed, connecting or disconnecting the
optional IEEE 1394 cable causes the printer icon to change.
A Connect the printer and computer using the IEEE 1394 interface cable.
When the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, check that [This wizard helps you install software for: (Unknown)] is displayed.
B Select the [Install from a list on specific location (Advanced)] check box, and
then click [Next >].
C When the message “Please choose your search and installation op-
tion.” appears, select the [Search for the best driver in these locations.] check
box, select the [Include this location in the search:] check box, and then select
the [Include this location in the search:] check box.
D To disable Auto Run, press the left {SHIFT} key when inserting the CD-
ROM into the drive and keep it pressed until the computer finishes reading from the CD-ROM.
❒ If Auto Run starts, click [Cancel], and then [Exit].
E Specify the location where the source files of the printer driver is stored,
and then click [Next].
If the CD-ROM drive is D, the source files of the printer driver are stored in the
following location:
• RPCS
72
Preparing for Printing
D:DRIVESRPCSWIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1
• PCL 5e
D:DRIVESPCL5EWIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1
• PCL 6
D:DRIVESPCL6WIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1
• PostScript 3
D:DRIVESPS3WIN2K_XP(Language)DISK1
When installation is complete, the printer connected to “1394_00n” appears
in the [Printers and Faxes] window. (“n” shows the number of printers connected.)
F Follow the instructions.
❒ If the printer driver has already been installed, the printer icon is added to
the [Printers and Faxes] window. In this case, printer driver installation is not
necessary.
❒ Even if the printer driver is already installed, the message “ Found New
Hardware Wizard” may appear when the printer and the computer are connected using the IEEE 1394 interface cable for the first time. If it does, install the printer driver.
❒ If printing does not work properly after the installation, delete the port and
reinstall the printer driver. For details, see “Printer Does Not Print”, Maintenance Guide.
❒ If you do not want to install the printer when Found New Hardware Wizard
starts under an operating system that supports SCSI print, disable the device by following the procedure below
A When the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog box appears, check that
[This wizard helps you install software for: Unknown] displayed, select [Install
from a list on specific location (Advanced)] check box, and then click [Next >].
B When the message “Please choose your search and installation option.”
appears, clear all check boxes from [Search for the best driver in these locations.], and then click [Next >].
C When the message “The wizard could not find the software on your
computer for.” appears, click [OK].
D When the message “Cannot Install this Hardware” appears, select the
[Don't prompt again to install the software] check box, and then click [Finish].
73
Preparing for Printing
Printing with Bluetooth Connection
Supported Profiles
❖ SPP, HCRP
• A maximum of two Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computers
can be connected at the same time using the Bluetooth interface: one by
SPP, one by HCRP.
• When connecting more than one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped
computer at the same time, the first device that establishes connection is
selected. When selecting the connection between the other devices, cancel the first established connection.
• Conditions for bidirectional communications
• SPP connection does not support bidirectional communications.
• HCRP connection supports bidirectional communications.
❖ BIP
• For BIP connection, a module including PostScript 3 must be installed in
the printer.
• Only one Bluetooth adaptor or Bluetooth-equipped computer can be connected via BIP.
• Only JPEG images that can be printed using BIP.
• User codes are disabled for BIP.
You cannot print if print functions are restricted.
• Some printers do not support BIP.
Printing with Bluetooth Connection
To install the printer driver, follow the procedure used to install parallel interface.
❒ To install the printer driver under Windows 2000/XP Professional, Windows
Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0, you must have an account that has Manage Printers permission. Log on as an Administrators or Power Users group
member.
❒ System requirements vary depending on the Bluetooth standard and specifications. For details, see the manuals provided with each product.
❒ For information about setting up Bluetooth under other operating systems or
using it with different utilities, see the manuals provided with those operating
systems or utilities.
74
Preparing for Printing
A Start 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.
B Check that the printer you want to use appears in 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.
C On the [Tool] menu, click [COM port].
D Check that the message “Bluetooth Serial Client (COMx) “ appears under Client Ports. (X indicates the COM port number used by Bluetooth.)
E Click [Close].
F On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
G Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
H On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
I Click the [Ports] tab.
J Under [Port], select the [COMx:] check box. X indicates the COM port number used by Bluetooth.
K Click [OK].
Close the [Printers] window.
❖ If a dialog box appears while transmitting a print job, reestablish network connection as follows:
A Select the printer you want to use in the [Printers and Faxes] box.
B Click [Connect].
❒ To always use the same printer, select the [Always use for this connection]
check box.
For details, see the manuals provided with the Bluetooth adaptor or
computer equipped with Bluetooth.
Configuring Security Mode Settings
A Start 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager.
B On the [Tools] menu, click [Security Mode].
The [Security Mode] dialog box appears.
C Select the security mode in the [Security Mode:] list.
75
Preparing for Printing
If you click [High], or [Custom], and specify [Link] in the [Custom Settings] dialog
box, enter the Bluetooth password. For information about entering the password, see p.76 “Send the print job to the printer in use.”.
For all other security modes and custom settings, no password is required.
❒ For information about each mode, see the manuals provided with the utility.
D Click [OK].
Close the [Security Mode] dialog box.
For details about the security mode, see 3Com Bluetooth Connection Manager Help. For details about the password entry which is required to transmit print jobs, see p.76 “Printing in the Security Mode”.
Printing in the Security Mode
A Send the print job to the printer in use.
Depending on the computer configuration, the [Connect] dialog box may appear. If it does, use it to establish the network connection.
B The [Authentication] dialog box appears.
C Enter the Bluetooth password, and then click [OK].
As the Bluetooth password, enter the last four digits of the printer's serial number. You can find the serial number on the label on the back of the printer. For
example, if the serial number is 00A0-001234, the Bluetooth password is
1234.
D The print job is sent.
❒ The Bluetooth password differs for each printer and cannot be changed.
76
Preparing for Printing
If a Message Appears during Installation
Message number 58 or 34 indicates the printer driver cannot be installed using
Auto Run. Install the printer driver using [Add Printer] or [>Install Printer].
For Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000 and Windows NT 4.0:
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
B Double-click the Add Printer icon.
C Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
❒ If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the RPCS printer driver
is either DRIVERSRPCSWIN9X_ME, DRIVERSRPCSWIN2K_XP, or
DRIVERSRPCS T4. If the installer starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
For Windows XP Professional and Windows Server 2003:
A On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
B Click [Add a printer].
C Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
❒ If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the RPCS printer driver
is DRIVERSRPCSWIN2K_XP. If the installer starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
For Windows XP Home Editions:
A On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel].
B Click [Printers and Other Hardware].
C Click [Printers and Faxes].
D Click [Install Printer].
E Follow the instructions in Add Printer Wizard.
❒ If the printer driver is on a CD-ROM, the location of the RPCS printer driver
is \DRIVERS\RPCS\WIN2K_XP. If the installer starts, click [Cancel] to quit.
77
Preparing for Printing
Making Option Settings for the Printer
Make option settings for the printer using the printer driver when bidirectional
communication is disabled.
For details about making option settings for the printer, see p.79 “If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled”.
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication
Bidirectional communication allows information about paper size and feed direction settings to be automatically sent to the printer. You can check printer status
from your computer.
• Bidirectional communication is supported by Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP,
Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0.
• If you use the RPCS printer driver and bidirectional communication is enabled
under Windows 2000, the [Change Accessories] tab is unavailable.
❒ The RPCS printer driver supports bidirectional communications and updates
the printer status automatically.
❒ The PCL printer driver supports bidirectional communications. You can update printer status manually.
❒ The PostScript 3 printer driver does not support bidirectional communications.
To support bidirectional communication, the following conditions must be met:
❖ When connected with parallel cables
• The computer must support bidirectional communication.
• The printer must support bidirectional communication.
• The interface cable must support bidirectional communication.
• The printer must be connected to the computer using the standard parallel
cables and parallel connectors.
• Under Windows 2000, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and
[Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [Port] tab with the RPCS
printer driver.
❖ When connected with the network
• The printer must support bidirectional communication.
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Client included on the CD-ROM must be installed,
and TCP/IP must be used.
78
Preparing for Printing
• Under Windows 2000, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and
[Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on the [Port] tab with the RPCS
printer driver.
• In addition to the above, one of the following conditions must also be met:
• The SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port and the TCP/IP protocol must
be used.
• The standard TCP/IP port must be used without changing the default
port name (for Windows 2000/XP and Windows Server 2003).
• Microsoft TCP/IP print IP address must be specified for use (for Windows NT 4.0).
• IPP port name must include the IP address when using the IPP protocol.
❖ When connected with IEEE 1394
• The computer must support bidirectional communication.
• The printer must be connected to the IEEE 1394 connector of a computer
using the IEEE 1394 interface cable.
• [Activate] must be selected in the SCSI print of IEEE 1394 and [Activate]
must be selected in the Bidi-SCSI print.
• Under Windows 2000/XP or Windows Server 2003, [Enable bidirectional support] must be selected, and [Enable printer pooling] must not be selected on
the [Port] tab with RPCS printer driver.
❖ When connected with USB
The printer must be connected to the computer's USB port using the USB interface cable.
The computer must support bidirectional communication.
❒ Install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client from the CD-ROM provided.
If Bidirectional Communication is Disabled
Set up option settings when bidirectional communications are disabled.
❒ Under Windows 2000/XP and Windows Server 2003, Manage Printers permission is required to change the printer properties in the [Printers] folder. Log
on as an Administrators or Power Users group member.
❒ Under Windows NT 4.0, Full Control permission is required to change the
printer properties in the [Printers] folder. Log on as an Administrators or Power
Users group member.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
79
Preparing for Printing
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
D Click the [Accessories] tab.
If options in the [Change Accessories] tab are disabled, bidirectional connection
is enabled. In this case, no change is necessary for option settings.
❒ If you are using the RPCS printer driver, click the [Change Accessories] tab.
❒ If you are using the PS printer driver, click the [Device Settings] tab.
E Select options installed from the [Option] area, and then make the necessary settings.
F Select the total amount of the memory in [Total Memory:], when the optional SDRAM module is added.
G Under [Paper source tray settings], click and highlight the tray to be used,
and then select the appropriate size, position, and type for the tray. Select the [Tray locking] check box to exclude the tray from the targets of automatic tray selection.
H Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box. Click the [Defaults]
tab, and then click [Change Accessories] to display the option selection.
Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box. Click the [Defaults] tab,
and then click [Change Accessories] to display the option selection.
80
Setting Up the Printer Driver
PCL - Accessing the Printer Properties
Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties
There are two methods to open the printer properties dialog box.
Making printer default settings
To make the printer default settings, open the printer properties dialog box from
the [Printers] window.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Making printer settings from an application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for
the WordPad application provided with Windows 95/98/Me.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list, and then click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
D Click [OK] to start printing.
G1168612_1.00
Copyright © 2004
81
Setting Up the Printer Driver
❒ The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current
application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box
of an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing
from this application.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making printer default settings - the printer properties
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the
Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by
default.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
❒ Do not make a setting for [Form to Tray Assignment].
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
82
Setting Up the Printer Driver
Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Making printer settings from an application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences]
dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for
the WordPad application provided with Windows 2000.
❒ The procedure to open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box of
an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from
this application.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] list.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [Apply] to start printing.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
83
Setting Up the Printer Driver
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer
Properties
Making printer default settings - the printer properties
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the
Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by
default.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
❒ Do not make a setting for [Form to Tray Assignment].
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
84
Setting Up the Printer Driver
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Making printer settings from an application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences]
dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for
the WordPad application provided with Windows XP.
❒ The procedure to open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box of
an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from
this application.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] list.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [Apply] to start printing.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making printer default settings - the printer properties
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups
have Full Control permission by default.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
85
Setting Up the Printer Driver
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
❒ Do not make a setting for [Form to Tray Assignment].
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Making printer default settings - Default
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups
have Full Control permission by default.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults].
The [Default] dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Making printer settings from an application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for
the WordPad application provided with Windows NT 4.0.
86
Setting Up the Printer Driver
❒ The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending
on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application
you use.
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box of
an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from
this application.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list, and then click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
D Click [OK] to start printing.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
87
Setting Up the Printer Driver
RPCS - Accessing the Printer Properties
Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties
There are two dialog box types of the printer properties dialog box.
“Multi-tab” is used as an example in this manual. For details about changing the
dialog box types, see the printer driver Help.
❖ Multi-tab
This dialog box type is designed for users who often change print settings to
perform various printing operations.
❖ Custom Setting
This dialog box type is designed for users who rarely change print settings.
This type of dialog box may vary depending on the installed options.
Making printer default settings
To make the printer default settings, open the printer properties dialog box from
the [Printers] window.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
❒ When you open the printer properties dialog box initially after installing the
RPCS printer driver, a confirmation message appears. After clicking [OK],
the printer properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
88
Setting Up the Printer Driver
Making printer settings from an application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for
the WordPad application provided with Windows 95/98/Me.
❒ The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending
on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application
you use.
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box of
an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from
this application.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list, and then click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
D Click [OK] to start printing.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making printer default settings - the printer properties
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the
Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by
default.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
89
Setting Up the Printer Driver
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
❒ When you open the printer properties dialog box initially after installing the
RPCS printer driver, a confirmation message appears. After clicking [OK],
the printer properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
❒ Do not make a setting for [Form to Tray Assignment].
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Making printer settings from an application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences]
dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for
the WordPad application provided with Windows 2000.
90
Setting Up the Printer Driver
❒ The procedure to open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box of
an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from
this application.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] list.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [Apply] to start printing.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer
Properties
Making printer default settings - the printer properties
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the
Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by
default.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
❒ When you open the printer properties dialog box initially after installing the
RPCS printer driver, a confirmation message appears. After clicking [OK],
the printer properties dialog box appears.
91
Setting Up the Printer Driver
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
❒ Do not make a setting for [Form to Tray Assignment].
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Making printer settings from an application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences]
dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for
the WordPad application provided with Windows XP.
❒ The procedure to open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box of
an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from
this application.
92
Setting Up the Printer Driver
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] list.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [Apply] to start printing.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making printer default settings - the printer properties
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups
have Full Control permission by default.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
❒ When you open the printer properties dialog box initially after installing the
RPCS printer driver, a confirmation message appears. After clicking [OK],
the printer properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
❒ Do not make a setting for [Form to Tray Assignment].
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
93
Setting Up the Printer Driver
Making printer default settings - Default
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups
have Full Control permission by default.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults...].
The [Default] dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Making printer settings from an application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for
the WordPad application provided with Windows NT 4.0.
❒ The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending
on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application
you use.
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box of
an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from
this application.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
94
Setting Up the Printer Driver
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list, and then click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [Apply].
D Click [OK] to start printing.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
95
Setting Up the Printer Driver
PostScript 3 - Setting Up for Printing
Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Printer Properties
There are two methods to open the printer properties dialog box.
Making printer default settings
To make the printer default settings, open the printer properties dialog box from
the [Printers] window.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
E Click [OK].
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Making printer settings from an application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for
the WordPad application provided with Windows 95/98/Me.
❒ The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending
on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application
you use.
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.
96
Setting Up the Printer Driver
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box of
an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from
this application.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list, and then click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
D Click [OK] to start printing.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Windows 2000 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making printer default settings - the printer properties
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the
Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by
default.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
❒ Do not make a setting for [Form to Tray Assignment].
97
Setting Up the Printer Driver
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Making printer settings from an application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences]
dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for
the WordPad application provided with Windows 2000.
❒ The procedure to open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box of
an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from
this application.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] list.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [Print] to start printing.
98
Setting Up the Printer Driver
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 - Accessing the Printer
Properties
Making printer default settings - the printer properties
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the
Administrators and Power Users groups have Manage Printers permission by
default.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
❒ Do not make a setting for [Form to Tray Assignment].
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Making printer default settings - Printing Preferences
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
The [Printers and Faxes] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Printing Preferences...].
The [Printing Preferences] dialog box appears.
99
Setting Up the Printer Driver
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Making printer settings from an application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the [Printing Preferences]
dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for
the WordPad application provided with Windows XP.
❒ The procedure to open the [Printing Preferences] dialog box may vary depending on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application you use.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box of
an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from
this application.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] list.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [Print] to start printing.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Windows NT 4.0 - Accessing the Printer Properties
Making printer default settings - the printer properties
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups
have Full Control permission by default.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
100
Setting Up the Printer Driver
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears .
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
❒ Do not make a setting for [Form to Tray Assignment].
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Making printer default settings - Default
❒ To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings,
log on using an account that has Full Control permission. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Users groups
have Full Control permission by default.
❒ You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings made
in the printer properties dialog box are applied to all users.
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers].
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use.
C On the [File] menu, click [Document Defaults].
The [Default] dialog box appears.
D Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
❒ Settings you make here are used as the default settings for all applications.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Making printer settings from an application
You can make printer settings for a specific application.
101
Setting Up the Printer Driver
To make printer settings for a specific application, open the printer properties dialog box from that application. The following explains how to make settings for
the WordPad application provided with Windows NT 4.0.
❒ The procedure to open the printer properties dialog box may vary depending
on the application. For details, see the manuals provided with the application
you use.
❒ With some applications, the printer driver settings are not used, and the application's own default settings are applied.
❒ Any settings you make in the following procedure are valid for the current application only.
❒ General users can change the properties displayed in the [Print] dialog box of
an application. Settings made here are used as defaults when printing from
this application.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list, and then click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
C Make the necessary settings, and then click [OK].
D Click [OK] to start printing.
For details, see Printer Driver Help.
Mac OS - Setting Up for Printing
Making paper settings from an application
A Open the file you want to print.
B On the [File] menu, click [Page Setup].
C Check that the printer you want to use is displayed in [Format for:], and
then select the paper size you want to use in [Paper].
Under Mac OS X, select the paper size in [Paper Size].
❒ If the printer you want to use is not displayed in [Format for:], select the printer you want to use.
102
Setting Up the Printer Driver
The [Page Setup] dialog box varies depending on the application you use.
For details, see the manuals provided with the Mac OS.
D Configure the settings, and then click [OK].
Setting up for printing from an application
A Open the file you want to print.
B On the [File] menu, click [Print].
C Check that the printer is selected in the [Printer] list, and then make the
printer settings.
D Configure the settings, and then click [OK].
103
Other Print Operations
Printing a PDF File Directly
You can send PDF files directly to this printer to print, without opening its application.
❒ This is possible for Adobe PDF files only.
❒ PDF files of versions 1.3, 1.4, and 1.5 are supported.
❒ Transparency and JBIG2 which are functions of version 1.4 are not supported.
❒ Functions of 1.5 file format are not supported.
Using DeskTopBinder Lite
PDF files added with DeskTopBinder Lite can be sent directly to this printer for
printing.
❒ The RPCS printer driver must be installed.
❒ PDF Direct Print is not available with some versions of DeskTopBinder Lite.
Use DeskTopBinder Lite installed from the CD-ROM provided with this printer.
❒ PDF Direct Print settings can be made from PDF Direct Print properties.
❒ To print password-protected PDF files, you must do the following:
• Enter the PDF password using PDF Direct Print properties.
• Using the control panel, press [PDF: Change PW] on the [PDF] menu to set
the PDF password.
❒ If a group password is set with DeskTopBinder Lite, set the group password
by pressing [PDF Group PW] on the [PDF] menu using the control panel.
For details, see DeskTopBinder Lite Help.
Installing DeskTopBinder Lite
Follow the procedure below to install DeskTopBinder Lite.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
G1168612_1.00
Copyright © 2004
104
Other Print Operations
❒ Auto Run may not work under certain operating system settings. In this
case, launch “Setup.exe” located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
D Click [DeskTopBinder Lite] , and then click [Next].
E Follow the instructions on the display to install DeskTopBinder Lite.
If you are required to restart the computer after installing DeskTopBinder Lite,
restart the computer and continue the configuration.
Using Commands
Under Windows and UNIX, you can print PDF files directly, using commands
such as “ftp” and “lpr”.
For details about printing using commands under Windows, see p.247 “Printing Files Directly from Windows”.
For details about printing using commands under UNIX, see UNIX Supplement.
105
Other Print Operations
Sample Print
Use this function to print the first set of a multiple-set print job. After checking the
results, the remaining sets can be printed using the control panel. This function
can protect you from printing a large quantity of misprints.
❒ To use this function, the optional hard disk must be installed on the printer.
❒ The number of pages the printer can save varies depending on the contents
of the print images. At most, the printer can save 30 jobs or 1100 pages for
Sample Print and Locked Print. At most, the printer can store up to 1000 pages for 1 job.
❒ If you turn off the power, the job saved on the hard disk will be deleted.
❒ Sample Print files will not appear on the panel display if they have already
been executed or deleted using the Web browser before you select “Sample
Print“ from the control panel.
❒ Sample Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor, after you select [Sample Print] using the control panel will appear on the display panel.
However, an error message will appear if you try to print or delete those Sample Print files.
❒ You can identify the file you want to print by the user ID and the time when the
job was stored.
❒ If the first set of the Sample Print file is not as you expected and you do not
want to print the remaining sets, delete the Sample Print file using the control
panel or Web Image Monitor.
❒ The job in the printer is deleted automatically after all Sample Print files are
printed.
❒ Follow the procedure below to use this function with the PCL or RPCS printer
driver under Windows. If you want to use this function under Mac OS, see
p.263 “Using PostScript 3”.
For details about settings for the printer driver, see the printer driver Help.
Files specified for Sample Print can be printed or deleted using Web Image
Monitor. For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.
Printing the First Set
A From an application, select a command to print.
The [Print] dialog box appears.
106
Other Print Operations
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list, and then click [Properties].
The printer properties dialog box appear.
C In the [Job Type:] box, click [Sample Print].
D In the [User ID:] box, enter a user ID using up to eight alphanumeric char-
acters.
This is used to identify the user. The user ID can be entered using up to eight
alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.
E Execute a command to print.
The job is saved on the hard disk.
F Check the print job, and then use the control panel to print the remaining
sets or delete them.
p.107 “Printing the Remaining Sets”
p.108 “Deleting a Sample Print File”
Printing the Remaining Sets
A Press the {Menu} key.
The [Menu] screen appears.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Sample Print], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display the file you want to print, and then
press the {# Enter} key.
D Check that [Print File] is displayed, and then press the {# Enter} key.
The number of remaining sets appears.
107
Other Print Operations
To cancel printing, press the {Escape} key.
E Press the {# Enter} key. To change the number of sets you want to print,
press the {U} or {T} key and select the number of sets, and then press
the {# Enter} key.
After the job is printed, the job saved on the hard disk is deleted.
Deleting a Sample Print File
A Press the {Menu} key.
The [Menu] screen appears.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Sample Print], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display the file you want to delete, and then
press the {# Enter} key.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Delete File], and then press the {# Enter} key.
To cancel deleting a Sample Print file, press the {Escape} key.
E Press the {# Enter} key to delete the file.
The message [Deleted] appears.
F Press the {On Line} key.
The initial screen appears.
Checking the Error Log
When a print job is not saved on the hard disk, it remains in the error log and can
be checked using the control panel.
108
Other Print Operations
❒ The latest 50 error files are stored in the error log. If a new error file is added
when there are 50 error files already stored, the oldest file is deleted. However, if the oldest error file is a sample print file, it is not deleted, but stored instead in the sample print error log until the number of sample print error files
reaches 20.
❒ If you turn off the power, the logs will be deleted.
A Press the {Menu} key.
The [Menu] screen appears.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Sample Print], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Error File(s)], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to check the log.
To print error files, either print or delete the file saved on the hard disk, and
then print the file from the computer again.
E When you finish checking the error log, press the {Escape} key.
The Sample Print job selection screen appears.
F Press the {On Line} key.
The initial screen appears.
109
Other Print Operations
Locked Print
Use this function to print confidential documents. Documents will not be printed
automatically unless a password is entered using the control panel.
❒ To use this function, the optional hard disk must be installed on the printer.
❒ The number of pages the printer can save varies depending on the print image content. At most, the printer can store 30 jobs or 1100 pages for Sample
Print and Locked Print. At most, the printer can store a maximum of 1000 pages for a single job.
❒ If you turn off the power, the job saved on the hard disk will be deleted.
❒ Locked Print files will not appear on the display panel if they have already
been printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor before you select [Locked
Print] using the control panel.
❒ Locked Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor after you have
selected [Locked Print] using the control panel will still appear on the display
panel. However, an error message will appear if you try to print or delete those
Locked Print files.
❒ Print jobs are not saved on the hard disk in the following cases. You can check
the error log for jobs not saved.
• When there are 30 Sample Print and Locked Print jobs saved on the hard
disk.
• When the total number of pages saved on the hard disk exceeds 1000 pages.
❒ You can identify the file you want to print by the user ID and the time when the
job was stored.
❒ After the Locked Print file is printed, the job in the printer is deleted automatically.
❒ Follow the procedure below to use this function with the PCL printer driver or
RPCS printer driver under Windows. If you want to use this function under
Mac OS, p.263 “Using PostScript 3”.
For details about settings for the printer driver, see the printer driver Help.
Files specified for Locked Print can be printed or deleted using Web Image
Monitor. For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.
Sending Print Job to the Printer
A From an application, select a command to print.
110
Other Print Operations
The [Print] dialog box appears.
B Select the printer you want to use in the [Name] list, and then click [Properties].
C In the [Job Type:] box, click [Locked Print].
D In the [User ID:] box, enter a user ID using up to eight alphanumeric char-
acters.
This is used to identify the user. The user ID can be entered using up to eight
alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.
E In the [Password:] box, enter a four to eight digit password (0-9).
F Execute a command to print.
The job is saved on the hard disk.
G Enter the password using the control panel, and then specify whether to
print or delete the job.
p.111 “Entering a Password”
p.112 “Deleting a Locked Print File”
Entering a Password
A Press the {Menu} key.
The [Menu] screen appears.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Locked Print], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display the file you want to print, and then
press the {# Enter} key.
111
Other Print Operations
D Enter the password. Press the {U} or {T} key to enter the leftmost digit
of the password, and then press the {# Enter} key.
E The next digit appears.
F Repeat step to enter all the digits of the password, and then press the {#
Enter} key.
G Check that [Print File] is displayed, and then press the {# Enter} key.
To cancel printing, press the {Escape} key.
H Press the {# Enter} key.
After the job is printed, the job saved on the hard disk is deleted.
Deleting a Locked Print File
A Press the {Menu} key.
The [Menu] screen appears.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Locked Print], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display the file you want to delete.
D Enter the password of the Locked Print file. Press the {U} or {T} key to
enter the leftmost digit of the password, and then press the {# Enter} key.
E The next digit appears.
F Repeat step to enter all the digits of the password, and then press the {#
Enter} key.
G Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Delete File], and then press the {# Enter} key.
To cancel deleting a Locked Print file, press the {Escape} key.
112
Other Print Operations
H Press the {# Enter} key.
The message [Deleted] appears, and then the Locked Print job selection
screen appears.
Checking the Error Log
When a print job is not saved on the hard disk, it remains in the error log and can
be checked using the control panel.
❒ The latest 50 error files are stored in the error log. If a new error file is added
when there are 50 error files already stored, the oldest file is deleted. However, if the oldest error file is a sample print file, it is not deleted, but stored instead in the sample print error log until the number of sample print error files
reaches 20.
❒ If you turn off the power, the logs will be deleted.
A Press the {Menu} key.
The [Menu] screen appears.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Locked Print], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
The user ID and the time when the job was stored appear.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Error File(s)], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to check the log.
To print error files, either print or delete the file saved on the hard disk, and
then print the file from the computer again.
E When you finish checking the error log, press the {Escape} key.
The Locked Print job selection screen appears.
F Press the {On Line} key.
113
Other Print Operations
The initial screen appears.
114
Other Print Operations
Form Feed
This message appears when the paper tray is empty, or when the paper in the
paper tray is not of the same size or form as that specified by the printer driver.
You can form feed using tray.
A Press the {Form Feed} key, and then select the paper tray on the screen.
B Press the {Enter} key.
The job is printed from the selected tray.
115
Other Print Operations
Canceling a Print Job
You can cancel printing from either the printer or a client computer. Since canceling procedures vary depending on the print job status, check the job status
and cancel printing according to the following procedure.
Windows - Canceling a Print Job
❒ When the printer is connected to multiple computers, be careful not to accidentally cancel other users' print jobs.
If the print job you want to cancel is being printed
A Check if the print job you want to cancel is currently being printed.
While the print job may not be being printed, the printer is receiving data if the
Data In indicator is lit or blinking.
B Press the {Job Reset} key.
The [Job Reset?] screen appears.
C Select the current job or all jobs (including the current job) using the {U}
or {T} key.
It is also possible to annul the cancellation. Printing resumes if you select [Resume Print], and then press the {# Enter} key.
D Press the {# Enter} key.
A confirmation message appears.
Printing resumes if you press the {Escape} key after the message appears.
E Press the {# Enter} key.
The job is canceled. When the cancellation procedure is complete, a message appears.
❒ A print job that contains a large volume of data may take considerable time
to cancel.
❒ If printing resumes after being canceled, the period of time set for [I/O Timeout] is too short. Set a longer period of time for [I/O Timeout] on the [Host
Interface] menu.
116
Other Print Operations
If the print job you want to cancel is not being printed
A Double-click the printer icon on the Windows task tray.
A window appears showing all print jobs that are currently queuing to be printed. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel.
You can also open the print job queue window by double-clicking the printer
icon in the [Printer] window.
B Select the name of the job you want to cancel.
C On the [Document] menu, click [Cancel Printing].
❒ When this printer is used as a network printer, other users' print jobs cannot
be canceled from a client computer.
❒ Clicking [Purge Print Documents] on the [printer] menu deletes all currently
queued print jobs. However, when this printer is used as a network printer,
print jobs from other users' computer cannot be canceled from a client
computer.
❒ When the print job you selected starts printing, it takes some time before
the print job disappears from the printer window.
Mac OS - Canceling a Print Job
❒ When the printer is connected to multiple computers, be careful not to accidentally cancel other users' print jobs.
If the print job you want to cancel is being printed
A Check if the print job you want to cancel is currently being printed.
While the print job may not be being printed, the printer is receiving data if the
Data In indicator is lit or blinking.
B Press the {Job Reset} key.
[Job Reset?] appears on the panel display.
C Select the current job or all jobs (including the current job) using the {U}
or {T} key.
It is also possible to annul the cancellation. Printing resumes if you select [Resume Print], and then press {# Enter} key.
D Press the {# Enter} key.
A confirmation message appears.
117
Other Print Operations
Printing resumes if you press the {Escape} key after the message appears.
E Press the {# Enter} key.
The job is canceled. When the cancellation procedure is complete, a message appears.
❒ A print job that contains a large volume of data may take considerable time
to cancel.
❒ To secure enough time for sending a command to cancel printing, set a
long period of time in [I/O Timeout] on the [Host Interface] menu.
If the print job you want to cancel is not being printed
A Double-click the printer icon on the desktop.
A window appears showing all print jobs that are currently queuing to be printed. Check the current status of the job you want to cancel.
Under Mac OS X, start Print Center.
B Select the name of the job you want to cancel.
C Click the pause icon, and then click the trash icon.
❒ When this printer is used as a network printer, other users' print jobs cannot
be canceled from a client computer.
118
Other Print Operations
Caution During Printing
Collate
The Collate function allows you to print while sorting printouts into page-ordered
sets, such as when printing multiple copies of meeting materials.
For details about collate and job separation, see the printer driver Help.
❖ Collate
Output can be assembled as sets in sequential order.
❒ To use these functions, an optional memory unit of at least 256 MB or the optional hard disk drive must be installed on the printer.
❒ Up to 150 pages can be sorted using RAM. If the optional hard disk drive is
installed, up to 1000 pages can be sorted.
Spool Printing
With Spool Printing, the print data is saved in the hard disk before printing. To
use this function, set it from the menu. See p.204 “spoolsw”.
❒ Do not turn off the printer or the computer when a print job is being spooled
and the Data In indicator is blinking. The print job will remain in the hard disk
and be printed when the printer is turned on. The setting can be changed using the “spoolsw clear job” command on the telnet
❒ The Spool Printing function is available when the optional hard disk is installed.
❒ The Spool Printing function is available for data received using diprint, lpr, ipp,
ftp, and smb.
❒ When using diprint, the Spool Printing function cannot be used with bidirectional communication.
❒ The domain reserved for spool printing is about 1 GB.
❒ When Spool Printing is on, the size of a single print job cannot exceed 500
MB.
119
Other Print Operations
❒ When sending print jobs spooled from several computers, up to one diprint
job, 10 lpr jobs, one ipp job, one ftp job, and one smb job can be spooled. Jobs
exceeding this spooling capacity cannot be executed. It is necessary to wait
to add new jobs.
❒ First pages take longer to print when using spool printing.
❒ With Spool Printing, the computer is freed from print processing earlier, even
when processing a large amount of data.
❒ Spool jobs stored in the printer can be viewed or deleted using Web Image
Monitor.
For information about the “spoolsw clear job” command on the telnet, see
p.204 “spoolsw”.
Setting Spool Printing
Spool printing settings can be made using telnet or Web Image Monitor.
• Using Web Image Monitor
In [System] on the [Configuration] menu, click [Enable] in [Spool Printing].
For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.
• Using telnet
Enter “spoolsw spool on”.
For details, see p.204 “spoolsw”.
Checking or deleting spooled jobs using Web Image Monitor
Follow the procedure below to check or delete spooled jobs using Web Image
Monitor.
A Open a Web browser.
B Enter “http: //(printer's address)/” in the address bar to access the printer whose settings you want to change.
Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.
C Click [Login].
The dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.
D Enter the user name and password, and then click [OK].
To use the default account, enter “admin” as user name, and leave the password blank.
E In the menu area, click [Job].
A submenu will appear.
F On the [printer] menu, click [Spool Printing].
120
Other Print Operations
A list of spooled jobs appears.
G To delete a job, select the check box of the job you want to delete, and
then click [Delete].
The selected job is deleted.
H Quit Web Image Monitor.
For details, see Web Image Monitor Help.
Cover
Using this function, you can insert cover fed from a different tray to that of the
main paper, and print on them.
❒ To use this function, Collate must be set. Rotating Collate can not be set.
❒ The cover sheets should be the same size and orientation as the body of the
paper.
❒ If Auto Tray Select is set as the paper feed tray for the body paper, the paper
will be delivered from a tray containing paper from a tray containing paper in
the portrait direction. Therefore, if the cover paper is set to landscape orientation, the orientation cover and body will be different.
For printing methods, see Printer Driver Help.
Memory Capacity and Paper Size
Additional memory apart from standard memory may be required depending on
the paper size and data type.
❒ When printing from bypass tray, two-sided printing will not be supported regardless of the memory capacity, and only one-side will be printed.
One-sided printing (600 x 600 dpi)
❖ 128 MB (standard)
• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.
❖ 256 MB (standard + 128 MB)
• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.
121
Other Print Operations
❖ 384 MB (standard + 256 MB)
• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.
One-sided printing (1200 x 600 dpi)
❖ 128 MB (standard)
• A6 and A5 sized paper printing is guaranteed.
• A4, B5 JIS, Letter and Legal sized paper can be printed.
❖ 256 MB (standard + 128 MB)
• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.
❖ 384 MB (standard + 256 MB)
• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.
One-sided printing (1200 x 1200 dpi)
❖ 128 MB (standard)
• Printing is not possible.
❖ 256 MB (standard + 128 MB)
• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.
❖ 384 MB (standard + 256 MB)
• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.
Two-sided printing (600 x 600 dpi)
❖ 128 MB (standard)
• A6 and A5 sized paper printing is guaranteed.
• A4, B5 JIS, Letter and Legal sized paper can be printed.
❖ 256 MB (standard + 128 MB)
• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.
❖ 384 MB (standard + 256 MB)
• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.
Two-sided printing (1200 x 600 dpi)
❖ 128 MB (standard)
• A6 sized paper printing is guaranteed.
• A6, A4, B5 JIS, Letter and Legal sized paper can be printed.
122
Other Print Operations
❖ 256 MB (standard + 128 MB)
• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.
❖ 384 MB (standard + 256 MB)
• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.
Two-sided printing (1200 x 1200 dpi)
❖ 128 MB (standard)
• Printing is not possible
❖ 256 MB (standard + 128 MB)
• A6, A5, and B5 JIS sized paper printing is guaranteed.
• A4, Letter and Legal sized paper can be printed.
❖ 384 MB (standard + 256 MB)
• A6, A5, B5 JIS, A4, Letter, and Legal sized paper printing is guaranteed.
123
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
Menu Chart
This section explains how to change the default settings of the printer and provides information about the parameters included in each menu.
❖ Sample Print
❒ Appear only when the optional hard disk is installed.
❒ For details, see p.106 “Sample Print”.
❖ Locked Print
❒ Appear only when the optional hard disk is installed.
❒ For Details, see p.110 “Locked Print”.
❖ Paper Input
Menu
Bypass Size
Tray Paper Size
Paper Type
Tray Locking
Tray Priority
❖ List/Test Print
Menu
Config.P/Er.Log
Config. Page
Error Log
Menu List
PCL Config.Page
PS Config. Page
PDF Config.Page
Hex Dump
❖ Maintenance
Menu
Image Density
Registration
G1168612_1.00
Copyright © 2004
124
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
Menu
Curl Prevention
HD Format
WL.LAN Signal
WL.LAN Defaults
Key Repeat
Menu Protect
List Print Lock
Ppr.Size Errors
File Locking
Unlock Files
❖ System
Menu
Prt. Err Report
Auto Continue
Memory Overflow
Copies
Printer Lang.
Sub Paper Size
Page Size
Edge-Edge Print
Def.Print Lang.
Duplex
Blank Pages
Energy Saver
Auto Reset Time
Memory Usage
Unit of Measure
Edge Smoothing
Toner Saving
Spool Printing
Letterhead Mode
Bypass Priority
RAM Disk
Notify by Email
125
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
Menu
Email Date
❒ [Spool Printing] appear when the optional hard disk is installed.
❒ [RAM Disk] will not appear when the optional hard disk is installed.
❖ Host Interface
Menu
I/O Buffer
I/O Timeout
Network Setup
IEEE 1394 Setup
IEEE 802.11b
USB Setting
Bluetooth
❒ [IEEE 1394 Setup] appears when the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is
installed.
❒ [IEEE 802.11b] appears when the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit is installed.
❖ PCL Menu
Menu
Orientation
Form Lines
Font Source
Font Number
Point Size
Font Pitch
Symbol Set
Courier Font
Ext. A4 Width
Append CR to LF
Resolution
126
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
❖ PS Menu
Menu
Data Format
Resolution
❖ PDF Menu
Menu
PDF: Change PW
PDF Group PW
Resolution
❖ Language
Menu
English
German
French
Italian
Dutch
Swedish
Norwegian
Danish
Spanish
Finnish
Portuguese
Czech
Polish
Hungarian
127
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
Paper Input Menu
This section explains about paper settings on the Paper Input menu such as paper sizes and types on each tray.
Changing the paper input menu
Tray locking
Follow the procedure below to lock/unlock trays.
A Press the {Menu} key.
The [Menu] screen appears.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Paper Input], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Tray Locking], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to display the tray to unlock, and then press
the {# Enter} key.
E Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Off], and then press the {# Enter} key.
Wait for two seconds. The [Paper Input] screen appears.
F Press the {On Line} key.
The initial screen appears.
Tray priority
Follow the procedure below to change the tray priority.
128
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
A Press the {Menu} key.
The [Menu] screen appears.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Paper Input], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Tray Priority], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to select a tray you want to use.
E Press the {# Enter} key.
Wait for two seconds. The [Paper Input] screen appears.
F Press the {On Line} key.
The initial screen appears.
Paper Input menu parameters
This section explains about parameters that can be set on the Paper Input menu.
❖ Bypass Size
You can specify the paper size for Bypass tray.
For details about the size of paper loaded in the bypass tray, see “Paper and
Other Media Supported by This Printer”, Maintenance Guide.
❖ Tray Paper Size
Paper size for tray 1, 2, 3
When you select sizes that are not indicated on the paper size dial of tray 1,
tray 2 or tray 3, you should set the dial to “p”, and then select the paper size
here.
For details about the size of paper loaded in each tray, see “Paper and Other
Media Supported by This Printer”, Maintenance Guide.
❒ Only the installed trays appear on the panel display.
129
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
❖ Paper Type
If you use various types of paper, select the paper type for tray 1, tray 2, tray
3 or bypass tray.
For details about types of paper loaded in each tray, see “Paper and Other
Media Supported by This Printer”, Maintenance Guide.
❖ Tray 1, 2, 3
Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Special Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead,
Preprinted
❖ Bypass Tray
Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Special Paper, Color Paper, Letterhead,
Preprinted, Transparency, Thick Paper
❒ Default : Plain Paper
❒ Only the installed trays appear on the panel display.
❖ Tray Locking
If you use various types of paper, you can lock a tray to prevent printing on
different types of paper such as letterhead or colored paper. When [Auto Select] is selected in [Paper Source] from the printer driver, the locked tray is not
used. You can select each tray set to on or off.
❒
❒
❒
❒
Default : Off
Only installed trays appear on the display panel.
You cannot lock multiple trays.
If you need to have a tray locked, you must select the tray using printer driver.
❒ When a locked tray is selected from the printer driver, the printer does not
search for another tray.
❖ Tray Priority
You can set a tray to be checked first when [Auto Tray Select] is selected in [Paper Source] from the printer driver.
• Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Bypass Tray
❒ Default : Tray 1
❒ Only installed trays appear on the display panel.
❒ It is recommended that you load paper of the size and orientation you use
most frequently in the tray selected in [Tray Priority].
130
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
List/Test Print Menu
You can print lists of configurations on printer or the paper printings.
Also, you can check the types and characters of all the printable fonts.
Printing a Configuration Page
Follow the procedure below to print the configuration page.
❒ The configuration page is printed on A4 or Letter (8 1/2 x 11) size paper, size
paper, so load them in the same paper tray.
A Press the {Menu} key.
The [Menu] screen appears.
B Press the {T} or {U} key to display [List/Test Print], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
C Press the {T} or {U} key to display [Config. Page], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
The configuration page is printed. The test print menu screen returns on completion of printing.
D Press the {On Line} key.
The initial screen appears.
Interpreting the configuration page
❖ System Reference
❖ Printer ID
The serial number assigned to the board by its manufacturer is displayed.
131
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
❖ Firmware Version
• Firmware
The version number of the printer controller firmware is displayed.
• Engine
The version number of the printer engine firmware is displayed.
• NCS
The version number of the network interface board is displayed.
❖ Pages Printed
The total number of pages printed by the printer to date is displayed.
❖ Total Memory
The total amount of SDRAM installed on the printer is displayed.
❖ Controller Option
The items are displayed when the controller options are installed.
❖ Printer Language
The version number of the printer language is displayed.
❖ Options
The options installed are displayed.
❖ Consumption Status
The amount of toner remaining is displayed.
❖ Paper Input
Settings made on the [Paper Input] menu are displayed.
For details, see p.128 “Paper Input Menu”.
❖ Maintenance
Settings made on the [Maintenance] menu are displayed.
For details, see p.135 “Maintenance Menu”.
❖ System
Settings made on the [System] menu are displayed.
For more information, see p.141 “System Menu”.
❖ Host Interface
Settings made on the [Host Interface] menu are displayed.
When DHCP is active on the network, the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address appear in parentheses on the configuration page.
132
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
For details, see p.149 “Host Interface Menu”.
❖ PCL Menu
Settings made on the [PCL Menu] are displayed.
For details, see p.156 “PCL Menu”.
❖ PS Menu
Settings made on the [PS Menu] are displayed.
For details, see p.159 “PS Menu”.
❖ PDF Menu
Settings made on the [PDF Menu] are displayed.
For details, see p.161 “PDF Menu”.
❖ Interface Information
Interface information is displayed.
List/Test menu parameters
This section explains about parameters that can be set on the List/Test menu.
❖ Config.P/Er.Log
You can print the configuration page and error log.
❖ Config. Page
You can print the current configuration of the printer.
❖ Error Log
You can print an error report.
❖ Menu List
You can print a menu list showing all available menus.
❖ PCL Config.Page
You can print the current PCL configuration.
❖ PS Config. Page
You can print an installed PS font and the Disk Directory List which shows the
optional hard disk.
133
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
❖ PDF Config.Page
You can print an installed PS3 font and the Disk Directory List which shows
the optional hard disk.
❖ Hex Dump
You can print the data sent by the computer using Hex Dump.
134
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
Maintenance Menu
You can set printing conditions such as density and calibration, and printer management such as formatting the optional hard disk unit.
Changing the maintenance menu
This section explains changing the maintenance menu using examples.
HD Format
Follow the procedure below to format the optional hard disk unit after initial setup.
A Press the {Menu} key.
The [Menu] screen appears.
B Press the {T} or {U} key to display [Maintenance], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
C Press the {T} or {U} key to display [HD Format], and then press the {# Enter} key.
D Read the HD format confirmation message, and then press the {# Enter}
key to start formatting.
The optional hard disk unit is formatted, and the rebooting message appears.
E Turn off the printer's power. After a few seconds, turn the power on
again.
The optional hard disk unit is now formatted and ready to use.s
135
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
❒ If the [HD Format] button is not displayed, the optional hard disk unit is not
properly installed. Reinstall the optional hard disk unit. For details about the
optional hard disk unit, see Setup Guide. If you cannot install it properly
even after attempting reinstallation, contact your sales or service representative.
Displaying the signal strength
Follow the procedure below to check the IEEE 802.11b (wireless LAN) signal on
the [Maintenance] menu.
A Press the {Menu} key.
The [Menu] screen appears.
B Press the {T} or {U} key to display [Maintenance], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
C Press the {T} or {U} key to display [WL.LAN Signal], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
Check the display for result.
D Press the {Escape} key.
The initial screen appears.
❒ If [WL.LAN Signal] is not displayed, [IIEEE 802.11b] has not been selected for
[LAN Type] in [Network Setup] on the [Host Interface] menu. Select [IEEE
802.11b] for [LAN Type], and then check that [WL.LAN Signal] is displayed on
the [Maintenance] menu again.
❒ Signal status can be measured in [Infrastructure] under [Comm. Mode] of the
wireless LAN. If [Ad hoc] or [802.11 Ad hoc] is selected in [Comm. Mode], signal status cannot be measured. To measure signal status, select [Comm.
Mode] in [Infrastructure] under [IEEE 802.11b] on the [Host Interface] menu.
❒ Every time you press the {# Enter} key, the signal is updated.
136
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
❒ The signal is rated [Good] if signal strength is 86%-100%, [Fair] if 61%-85%,
[Poor] if 31%-60%, and [Unavailable] if 0%-30%. If the signal is unstable or
unavailable, remove any obstructions or move the printer to a place to receive the signal.
❒ Using wireless devices or microwave sources nearby will affect the signal
transmission.
Resetting the IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Settings
Follow the procedure below to reset the wireless LAN setting on the [Maintenance]
menu.
❒ [Comm. Mode], [Channel], [Trans. Speed], [WEP Setting], and [SSID] can be selected on the [Host Interface] menu.
A Press the {Menu} key.
The [Menu] screen appears.
B Press the {T} or {U} key to display [Maintenance], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
C Press the {T} or {U} key to display [WL.LAN Defaults], and then press the
{# Enter} key.
D Press the {# Enter} key.
The wireless LAN setting is reset.
After about three seconds, the initial screen appears.
Maintenance menu parameters
This section explains about parameters that can be set on the Maintenance
menu.
❖ Image Density
You can select the print image density.
137
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
• -3 to 3
For details, see “Adjusting the Image Density”, Maintenance Guide.
❖ Registration
You can adjust the starting position of the printing page.
❖ Prt. Test Sheet
You can print the registration sets sheet.
• Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Bypass Tray, Duplex.BackSide
❒ Only the installed trays appear on the panel display.
❖ Adjustment
You can select the start position for printing on a page.
• Horiz: Tray 1, Horiz: Tray 2, Horiz: Tray 3, Horiz: Bypass,
Horiz:Dup.Back, Vert.:All Trays, Vert.:Dup.Back
• -4.0 to +4.0
❒ Only the installed trays appear on the panel display.
❖ Curl Prevention
You can control the fuser temperature to prevent paper from curling.
• On
• Off
❒ Default: Off
❒ Use this mode only when paper misfeed occurs frequently during duplex
printing.
❖ HD Format
You can format the hard disk when the optional hard disk is installed.
For details about formatting the hard disk, see “Attaching the Hard Disk
Drive Type 2600”, Setup Guide.
❖ WL.LAN Signal
You can check the signal strength when using wireless LAN.
For details about displaying the signal strength, see p.136 “Displaying the
signal strength”.
138
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
❖ WL.LAN Defaults
Reset the wireless LAN to default. The menu appears when the 802.11b interface unit is installed.
❖ Key Repeat
Holding down [On] allows users to scroll through items and settings. Pressing
[Off] moves through items and settings one at a time.
❒ Default: On
❖ Menu Protect
This procedure protects menu settings from accidental changes. A key operation is required to change menu settings. In a network environment, only network administrators can change menu settings.
• Level 1
• Level 2
• Off
❒ Default: Off
❒ While the printer is online, press the {# Enter} key, press the {Escape} key,
and then press the {Menu} key. You can access [Menu Protect] on the display panel.
❒ You can preserve settings for the [Maintenance], [System], [Host Interface],
and [Language] menus on Level 1.
❒ You can preserve settings for the [Paper Input], [Maintenance], [System], [Host
Interface], and [Language] menus on Level 2.
❖ List Print Lock
Disable users to print the lists or reports in List/Test Print menu or other test
prints.
• On
• Off
❒ Default: Off
❒ While the printer is online, press the {# Enter} key, then press the {Escape} key, and then press the {Menu} key. You can access [List Print
Lock] from the display panel.
❖ Ppr.Size Errors
You can select whether to have an error report printed when the paper size
setting for the tray differs from the actual size of the paper in the tray. You can
also select whether to have an error message displayed when feeding paper
from the tray.
139
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
• Detect
• Do not detect
❒ Default: Detect
❒ When it is “Detect”, it prints with the paper size that was set when the error
message appeared.
❒ While the printer is online, press the {# Enter} key, then press the {Escape}
key, and then press the {Menu} key. You can access [List Print Lock] from
the display panel.
❖ File Locking
If the user tries to access a file and enters the wrong password 10 times, the
file is automatically locked.s
• On
• Off
❒ Default: Off.
❒ While the printer is online, press the {# Enter} key, then press the {Escape} key, and then press the {Menu} key. You can access [File Locking]
from the display panel.
❖ Unlock Files
You can unlock a file that was locked because a user entered the wrong password 10 times.
❒ While the printer is online, press the {# Enter} key, then press the {Escape}
key, and then press the {Menu} key. You can access [Unlock Files] from the
display panel.
140
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
System Menu
You can set basic functions required to use the printer. The printer can be used
on factory default, but the configuration can be changed depending on the condition of the user. The changed condition holds even if the printer is turned off.
Changing the system menu
Follow the procedure below to change the settings for E. Saver Timer.
A Press the {Menu} key.
The [Menu] screen appears.
B Press {U} or {T} key to display [System], and then press the {# Enter} key.
C Press {U} or {T} key to display [Energy Saver], and then press the {# Enter}
key.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to display [E. Saver Timer], and then enter {# Enter} Key
E Press {U} or {T} key to select the lead time needed to switch to the Energy Saver mode.
F Press the {# Enter} key.
Wait for two seconds. The [Energy Saver] screen appears.
G Press the {On Line} key.
The initial screen appears.
System menu parameters
This section explains about parameters that can be set on the System menu.
141
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
❖ Prt. Err Report
You can select [On] or [Off] to have an error report printed when a printer error
or memory error occurs.
• Off
• On
❒ Default: Off
❖ Auto Continue
You can make the Auto Continue setting. When set to on, printing continues
after a system error occurs.
• Off
• Immediate
• 1 minute
• 5 minutes
• 10 minutes
• 15 minutes
❒ Default: Off
❒ When set to on and certain errors occur, the current job may be canceled,
and the printer automatically perform the next queued job.
❖ Memory Overflow
You can specify whether or not to print a memory overflow error report.
• Do not print
• Error Info.
❒ Default: Do not print
❖ Copies
You can specify the number of pages to print.
This setting is disabled if the number of pages to print is specified by command or the printer driver.
• 1-999
❖ Printer Lang.
You can specify the printer language.
• Auto Detect
• PCL
• PS
• PDF
142
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
❒ Default: Auto Detect
❖ Sub Paper Size
You can select [Off] or [Auto] to enable the Sub Paper Size function. When
you select [Auto], the printer uses an alternative paper size if the currently
specified paper is not loaded. When you select [Off], the printer uses any size
paper in the current specified paper tray.
• Off
• Auto
❒ Default: Off
❖ Page Size
You can specify the default paper size.
11 × 17, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 7 1/4 × 10 1/2, 8 × 13, 8 1/2 × 13, 8
1
/4 × 13, A3 (297 × 420), B4 JIS(257 × 364), A4 (210 × 297), B5 JIS(182 ×
257), A5 (148 × 210), A6 (105 × 148), 8K (267 × 390), 16K (195 × 267), 4 1/8
× 9 1/2, 3 7/8 × 7 1/2, C5 Env(162 × 229), C6 Env(114 × 162), DL Env(110 ×
220), Custom Size.
❒ Default:
• Metric version: A4
• Inch version: 8 1/2 × 11
❒ The initial paper size is applied when the paper size is not specified in the
print data.
❒ JIS stands for “Japanese Industrial Standard”.
❖ Edge-Edge Print
You can print on the complete area of an A4 sheet leaving no border on any
egde.
• Off
• On
❒ Default: Off
❖ Def.Print Lang.
You can specify the initial printer language if the machine cannot detect the
printer language.
• PCL
• PS
• PDF
143
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
❒ Default: PCL
❖ Duplex
You can specify whether or not to print on both sides of a sheet.
• Off
• Short Edge Bind
• Long Edge Bind
❒ Default: Off
❒ This menu appears only when the optional duplex unit is installed.
❖ Blank Pages
You can specify whether or not to print blank pages.
• Do not print
• Print
❒ Default: Print
❖ Energy Saver
You can specify how many minutes for the energy saver mode.
❖ E.Saver On/Off
You can specify whether or not to switch E. Saver.
• On
• Off
❒ Default: On
❒ When the printer switches to the Energy Saver mode, the Power indicator goes off, while the online indicator stays lit.
❖ E. Saver Timer
You can select the lead time needed to switch to the Energy Saver mode.
The Energy Saver mode reduces electric power consumption.
• 1 minute
• 5 minutes
• 15 minutes
• 30 minutes
• 45 minutes
• 60 minutes
144
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
❒ Default: 30 minutes
❒ When the printer switches to the Energy Saver mode, the Power indicator goes off, while the On Line indicator stays lit and [Energy Save Mode]
appears.
❖ Auto Reset Time
You can set On or Off and the time for the Auto Reset Timer.
❒ Appear only at network standard model.
❖ Auto Reset
• On
• Off
❒ Default: On
❖ Set Time
• 10 to 999sec by 1sec.
❒ Default: 60 sec
❖ Memory Usage
You can select memory to be used from “Font Priority” or “Frame Priority” according to the paper size, resolution or printer language.
• Font Priority
This setting uses memory for registering fonts.
• Frame Priority
This seting uses memory for high speed printing.
❒ Default: Frame Priority
❖ Unit of Measure
You can specify the unit of measurement in “mm” or “inch” for the custom paper size.
• mm
• inch
❒ Default value is destination dependant.
145
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
❖ Edge Smoothing
You can set whether edge smoothing is enabled. When it is on, jagged lines
appear more smoothly. Set it to off when the print image contains fine gradation in tone.
• On
• Off
❒ Default: On
❒ If “Toner Saving” is “On”, “Edge Smoothing” is ignored even if it is “On”.
❖ Toner Saving
You can select whether or not Toner Saving is enabled
• Off
• On
❒ Default: Off
❒ If “Toner Saving” is “On”, “Edge Smoothing” is ignored even if it is “On”.
❖ Spool Printing
You can select whether all of the print data is spooled to the hard disk drive
before printing.
• Off
• On
❒ Default: Off
❒ Spooling stores a sent print job temporarily in the printer, and then prints it.
❒ This menu appears only when the optional hard disk is installed.
❖ Letterhead Mode
You can select the letterhead printing mode.
• Off
• Auto Detect
• On (Always)
❒ Default: Off
❖ Bypass Priority
When the different paper size or type is specified from the driver, you can
specify which setting is given priority to, machine setting or command.
• Machine
• Driver/Command
146
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
❒ Default: Driver/Command
❒ Appear only at network standard model.
❖ RAM Disk
If the optional hard disk is not installed for PDF Direct Print, select a value of
2 MB or higher.
This menu appears only when the optional hard disk is not installed.
• 0 MB
• 2 MB
• 4 MB
• 8 MB
• 16 MB
❒ Default: 4 MB
❒ When the amount of SDRAM is small and RAM Disk is set to 16 MB, printing may not be possible depending on the print job and duplex printing may
be canceled. If this happens, increase the amount of SDRAM, or set RAM
Disk to 8 MB or less.
For details about the optional SDRAM module, see Setup Guide.
❖ Notify by Email
You can specify whether or not to send an error message to a preset e-mail
address when an error occurs in the printer.
• Off
• On
❒ After changing the setting, turn off the power of the printer briefly, and then
turn it on again.
❒ Default: On
For information, see Web Image Monitor Help.
❖ Email Date
When a mail date/time cannot be notified, the user can set whether a dummy
date/time is set or not.
• Off
147
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
• On
❒ default: Off
❒ While the printer is online, press the {# Enter} key, then press the {Escape} key, and then press the {Menu} key. You can access [Email Date]
from the display panel.
148
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
Host Interface Menu
You can set configurations about network connections and communication when
using parallel connection between the printer and the computer. The changed
configuration holds even if the printer is turned off.
Changing the Host Interface menu
Follow the procedure below to change the I/O Timeout
A Press the {Menu} key.
The [Menu] screen appears.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Host Interface], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display [I/O Timeout], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to select the lead time needed to end a printing
operation, and then press the {# Enter} key.
Wait for two seconds. The [Host Interface] menu appears.
E Press the {On Line} key.
The initial screen appears.
Host Interface menu parameters
This section explains parameters that can be set on the Host Interface menu.
❖ I/O Buffer
You can select the size of I/O Buffer. Normally it is not necessary to change
this setting.
• 128 KB
149
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
• 256 KB
• 512 KB
❒ Default: 128 KB
❖ I/O Timeout
You can set how many seconds the printer should wait before ending a print
job. If printing operation is frequently interrupted by data from other ports, you
can increase the timeout period.
• 10 seconds
• 15 seconds
• 20 seconds
• 25 seconds
• 60 seconds
❒ Default: 15 seconds
❖ Network Setup
You can make network-related settings.
For details, see “Configuration”, Setup Guide.
❖ DHCP
You can select [On] or [Off] to use DHCP with TCP/IP.
• On
• Off
❒ Default: On
❖ IP Address
You can specify the IP address.
❒ When DHCP is set to on, the IP address cannot be changed. To change
it, set DHCP to off. Contact your network administrator for information
about the network configuration.
❒ Default: 011.022.033.044
❖ Subnet Mask
You can specify the subnet mask.
150
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
❒ When DHCP is set to on, the subnet mask cannot be changed. To
change it, set DHCP to off. Contact your network administrator for information about the network configuration.
❒ Default: 000.000.000.000
❖ Gateway Address
You can specify the gateway address.
❒ When DHCP is set to on, the gateway address cannot be changed. To
change it, set DHCP to off. Contact your network administrator for information about the network configuration.
❒ Default: 000.000.000.000
❖ Frame Type (NW)
You can select the frame type for NetWare.
• Auto Select
• Ethernet ll
• Ethernet 802.2
• Ethernet 802.3
• Ethernet SNAP
❒ Default: Auto Select
❖ Active Protocol
You can select the active protocol.
• TCP/IP
• NetWare
• SMB
• AppleTalk
❒ Default: All Active
❖ Ethernet Speed
You can select the network speed to operate the printer.
• Auto Select
• 10Mbps Half D.
• 10Mbps Full D.
151
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
• 100Mbps Half D.
• 100Mbps Full D.
❒ Default: Auto Select
❖ LAN Type
You can select Ethernet or IEEE 802.11b for LAN Type.
This menu appears only when the optional 802.11 interface unit is installed.
• Ethernet
• IEEE 802.11b
❒ Default: Ethernet
❖ IEEE 1394 Setup
You can make settings for IEEE 1394. This menu appears only when the optional IEEE 1394 board is installed.
For details about IEEE 1394 Setup, see Setup Guide.
❖ DHCP
You can select [On] or [Off] to use TCP/IP with DHCP.
• On
• Off
❒ Default: On
❖ IP Address1394
You can specify the IP address for IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394).
❒ Default: 0.0.0.0
❒ When using both Ethernet and IP over 1394 simultaneously, do not
specify the IP address used for Ethernet.
❖ Subnet Mask1394
You can specify the subnet mask for IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394).
❒ Default: 0.0.0.0
❒ When using both Ethernet and IP over 1394 simultaneously, do not
specify the subnet mask used for Ethernet.
152
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
❖ IP over 1394
You can specify whether or not to activate IP over 1394.
• Active
• Not Active
❒ Default: Active
❖ SCSI print
You can specify whether or not to activate SCSI print.
• Active
• Not Active
❒ Default: Active
❖ Bidi-SCSI print
You can specify whether or not to activate bidirectional communication for
SCSI print.
• Active
• Not Active
❒ Default: Active
❖ IEEE 802.11b
You can make settings for wireless LAN. This menu appears only when the
optional 802.11b interface unit is installed.
❖ Comm. Mode
You can select the transmission mode for IEEE 802.11b.
• 802.11 Ad hoc
• Infrastructure
• Ad hoc
❒ Default: 802.11 Ad hoc
❒ Comm. Mode can also be set using a Web Image Monitor. For details,
see Web Image Monitor Help.
❖ Channel
You can select channels: 1-11 (inch version)/1-13 (metric version).
❒ Default: 11(inch version)/13 (metric version)
153
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
❖ Trans. Speed
You can select the transmission speed for IEEE 802.11b.
• Auto
• 11 Mbps
• 5.5 Mbps
• 2 Mbps
• 1 Mbps
❒ Default: Auto
❖ SSID
You can set an SSID in the infrastructure mode and the 802.11 Ad hoc
mode.
Select [View] to check the SSID. Select [Enter ID] to set SSID.
• View
• Enter ID
❒ Select [?] to enter [/] for the SSID. Also, [¥] appears when printing the
configuration page, read it as [/].
❒ Default: blank (ASSID)
❒ Characters used are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32 bytes).
❒ An SSID is set automatically to the nearest access point if no SSID has
been set.
❒ If no SSID has been set for the 802.11 ad hoc mode, an SSID is set automatically and the same SSID is used for the 802.11 ad hoc mode and
the infrastructure mode.
❒ If blank is specified in SSID for 802.11b adhoc mode or adhoc mode,
“ASSID” appears.
❒ An SSID can also be set using Web Image Monitor. For details, see
Web Image Monitor Help.
❖ WEP Setting
You can specify whether or not to activate WEP settings.
• Active
• Not Active
❒ Default: Not Active
❒ The WEP key can be entered using a hexadecimal number or an ASCII
character sequence.
154
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
❒ When using 64 bit WEP, up to 10 hexadecimal or 5 ASCII characters
can be entered. When using 128 bit WEP, up to 26 hexadecimal or 13
ASCII characters can be entered.
❒ The WEP key can also be set using Web Image Monitor. For details, see
Web Image Monitor Help.
❖ USB Setting
You can select the transmission speed for USB.
• Full Speed
• Auto
❒ Default: Auto
❒ While the printer is online, press the {# Enter} key, then press the {Escape}
key, and then press the {Menu} key. You can access [USB Setting] from the
display panel.
❖ Bluetooth
This is a standard wireless LAN technology utilizing 2.4Ghz bandwidth. The
device can be recognized by computers that have Bluetooth Technology installed when switched to [Public].
• Public
• Private
❒ Default: Public
❒ While the printer is online, press the {# Enter} key, then press the {Escape} key, and then press the {Menu} key. You can access [Bluetooth]
from the display panel.
155
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
PCL Menu
You can set conditions when using PCL for printing.
Changing the PCL menu
Follow the procedure below to change the setting for Orientation.
A Press the {Menu} key.
The [Menu] screen appears.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display [PCL Menu], and then press the {# Enter} key.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Orientation] screen, and then press
the {# Enter} key.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to select the orientation, and then press the {#
Enter} key.
Wait for two seconds. The [PCL Menu] screen appears.
E Press the {On Line} key.
The initial screen appears.
PCL Menu parameters
This section explains about parameters that can be set on the PCL menu.
❖ Orientation
You can select the page orientation.
• Portrait
• Landscape
156
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
❒ Default: Portrait
❖ Form Lines
You can specify the number of lines per page between 5 and 128.
❒ Default:
• Metric version: 64
• Inch version: 60
❖ Font Source
You can set the location of the default font.
• Resident
• RAM
• HDD
• SD
❒ Default: Resident
❒ When you select [RAM], you can select only fonts downloaded to the printer
RAM.
❒ When you select [HDD], you can select only fonts downloaded to the optional hard disk.
❖ Font Number
You can specify the ID of the default font you want to use.
• 0 to 50 (Internal)
• 1 to 50 (Download)
❖ Point Size
You can specify the point size you want to use for the default font between 4
and 999.75 in 0.25 increments.
❒ Default: 12.00 points
❒ This setting is effective only for a variable-space font.
❖ Font Pitch
You can specify the number of characters per inch you want to use for the default font between 0.44 and 99.99 in 0.01 increments.
❒ Default: 10.00 pitch
❒ This setting is effective only for fixed-space fonts.
157
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
❖ Symbol Set
You can specify the character set for the default font. Available sets are as
follows:
Roman-8, ISO L1, ISO L2, ISO L5, PC-8, PC-8 D/N, PC-850, PC-852, PC8TK, Win L1, Win L2, Win L5, Desktop, PS Text, VN Intl, VN US, MS Publ,
Math-8, PS Math, VN Math, Pifont, Legal, ISO 4, ISO 6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO
17, ISO 21, ISO 60, ISO 69, Win 3.0
❒ Default: PC-8
❖ Courier Font
You can select a courier-type font.
• Regular
• Dark
❒ Default: Regular
❖ Ext. A4 Width
You can extend the width of the printable area of A4 sheets reducing side
margin width.
• Off
• On
❒ Default: Off
❖ Append CR to LF
You can specify whether or not to append a CR code to each LF code to print
text data clearly.
• Off
• On
❒ Default: Off
❖ Resolution
You can specify the print resolution in dots per inch.
• 300 dpi
• 600 dpi
❒ Default: 600 dpi
158
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
PS Menu
You can set conditions when using Postscript for printing.
Changing the PS menu
Follow the procedure below to change the setting for date format.
A Press the {Menu} key.
The [Menu] screen appears.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display [PS Menu], and then press the {# Enter}
key.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Data Format], and then press the {#
Enter} key.
D Press the {U} or {T} key to select [TBCP], and then press the {# Enter}
key.
Wait for two seconds. The [PS Menu] screen appears.
E Press the {On Line} key.
The initial screen appears.
PS Menu parameters
This section explains about parameters that can be set on the Postscript menu.
❖ Data Format
You can select the data format.
• Binary Data
• TBCP
This setting is effective when using a parallel, USB, or EtherTalk connection.
159
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
When you use a parallel or USB connection, the print job is canceled if binary
data is sent from the printer driver.
When you use an Ethernet connection, the print job is canceled if:
• The printer driver data format is TBCP and the data format selected using
the control panel is Binary Data.
• The printer driver data format is binary and the data format selected using
the control panel is TBCP.
❒ Default: Binary Data
❖ Resolution
You can select the resolution.
• 300 dpi
• 600 dpi
• 1200 dpi
❒ Default: 600 dpi
160
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
PDF Menu
You can set conditions when using PDF printing.
Changing the PDF menu
Follow the procedure below to change the resolution setting.
A Press {Menu} key.
The [Menu] screen appears.
B Press {U} or {T} key to display [PDF Menu], and then press the {# Enter}
key.
C Press {U} or {T} key to display [Resolution], and then press the {# Enter}
key.
D Press {U} or {T} key to select the resolution, and then press the {# Enter} key.
Wait for two seconds. The [PDF Menu] screen appears.
E Press the {On Line} key.
The initial screen appears.
PDF Menu parameters
This section explains about parameters that can be set on the PDF menu.
❖ PDF: Change PW
You can specify the password for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.
• Current PW
161
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
❒ The password can be set using Web Image Monitor, but must be sent
through the network. For increased security, use this menu on the control
panel to set the password directly.
❒ Default: no password set
❖ PDF Group PW
You can set a group password specified using DeskTopBinder Lite.
❒ When you use a group password, the optional data protection unit must be
installed.
• Current PW
❒ The password can be set using Web Image Monitor, but must be sent
through the network. For increased security, use this menu on the control
panel to set the password directly.
❒ Default: no password set
❖ Resolution
You can select the resolution for the PDF file executing PDF Direct Print.
• 300 dpi
• 600 dpi
• 1200 dpi
❒ Default: 600 dpi
162
Making Printer Settings Using the Control Panel
Language Menu
You can set language displayed on the menu.
Changing the language menu
Follow the procedure below to change the language.
A Press the {Menu} key.
The [Menu] screen appears.
B Press the {U} or {T} key to display [Language], and then press the {# Enter} key.
C Press the {U} or {T} key to select the language, and then press the {#
Enter} key.
Wait for two seconds. The [Menu] screen appears.
D Press the {On Line} key.
The initial screen appears.
Language menu parameters
You can select the language you use. Available languages are as follows:
English, German, French, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish, Spanish,
Finnish, Portuguese, Czech, Polish, and Hungarian.
❒ Default: English
163
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Using Web Image Monitor
Using Web Image Monitor, you can check the printer status and change settings.
❖ Available operations
The following operations can be remotely performed using Web Image Monitor from a client computer.
• Displaying printer status or settings
• Checking the print job status or history
• Interrupting currently printing jobs
• Resetting the printer
• Managing the Address Book
• Making printer settings
• Making e-mail notification settings
• Making network protocol settings
• Making security settings
❖ Configuring the printer
To perform the operations from Web Image Monitor, TCP/IP is required. After
the printer is configured to use TCP/IP, operations from Web Image Monitor
become available.
❖ Recommended Web browser
• Windows:
Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher
Netscape Navigator 7.0 or higher
• Mac OS 8.1 or higher:
Netscape Navigator 7.0 or higher
Safari 1.0 or higher
❒ To use Netscape Navigator with Secured Sockets Layer (SSL: an encryption
protocol), use Netscape Navigator 7.0 or higher.
❒ If the previous versions of the Web browser above are used or JavaScript and
cookies are not enabled with the Web browser used, display and operation
problems may occur.
❒ If you are using a proxy server, change the Web browser settings. Contact
your network administrator for information about the settings.
❒ The previous page may not appear even after the back button of a Web
browser is clicked. If this happens, click the refresh button of a Web browser.
❒ Updating the printer information is not automatically performed. Click [Refresh]
in the display area to update the printer information.
G1168612_1.00
Copyright © 2004
164
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Displaying Top Page
This section explains the Top Page and how to display Web Image Monitor.
A Start your Web browser.
B Enter “http: //(printer's address)/” in the address bar of a Web browser.
Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.
❒ If the printer's host name has been registered on the DNS or WINS server,
you can enter it. For details, see p.282 “Using DHCP”.
❒ When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment which server authentification is issued , enter “https://(printer's address)/“.
Every Web Image Monitor page is divided into the following areas:
1. Header area
The link to help and dialog box for keyword search appears.
2. Menu area
The dialog box for switching to the user mode and administrator mode appears, and
each mode's menu will be displayed.
If you select menu, it's content will be shown on the work area, or the sub area.
3. Display area
Displays the contents of the item selected in the menu area.
Printer information in the display area is not automatically updated. Click [Refresh] at
the upper right in the display area to update the printer information. Click the Web
browser's [Refresh] button to refresh the entire browser screen.
Printer status, network interface board names, and comments are displayed.
4. Help
Use Help to view or download Help file contents.
165
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
About Menu and Mode
There are two modes available with Web Image Monitor: user mode and administrator mode.
Displayed Items may differ depending on the printers.
❖ About User Mode
In the user mode, printer status, settings, and print job status can be viewed,
but the printer settings cannot be changed.
1. Status
Printer status, including the amount of remaining paper in paper trays and the amount
of remaining toner, is displayed.
2. Job
Allows you to display list of Spooled print Job, Job History, Error Log, Locked Print
and Sample Print jobs. This also perform or delete Locked Print and Sample Print
jobs.
3. Configuration
Display current printer and network settings, and download help files.
❖ Administrator Mode
In the administrator mode, you can configure various printer settings.
1. Status
Printer status, including the amount of remaining paper in paper trays and the amount
of remaining toner, is displayed.
166
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
2. Job
Allows you to display list of Spooled Print Job, Job History, Error Log, Sample Print
and Locked Print. This also allows you to delete Spooled Print Job, Locked Print and
Sample Print Jobs.
3. Address Book
User information can be registered, displayed, changed, and deleted.
4. Configuration
Make system settings for the printer, interface settings, and security.
5. Reset Printer Job
Click to reset current print jobs and print jobs in queue. This button is located on Top
Page.
6. Reset Device
Click to reset the printer. If a print job is being processed, the printer will be reset after
the print job is completed. This button is located on Top Page.
Access in the Administrator Mode
Follow the procedure below to access Web Image Monitor in the administrator
mode.
A On Top Page, click [Login].
The dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.
B Enter your user name and password, and then click [OK].
To use the default account, enter “admin” as user name, and leave the password blank.
Displaying Web Image Monitor Help
When using Help for the first time, clicking either [Help] in the header area or the
icon marked “?” in the display area makes the following screen appear, in which
you can view Help in two different ways, as shown below:
❖ Viewing Help on our Web site
Downloading Help to your computer
❖ Downloading and Checking Help
You can download Help to your computer. As the Help URL, you can specify
the path to the local file to view the Help without connecting to the Internet.
❒ By clicking [Help] in the header area, the contents of Help appear.
❒ By clicking “?”, the Help icon in the display area, Help for the setting items in
the display area appears.
167
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Downloading Help
A In the [OS] list, select the operating system.
B In the [Language] list, select the language.
C Click [Download].
D Download Help by following the instructions on the screen.
E Store the downloaded compressed file in a location, and then decompress the file.
To view the downloaded Web Image Monitor Help, set the path to the location
of the decompressed file.
Linking the URL of the Help File to the [Help] Button.
You can link the URL of the help file on a computer or Web server to the [Help]
button.
A Log on to Web Image Monitor in the administrator mode.
B In the menu area, click [Configuration].
C Click [Webpage].
D In the [Help URL] box, enter the URL of the help file.
If you saved the help file to “C:HELPEN”, enter “file://C:/HELP/”. For example,
if you saved the file to a Web server, and the URL of the index file is “http://
a.b.c.d/HELP/EN/index.html”, enter “http://a.b.c.d/HELP/”.
E Click [Apply].
168
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, you can monitor the network printers. Also, you can change the configuration of the network interface board using
TCP/IP or IPX/SPX.
❖ Protocol stack provided with Operating System
• Windows 95/98/Me
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
NetWare
NetWare Client32 for Windows 95
IntraNetWare Client for Windows 95
Novell Client for Windows 95/98/Me
• Windows 2000
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
NetWare
Novell Client for Windows NT/2000/XP
• Windows Server 2003
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
• Windows XP
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
Novell Client for Windows NT/2000/XP
• Windows NT 4.0
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
Client Service for NetWare
NetWare Client32 for Windows NT
IntraNetWare Client for Windows NT
Novell Client for Windows NT/2000/XP
❖ Available operations
The following functions are available:
• Printer Information function
• Display the network settings and detailed information of the printer.
• Display the number of pages printed under each user code.
• Display the status of print jobs sent form computers.
• Change the printer network settings.
• Device Settings function
169
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
• Lock some of the setting items on the control panel so that they cannot
be changed using the control panel.
• Select type of paper loaded in the paper trays.
• Energy Saver function
• Enable or disable the Energy Saver mode.
• System Status function
• Display the information such as when paper is depleted during printing
on a computer .
• Groups function
• Monitor multiple printers at the same time. When there are multiple printers to manage, you can create groups and classify the printers to facilitate management.
• You can customize printer status according to groups, and send status
notification e-mail to a computer.
Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
Follow the procedure below to install SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
❒ Auto Run may not work under certain operating system settings. In this
case, launch “Setup.exe” located on the CD-ROM root directory.
C Select an interface language, and then click [OK].
The default interface language is English.
D Click [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client/Admin] installation, and then click [Next].
E The software license agreement appears in the [License Agreement] dialog
box.
After reading through its contents, click [I accept the agreement] if you agree,
and then click [Next >].
F Follow the instructions on the screen.
A message appears when the installation is complete.
G Click [OK].
170
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
❒ If you are required to restart the computer after installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, restart the computer and continue the configuration.
❒ SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin supports the following languages: Czech,
Danish, German, English, Spanish, French, Italian, Hungarian, Dutch, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Finnish, Swedish, Chinese Simple and Chinese Traditional.
Changing the Network Interface Board Configuration
Follow the procedure below to change the network interface board configuration
using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B On the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device],
and then click [TCP/IP],
[IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP(SNMPv3)]. A list of printers using the selected protocol
appears.
❒ Select the protocol of the printer whose configuration you want to change.
C In the list, select a printer whose configuration you want to change.
D On the [Tools] menu, click [NIB Setup Tool].
A Web browser opens and the dialog box for entering the user name and
password for the Web Image Monitor administrator appears.
To use the default account, enter “admin” as the user name, and leave the
password blank.
NIB Setup Tool starts when the network interface board is default. Follow the
instruction on the screen.
E Enter required setting items.
Configure settings using Web Image Monitor. For details, see p.164 “Using
Web Image Monitor”.
F Quit Web Image Monitor.
G Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Locking the Menus on the Printer's Control Panel
Follow the procedure below to lock the menus on the printer's control panel.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
171
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
B On
the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then click [TCP/IP],
[IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP(SNMPv3)].
A list of printers using the selected protocol appears.
❒ Select the protocol of the printer whose configuration you want to change.
C Select a printer.
D On the [Tools] menu, point to [Device Settings], and then click [Lock Operation
Panel Menu].
A Web browser opens and the dialog box for entering the password for the
Web Image Monitor administrator appears.
E Enter the user name and password, and then click [OK].
To use the default account, enter “admin” as the user name, and leave the
password blank.
The [System] page of Web Image Monitor appears.
F Select [Level 1] or [Level 2] in the [Protect Printer Operation Panel] list.
G Click [Apply].
H Quit Web Image Monitor.
For details about setting items, see Help in the [General Settings] on [Configuration] page.
Changing the Paper Type
Follow the procedure below to change the paper type.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B On the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device],
and then click [TCP/IP],
[IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP(SNMPv3)].
A list of printers using the selected protocol appears.
❒ Select the protocol of the printer whose configuration you want to change.
C In the list, select a printer whose configuration you want to change.
D On the [Tools] menu, point to [Device Settings], and then click [Select Paper
Type].
A Web browser opens and the dialog box for entering the password for the
Web Image Monitor administrator appears.
172
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
E Enter the user name and password, and then click [OK].
To use the default account, enter “admin” as the user name, and leave the
password blank.
The [Paper] page appears.
F Select a paper type in the [Paper Type] list for each tray.
G Click [Apply].
H Quit Web Image Monitor.
For details about setting items, see Help in the [General Settings] on [Configuration] page.
Managing User Information
Follow the procedure below to manage the user's information using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Prints jobs can be managed and functions restricted by user codes.
Starting User Management Tool
Follow the procedure below to start User Management Tool.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B On the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device],
and then click [TCP/IP],
[IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP(SNMPv3)].
A list of printers using the selected protocol appears.
❒ Select the protocol of the printer whose configuration you want to change.
C In the list, select a printer you want to manage.
D On the [Tools] menu, click [User Management Tool].
The dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.
E Enter the user name and password, and then click [OK].
The default user name is “admin”, and default password is left blank.
User Management Tool starts.
For details about User Management Tool, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
173
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Displaying the Number of Sheets Printed
Follow the procedure below to display the number of sheets printed under each
user code.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B Click the [User Page Count] tab of User Management Tool.
The number of pages printed under each user code appears.
C Click [Finish] on the [File] menu to quit User Management Tool.
Exporting the information about the number of pages printed
Follow the procedure below to export the information of the number of pages
printed under each user code as a .csv file.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B Click the [User Page Count] tab of User Management Tool.
C On the [File] menu, click [Export User Statistics List].
D Specify the save location and file name, and then click [Save].
E Click [Finish] on the [File] menu to quit User Management Tool.
Resetting the number of pages printed to 0.
Follow the procedure below to reset the number of pages printed under each
user code to 0.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin .
B Click the [User Page Count] tab of User Management Tool.
C Click the user whose information you want to reset.
D On the [Edit] menu, click [Reset User Counters].
E Select the check box of the items you want to reset, and then click [OK].
A confirmation message appears.
F Click [Yes].
The number of pages printed is reset to 0.
G On the [Edit] menu, click [Apply Settings].
Changes are applied to information on the [User Page Count] tab.
H Click [Finish] on the [File] menu to quit User Management Tool.
174
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Restricting Functions
Follow the procedure below to restrict use of individual functions.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B On the [Edit] menu of User Management Tool, click [Restrict Access To Device].
C Select the check box of the functions you want to restrict.
D Click [OK].
A confirmation message appears.
E Click [Yes].
The settings are applied.
Setting Applicable Functions to New Users
Follow the procedure below to add new users and set functions applicable to
them.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B Click the [Access Control List:] tab of User Management Tool.
C On the [Edit] menu, click [Add New User].
D Enter the user code and user name.
E Select the check box of the functions applicable to the new user.
❒ If the check boxes are unavailable, there is no restriction to use that function. For details, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
F Click [OK].
The new user is added.
G On the [Edit] menu, click [Apply Settings].
The settings are applied.
H Click [Finish] on the [File] menu to quit User Management Tool.
For details about setting restrictions, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
Help.
175
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Configuring the Energy Saver Mode
Follow the procedure below to configure Energy Saver mode.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B On the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device],
and then click [TCP/IP],
[IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP(SNMPv3)].
A list of printers using the selected protocol appears.
❒ Select the protocol of the printer whose configuration you want to change.
C Select the printer whose settings you want to make.
To make settings for all printers in the selected group, select no printer.
D On the [Group] menu, point to [Energy Save Mode], point to [Set Individually] to
make the settings for only the selected printer or point to [Set By Group]
to make the settings for all printers in the selected group, and then click
[On] or [Off].
E Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
For details about the setting value for Energy Saver mode, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
Setting a Password
Follow the procedure below to set a password.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B On the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device],
and then click [TCP/IP],
[IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP(SNMPv3)].
A list of printers using the selected protocol appears.
C In the list, select a printer whose configuration you want to change.
D On the [Tools] menu, click [NIB Setup Tool].
A Web browser opens and the dialog box for entering the password for the
Web Image Monitor administrator appears.
NIB Setup Tool starts when the network interface board is default. Follow the
instructions on the screen.
E Enter the user name and password, and then click [OK].
176
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
To use the default account, enter “admin” as the user name, and leave the
password blank.
Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.
F Click [Configuration].
G Click [Device Settings].
H Click [Program/Change Administrator].
I Click [Change].
J On the [New Password], enter a password.
Enter the same password in [Confirm Password] .
K Click [OK].
L Quit Web Image Monitor.
M Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
Checking the Printer Status
Follow the procedure below to check printer status.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B On the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device],
and then click [TCP/IP],
[IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP(SNMPv3)].
The status of printers is indicated by icons in the list.
❒ For details about status icons, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
C To obtain status details, click the printer in the list, and then click [Open]
on the [Device] menu.
The printer status appears in the dialog box.
D Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
❒ For details about items in the dialog box, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
Changing Names and Comments
Follow the procedure below to change the names and comments of the printer.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
177
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
B On
the [Group] menu, point to [Search Device], and then click [TCP/IP],
[IPX/SPX] or [TCP/IP(SNMPv3)]. A list of printers using the selected protocol
appears.
❒ Select the protocol of the printer whose configuration you want to change.
C Select a printer in the list.
D On the [Tools] menu, click [NIB Setup Tool].
A Web browser opens and the dialog box for entering the password for the
Web Image Monitor administrator appears.
NIB Setup Tool starts when the network interface board is default. Follow the
instructions on the screen.
E Enter the user name and password, and then click [OK].
Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.
To use the default account, enter “admin” as the user name, and leave the
password blank.
F Click [Configuration].
G Click [Device Settings].
H On the [System] page, enter the device name in the [Device Name] box and
a comment in the [Comment] box, and click [Apply].
• In the [Device Name] box, enter a device name on the machine using up to
31 characters.
• In the [Comment] box, enter a comment on the printer using up to 31 characters.
I Click [OK].
J Quit Web Image Monitor.
K Quit SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
178
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
To view the status of printers using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, configure
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client beforehand.
Monitoring Printers
Follow the procedure below to monitor the printer using SmartDeviceMonitor for
Client.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
The SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon appears in the task tray.
B Right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon, and check that the
printer appears on the pop-up menu.
C Click [Options...] on the pop-up menu if the printer does not appear on the
pop-up menu.
The [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client - Options] dialog box appears.
D Click the printer you want to monitor, and then select the [To Be Monitored]
check box in the [Monitoring Information Settings] area.
❒ To display the printer status in the task tray using the SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client icon, select the [Displayed on Task Bar] check box.
❒ For details about status icons, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
E Click [OK].
The dialog box closes and the configured printer is monitored.
Checking the Printer Status
Follow the procedure below to check printer status using SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client.
A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
B For status details, right-click the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client icon,
and then click the printer.
The printer status appears in the dialog box.
❒ For details about items in the dialog box, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
179
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
When Using IPP with SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
When using IPP with SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, note the following:
• The network printer can only receive one print job from SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client at a time. While the network printer is printing, another user cannot
access it until the job is finished. In this case, SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
tries to access the network printer until the retry interval expires.
• If SmartDeviceMonitor for Client cannot access the network printer and times
out, it will stop sending the print job. In this case, you should cancel the
paused status from the print queue window. SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
will resume access to the network printer. You can delete the print job from
the print queue window, but canceling a print job printed by the network printer
might cause the next job sent from another user to be incorrectly printed.
• If a print job sent from SmartDeviceMonitor for Client is interrupted and the
network printer cancels the job because something went wrong, send the print
job again.
• Print jobs sent from another computer do not appear in the print queue window, regardless of protocol.
• If various users send print jobs using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client to network printers, the printing order might not be the same as that in which the
jobs were sent.
• An IP address cannot be used for the IPP port name because the IP address
is used for the SmartDeviceMonitor for Client port name.
• When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment which server authentification is issued, enter “https://(printer's address)/”. Internet Explorer must be installed on your computer. Use the
highest version. Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is recommended.
• If the [Security Alert] dialog box appears when accessing the printer using IPP
to create or configure an IPP port, or when printing, install the certificate. To
select the certificate store location when using Certificate Import Wizard, click
[Place all certificates in the following store], and then click [Local Computer] under
[Trusted Root Certification Authorities].
180
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Printer Status Notification by E-Mail
Whenever a paper tray becomes empty or paper is jammed, an e-mail alert is
issued to the registered addresses to notify the printer status.
For this notification, you can make the e-mail notification settings.
Notification timing and e-mail content can be set.
A Set [Notify by Email] under the [System] menu to [On] using the control panel. .
The default is [On].
For details, see p.141 “System Menu”.
B Open a Web browser, and then enter “http: //(printer's address)/” in the
address bar.
Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.
When setting SSL, a protocol for encrypted communication, under environment which server authentification is issued , enter “https://(printer's address)/”.
C Click [Login] on Top Page of Web Image Monitor.
The dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.
D Enter the user name and password, and then click [OK].
To use the default account, enter “admin” as user name, and leave the password blank.
E In the menu area, click [Configuration].
F Click [Device Settings], and then click [E-mail].
G Make the following settings:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Items in the Reception column
Items in the SMTP column
Items in the POP before SMTP column
Items in the POP3/IMAP4 column
Items in the E-mail Reception Port column
Items in the E-mail Notification column
H Click [Apply].
181
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Auto E-mail Notification
A In the menu area, click [Auto E-mail Notification].
The dialog box for making notification settings appears.
B Make the following settings:
• Notification Message
• Items in the Groups to Notify column
• Items in the Select Groups/Items to Notify column
To make detailed settings for these items, click [Edit] next to [Details of Email Notification Settings].
C Click [Apply].
D Quit Web Image Monitor.
On-demand E-mail Notification
A In the menu area, click [On-demand E-mail Notification].
The dialog box for making notification settings appears.
B Make the following settings:
• Notification Subject
• Items in the Access Restriction to Information column
• Items in the Receivable E-mail Address/Domain Name Settings column
C Click [Apply].
D Quit Web Image Monitor.
182
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Remote Maintenance by telnet
❒ Remote Maintenance should be password-protected so that access is allowed to administrators only.
❒ The password is the same as the one of Web Image Monitor administrator.
When the password is changed using “mshell”, other passwords change also.
❒ Some commands cannot be used depending on your printer.
Using telnet
Follow the procedure below to use telnet.
❒ Only one user at a time can log on to perform remote maintenance.
A Use the IP address or the host name of the printer to start telnet.
% telnetIP_address
B Enter your user name and password.
To use default account, enter “admin” as user name, and leave the password
blank.
C Enter a command.
D Quit telnet.
msh> logout
The configuration message about saving the changes appears.
E Enter “yes” to save the changes, and then press the {# Enter} key.
If you do not want to save the changes, enter “no”, and then press the {# Enter} key. To make further changes, enter “return” at the command line, and
then press the {# Enter} key.
❒ If the message “Can not write NVRAM information” appears, the changes
are not saved. Repeat the procedure above.
❒ When the changes are saved, the network interface board is reset automatically with that changes.
❒ When the network interface board resets, the print job in print process will
be printed. However, print jobs in queue will be canceled.
183
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
access
Use the “access” command to view and configure access control. You can also
specify two or more access ranges.
❖ View settings
msh> access
❖ Configuration
msh> access ✩ range “start-address end-address”
• ✩ represents a target number between 1 and 5. (Up to five access ranges
can be registered and selected.)
Example: to specify accessible IP addresses between 192.168.0.10 and
192.168.0.20:
msh> access 1 range 192.168.0.10 192.168.0.20
❖ Access control initialization
msh> access flush
• Use the “flush” command to restore the default settings so that all access
ranges become “0.0.0.0”.
❒ The access range restricts computers from use of the printer by IP address.
If you do not need to restrict printing, make the setting “0.0.0.0”.
❒ Valid ranges must be from lower (start address) to higher (end address).
❒ Up to five access ranges can be specified. The entry is invalid if the target
number is omitted.
❒ You cannot access Web Image Monitor from a restricted IP address.
appletalk
Use the “appletalk” command to view and configure Appletalk parameters.
❖ View settings
msh> appletalk
• [2] means “active” and [0] means “inactive”.
• The default is [2].
❖ Changing PAP timeout configuration
msh> appletalk ptimeout value > 0
• Timeout value becomes effective.
msh> appletalk ptimeout value = 0
184
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
• Timeout value becomes ineffective.
autonet
Use the “autonet” command to configure AutoNet parameters.
❖ View settings
The following command displays the current AutoNet settings:
msh> autonet
❖ Configuration
You can configure AutoNet settings.
msh> autonet {on|off}
• {on} means “active” and {off} means “inactive”.
❖ Current interface priority configuration display
msh> autonet priority
❖ Interface priority configuration
msh> autonet priority “interface_name”
• You can give interface's AutoNet parameter priority.
• Priority settings are available when multiple interfaces are installed.
• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.
• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.
Interface name
Interface configured
ether
Ethernet interface
ip1394
IEEE 1394 interface
wlan
IEEE 802.11b interface
❒ If an interface is not selected, the current interface connection settings remain
in effect.
For details about AutoNet, refer to autonet parameters.
btconfig
Use the “btconfig” command to make Bluetooth settings.
❖ View settings
Bluetooth settings are displayed.
msh> btconfig
185
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
❖ Mode settings
You can set the Bluetooth operation mode to {private} or {public}.
msh> btconfig {private | public}
• The default is {public}.
devicename
Use the “devicename” command to display and change the printer name.
❖ View settings
msh> devicename
❖ Printer name configuration
msh> devicename name “string”
• Enter a printer name using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
• Set single names for each printer.
❖ Printer name initialization
msh> devicename clear name
• Reset the printer name to its default.
dhcp
Use the “dhcp” command to configure DHCP settings.
❖ View settings
The following command displays the current DHCP settings.
msh> dhcp
❖ Configuration
You can configure DHCP.
msh> dhcp “interface_name” {on|off}
• Click {on} to enable dhcp. Click {off} to disable DHCP.
• If the DNS server address and domain name are obtained from DHCP, be
sure to click {on}.
• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.
• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.
Interface name
Interface configured
ether
Ethernet interface
ip1394
IEEE 1394 interface
186
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Interface name
Interface configured
wlan
IEEE 802.11b interface
❖ Current interface priority configuration display
msh> dhcp priority
❖ Interface priority configuration
msh> dhcp priority “interface_name”
• You can select which interface has DHCP parameter priority.
• Priority settings are available when multiple interfaces are installed.
❖ DNS server address selection
msh> dhcp dnsaddr {dhcp | static}
• Specify whether to obtain the DNS server address from the DHCP server
or use the address set by a user.
• To obtain the DNS server address from the DHCP server, specify “dhcp”.
To use the address set by a user, specify “static”.
❖ Domain name selection
msh> dhcp domainname {dhcp | static}
• Specify whether to obtain the domain name from the DNS server or use the
domain name set by a user.
• To obtain the domain name from the DHCP server, specify “dhcp”. To use
the domain name set by a user, specify “static”.
For details about DHCP functions, see p.282 “Using DHCP”.
For details about setting the DNS server address, see p.188 “dns”.
For details about setting the domain name, see p.189 “domainname”.
diprint
The direct printing port enables direct printing from a network-connected computer.
Use the “diprint” command to change direct printing port settings.
❖ View settings
The following command displays the current direct printing port settings:
msh> diprint
Example output:
port 9100
timeout=300(sec)
bidirect on
187
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
• The “Port” specifies the port number of the direct printing port.
• The “bidirect” setting indicates whether the direct printing port is bidirectional or not.
❖ Setting timeout
msh> diprint timeout [30~65535]
• You can specify the timeout interval to use when the printer is expecting
data from the network.
• The default is 300 seconds.
❖ Setting bidirect
msh> diprint bidirect {on | off}
• You can specify whether the direct printing port is bidrectional or not.
dns
Use the “dns” command to configure or display DNS (Domain Name System)
settings.
❖ View settings
The following command displays current DNS settings:
msh> dns
❖ DNS server configuration
The following command enables or disables the DNS server address:
msh> dns “number” server “server address”
The following command displays a configuration using the IP address
192.168.15.16 on a DNS 1 server:
msh> dns 1 server 192.168.15.16
• You can register up to three DNS server numbers.
• You cannot use “255.255.255.255” as the DNS server address.
❖ Dynamic DNS function setting
msh> dns “interface_name” ddns {on|off}
• You can set the dynamic DNS function “active” or “inactive”.
• {on} means “active” and {off} means “inactive”.
• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.
• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.
Interface name
Interface configured
ether
Ethernet interface
ip1394
IEEE 1394 interface
188
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Interface name
Interface configured
wlan
IEEE 802.11b interface
❖ Specifying the record overlap operation
msh> dns overlap {update|add}
• You can specify operations performed when records overlap.
• update
To delete old records and register new records.
• add
To add new records and store the old records.
• When CNAME overlaps, it is always changed, irrespective of settings.
❖ CNAME registration
msh> dns cname {on|off}
• You can specify whether to register CNAME.
• {on} means “active” and {off} means “inactive”.
• The CNAME registered is the default name beginning with rnp. CNAME
cannot be changed.
❖ A records registration
msh> dns arecord {dhcp|own}
• {dhcp}
You can specify the method of registering an A record when the dynamic
DNS function is enabled and DHCP is used.
• {own}
To register an A record using the printer as the DNS client.
The DNS server address and the domain name already designated are
used for the registration.
❖ Record updating interval settings
msh> dns interval “time”
• You can specify the interval after which records are updated when using
the dynamic DNS function.
• The updating interval is specified hourly. It can be entered between 1 and
255 hours.
• The default is 24 hours.
domainname
Use the “domainname” command to display or configure the domain name settings.
189
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
You can configure the Ethernet interface, IEEE 1394 interface, or IEEE 802.11b
interface.
❖ View settings
The following command displays the current domain name:
msh> domainname
❖ Interface domain configuration
msh> domainname “interface_name”
❖ Setting the Domain Name
msh> domainname “interface_name” name “domain name”
• A domain name can be entered using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.
• The Ethernet interface and IEEE 802.11b interface will have the same domain name.
• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.
• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.
Interface
Interface set
ether
Ethernet interface
ip1394
IEEE 1394 interface
wlan
IEEE 802.11b interface
❖ Deleting the Domain Name
msh> domainname “interface_name” clear name
help
Use the “help” command to display the available command list and the procedures for using those commands.
❖ Command list display
msh> help
❖ Display of procedure for using commands
msh> help “command_name”
hostname
Use the “hostname” command to change the printer name.
❖ View settings
msh> hostname
190
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
❖ Configuration
msh> hostname “interface_name” “printer_name”
• Enter the printer name using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.
• You cannot use a printer name starting with “RNP” or “rnp”.
• The Ethernet interface and IEEE 802.11b interface will have the same
printer name.
• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.
• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.
Interface name
Interface configured
ether
Ethernet interface
ip1394
IEEE 1394 interface
wlan
IEEE 802.11b interface
❖ Initializing the printer name for each interface
msh>hostname interface_name clear name
ifconfig
Use the “ifconfig” command to configure TCP/IP (IP address, subnet mask,
broadcast address, default gateway address) for the printer.
❖ View settings
msh> ifconfig
❖ Configuration
msh> ifconfig “interface_name” “parameter” “address”
• If you did not enter an interface name, it is automatically set to the Ethernet
interface.
• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.
• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.
Interface name
Interface configured
ether
Ethernet Interface
ip1394
IEEE 1394 Interface
wlan
IEEE 802.11b Interface
❖ Netmask configuration
msh> ifconfig “interface_name” netmask “address”
❖ Broadcast address configuration
msh> ifconfig “interface_name” broadcast “address”
191
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
❖ Changing the Interface
msh> ifconfig “interface” up
• You can specify either the Ethernet interface or IEEE 802.11b interface
when using the optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit.
You cannot specify the IEEE 1394 interface.
The following explains how to configure an IP address 192.168.15.16 on
Ethernet interface.
msh> ifconfig ether 192.168.15.16
The following explains how to configure a subnet mask 255.255.255.0 on
Ethernet interface.
msh> ifconfig ether netmask 255.255.255.0
❒ To get the above addresses, contact your network administrator.
❒ Use the default configuration if you cannot obtain setting addresses.
❒ The IP address, subnet mask and broadcast address are the same as that for
the ethernet interface and IEEE 802.11b interface.
❒ When installing the optional 1394 Interface board, set the IP address and subnet mask so that it does not overlap with the ethernet interface or the IEEE
1394 interface.
❒ TCP/IP configuration is the same for both Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b interface. If interfaces are changed, the new interface inherits the configuration.
❒ Use “0x” as the initial two letters of a hexadecimal address.
info
Use the “info” command to display printer information such as paper tray, output
tray, and printer language.
❖ Printer information display
msh> info
For details about displayed contents, see p.212 “Getting Printer Information
over the Network”.
ipp
Use the “ipp” command to configure IPP settings.
❖ Viewing settings
The following command displays the current IPP settings:
msh> ipp
Example output:
192
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
timeout=900(sec)
auth basic
• The “timeout” setting specifies how many seconds the computer tries to
send print jobs when no connection can be made to the network printer.
• The “auth” setting indicates the user authorization mode.
❖ IPP timeout configuration
Specify how many seconds the computer waits before canceling an interrupted print job. The time can be entered between 30 to 65535 seconds.
msh> ipp timeout [30 - 65535]
❖ IPP user authorization configuration
Use IPP user authorization to restrict users to print with IPP. The default is
“off”.
msh> ipp auth {basic|digest|off}
• User authorization settings are “basic” and “digest”.
• Use “off” to remove a user's authorization.
• If user authorization is specified, register a user name. You can register up
to 10 users.
❖ IPP user configuration
Use the following command:
msh> ipp user
The following message appears:
msh> Input user number (1 to 10):
Enter the number, user name, and password.
msh> IPP user name:user1
msh> IPP password:*******
After configuring the settings, the following message appears:
User configuration changed.
netware
Use the “netware” command to configure the NetWare settings such as the print
server name or file server name.
❖ Netware Printer Server Names
msh> netware pname
• Enter the NetWare print server name using up to 47 characters.
❖ Netware File Server Names
msh> netware fname
• Enter the NetWare file server name using up to 47 characters.
193
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
❖ Encap type
msh> netware encap [802.3/802.2/snap/ethernet2/auto]
❖ Remote Printer Number
msh> netware rnum
❖ Timeout
msh> netware timeout
❖ Printer server mode
msh> netware mode pserver
msh> netware mode ps
❖ Remote printer mode
msh> netware mode rprinter
msh> netware mode rp
❖ NDS context name
msh> netware context
❖ SAP interval
msh> netware “sap_interval”
❖ Setting login mode for file server
msh> netware login server
❖ Setting login mode for NDS tree
msh> netware login tree
❖ Setting login mode for NDS tree name
msh> netware tree “NDS name”
passwd
Use the “passwd” command to change the remote maintenance password.
❖ Changing the Password
msh> passwd
• Enter the current password.
• Enter the new password.
• Enter the new password once again.
❒ Be sure not to forget or lose the password.
194
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
❒ The password can be entered using up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Passwords are case-sensitive. For example, “R” is not the same as “r”.
prnlog
Use the “prnlog” command to obtain printer log information.
❖ Print logs display
msh> prnlog
• Displays 16 previous print jobs.
msh> prnlog ID Number
• Specify the ID number of the displayed print log information to display additional details about a print job.
❒ For details about displayed contents, see p.212 “Getting Printer Information
over the Network”.
rendezvous
Use the “rendezvous” command to display rendezvous-related settings.
❖ View settings
Rendezvous settings are displayed.
msh> rendezvous
❖ Current computer name display
msh> rendezvous cname
❖ Display information about the current printer location
msh> rendezvous location
❖ Rendezvous computer name setting
You can specify the rendezvous computer name.
msh> rendezvous cname “computer name”
• The computer name can be entered using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.
❖ rendezvous Installation location information setting
You can enter information about the location where the printer is installed.
msh> rendezvous location “location”
• Information about location can be entered using up to 32 alphanumeric
characters.
195
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
❖ Setting order of priority for each protocol
• diprint
msh> rendezvous diprint [0-99]
• lpr
msh> rendezvous lpr [0-99]
• ipp
msh> rendezvous ipp [0-99]
You can specify the order of priority for “diprint”, “lpr”, and “ipp”. Smaller numbers indicate higher priority.
❖ IP TTL setting
msh> rendezvous ipttl {1-255}
You can specify the IP TTL (the number of routers a packet can pass
through).
❒ The default is 255.
❖ Resetting the computer name and location information
You can reset the computer name and location information.
msh> rendezvous clear {cname | location}
• cname
Reset the computer name. The default computer name will be displayed
when the computer is restarted.
• location
Reset the location information. The previous location information will be
deleted.
❖ Interface configuration
msh> rendezvous linklocal “interface_name”
• If many types of interface are installed, configure the interface that communicates with linklocal address.
If you do not specify an interface, the Ethernet interface is automatically selected.
• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.
• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.
Interface
Interface configured
ether
Ethernet interface
ip1394
IEEE 1394 interface
wlan
IEEE 802.11b interface
196
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
route
Use the “route” command to control the routing table.
❖ All route information display
msh> route
❖ Specified route information display
msh> route “destination”
• Specify the IP address to destination.
❖ Enabling/disabling Specified Destination
msh> route active {host|net} “destination” {on | off}
• You can turn the specified destination on or off. Host becomes the default
setting.
❖ Adding Routing Table
msh> route add {host|net} “destination” “gateway”
• Adds a host or network route to “destination”, and a gateway address to
“gateway” in the table.
• Specify the IP address to destination and gateway.
• Host becomes the default setting.
❖ Setting Default Gateway
msh> route add default gateway
❖ Deleting Specified destination from Routing Table
msh> route delete {host|net} “destination”
• Host becomes the default setting.
• IP address of destination can be specified.
❖ Route Flush
msh> route flush
❒ The maximum number of routing tables is 16.
❒ Set a gateway address when communicating with devices on an external network.
❒ The same gateway address is shared by all interfaces.
197
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
set
Use the “set” command to set the protocol information display “active” or “inactive”.
❖ View settings
The following command displays protocol information (active/inactive).
msh> set tcpip
msh> set appletalk
msh> set netware
msh> set smb
msh> set scsiprint
• scsiprint is available when the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.
msh> set ip1394
• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.
msh> set protocol
• When protocol is specified, information about TCP/IP, appletalk, netware,
and smb appears.
msh> set lpr
msh> set ftp
msh> set rsh
msh> set diprint
msh> set web
msh> set snmp
msh> set ssl
msh> set nrs
msh> set rfu
msh> set ipp
msh> set http
msh> set rendezvous
❖ Configuration
• Enter “up”to enable protocol, and enter “down” to disable protocol.
You can set the protocol to “active” or “inactive”.
msh> set tcpip {up | down}
• If you disable TCP/IP, you cannot use remote access after logging off. If
you did this by mistake, you can use the control panel to enable remote access via TCP/IP.
198
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
• Disabling TCP/IP also disables ip1394, lpr, ftp, rsh, diprint, web, snmp, ssl,
ipp, http, and rendezvous
msh> set appletalk {up | down}
msh> set netware {up | down}
msh> set smb {up | down}
msh> set scsiprint {up | down}
• scsiprint is available when the optional IEEE 1394 interface board is installed.
msh> set ip1394 {up | down}
• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.
msh> set lpr {up | down}
msh> set ftp {up | down}
msh> set rsh {up | down}
msh> set diprint {up | down}
msh> set web {up | down}
msh> set snmp {up | down}
msh> set ssl {up | down}
• If Secured Sockets Layer (SSL, an encryption protocol) function is not
available for the printer, you cannot use the function by enabling it.
msh> set nrs {up | down}
msh> set rfu {up | down}
msh> set ipp {up | down}
msh> set http {up | down}
msh> set rendezvous {up | down}
show
Use the “show” command to display network interface board configuration settings.
❖ View settings
msh> show
• If “-p” is added, you can view settings one by one.
For details about the information displayed, see p.221 “Configuring the Network Interface Board”.
199
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
slp
Use “slp” command to configure SLP settings.
msh> slp ttl “ttl_val”
• You can search the NetWare server using SLP in the PureIP environment of
NetWare 5/5.1 and Netware 6/6.5. Using the “slp” command, you can configure the value of TTL which can be used by SLP multicast packet.
• The default value of TTL is 1. A search is executed only within a local segment. If the router does not support multicast, the settings are not available
even if the TTL value is increased.
• The acceptable TTL value is between 1 and 255.
smb
Use the “smb” command to configure or delete the computer or workgroup name
for SMB.
❖ Computer Name settings
msh> smb comp
• Set computer name using up to 15 characters. Names beginning with
“RNP” or “rnp” cannot be entered.
❖ Working Group Name settings
msh> smb group
• Set workgroup name using up to 15 characters
❖ Comment settings
msh> smb comment
• Set comment using up to 31 characters
❖ Notify print job completion
msh> smb notif {on | off}
• To notify print job completion, specify “on”. Otherwise, specify “off”
❖ Deleting Computer Name
msh> smb clear comp
❖ Deleting Group Name
msh> smb clear group
❖ Deleting Comment
msh> smb clear comment
200
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
❖ Protocol settings
msh> smb protocol [netbeui {up | down} | tcpip {up | down}]
• Enable or disable NetBEUI and TCP/IP. Specify “up” to enable, and “down”
to disable.
snmp
Use the “snmp” command to display and edit SNMP configuration settings such
as the community name.
❖ View settings
msh> snmp
• Default access settings 1 is as follows:
Community name:public
IP address:0.0.0.0
Access type:read-only / trap off
• Default access settings 2 is as follows:
Community name:admin
IP address:0.0.0.0
Access type:read-write / trap off
• If “-p” is added, you can view settings one by one.
• To display the current community, specify its registration number.
❖ Display
msh> snmp ?
❖ Community name configuration
msh> snmp “number” name “community_name”
• You can configure ten SNMP access settings numbered 1-10.
• The printer cannot be accessed from SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin or
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client if “public” is not registered in numbers 1-10.
When changing the community name, use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
and SNMP Setup Tool to correspond with printer settings.
• The community name can be entered using up to 15 characters.
❖ Deleting community name
msh> snmp “number” clear name
❖ Access type configuration
msh> snmp “number” type “access_type”
Access type
Type of access permission
no
not accessible
201
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Access type
Type of access permission
read
read only
write
read and write
trap
user is notified of trap messages
❖ Protocol configuration
msh> snmp {ip | ipx} {on | off}
• Use the following command to set protocols “active” or “inactive”: If you set
a protocol “inactive”, all access settings for that protocol are disabled.
• Specify “ip” for TCP/IP, or “ipx” for IPX/SPX.
• {on} means “active” and {off} means “inactive”.
• IEEE 1394 interface is available for TCP/IP only.
❖ Configuration of protocol for each registration number
msh> snmp “number” active {ip | ipx} {on | off}
• To change the protocol of access settings, use the following command.
However, if you have disabled a protocol with the above command, activating it here has no effect.
❖ Access configuration
msh> snmp “number” {ip/addr | ipx} “address”
• You can configure a host address according to the protocol used.
• The network interface board accepts requests only from hosts that have
addresses with access types of “read-only” or “read-write”. Enter “0” to
have network interface board accept requests from any host without requiring a specific type of access.
• Enter a host address to deliver “trap” access type information to.
• To specify TCP/IP, enter “ip” followed by a space, and then the IP address.
• To specify IPX/SPX, enter “ipx” followed by a space, the IPX address followed by a decimal, and then the MAC address of the network interface
board.
❖ sysLocation configuration
msh> snmp location
❖ Deleting sysLocation
msh> snmp clear location
❖ sysContact setting
msh> snmp contact
202
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
❖ Deleting sysContact
msh> snmp clear contact
❖ SNMP v1v2 function configuration
msh> snmp v1v2 {on | off}
• Specify “on” to enable, and “off” to disable.
❖ SNMP v3 function configuration
msh> snmp v3 {on | off}
• Specify “on” to enable, and “off” to disable.
❖ SNMP TRAP configuration
msh> snmp trap {v1 | v2 | v3} {on | off}
• Specify “on” to enable, and “off” to disable.
❖ Remote Configuration Authorization configuration
msh> snmp remote {on | off}
• Specify “on” to enable, and “off” to disable.
❖ SNMP v3 TRAP configuration display
msh> snmp v3trap
msh> snmp v3trap {1- 5}
• If a number from 1-5 is entered, settings are displayed for that number only.
❖ Configuring a sending address for SNMP v3 TRAP
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} {ip| ipx} address
❖ Configuring a sending protocol for SNMP v3 TRAP
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} active {ip/addr | ipx} {on | off}
❖ Configuring a user account for SNMP v3 TRAP
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} account account_name
• Enter an account name using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
❖ Deleting an SNMP v3 TRAP user account
msh> snmp v3trap {1-5} clear account
❖ Configuring an SNMP v3 encryption algorithm
msh> snmp v3auth {md5 | sha1}
❖ Configuring SNMP v3 encryption
msh> snmp v3priv {auto | on}
203
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
• If you select “auto”, the print job will be encrypted when encryption is possible.
• If you select “on”, Clear Text communication is not possible, and encryption
password must be set before encryption communication can be used.
❒ Encryption is possible when the security option is installed correctly and
the password is specified.
sntp
The printer clock can be synchronized with a NTP server clock using Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). Use the “sntp” command to change SNTP settings.
❖ View settings
msh> sntp
❖ NTP server address configuration
You can specify the IP address of the NTP server.
msh> sntp server “IP_address”
❖ Interval configuration
msh> sntp interval “polling_time”
• You can specify the interval at which the printer synchronizes with the operator-specified NTP server. The default is 60 minutes.
• The interval can be entered between 16 and 16,384 minutes.
• If you set 0, the printer synchronizes with the NTP server only when you
turn the printer on. After that, the printer does not synchronize with the NTP
server.
❖ Time-zone configuration
msh> sntp timezone “+/-hour_time”
• You can specify the time difference between the printer clock and NTP
server clock. Time is in 24-hour format.
spoolsw
Use the “spoolsw” command to configure Job Spool settings.
You can only specify diprint, lpr, ipp, ftp and smb protocol.
• The “spoolsw” command for configuring Job Spool settings is available only
when the optional hard disk is installed.
❖ View settings
The Job Spool setting appears.
204
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
msh> spoolsw
❖ Job Spool setting
msh> spoolsw spool {on | off}
❒ Specify “on” to enable Job Spool, or “off” to disable it.
❖ Resetting Job spool setting
msh> spoolsw clear job {on | off}
• When the printer power is cut during job spooling, this determines whether
to reprint the spooled job.
❖ Protocol configuration
msh> spoolsw diprint {on | off}
msh> spoolsw lpr {on | off}
msh> spoolsw ipp {on | off}
msh> spoolsw smb {on | off}
msh> spoolsw ftp {on | off}
• You can specify the settings for diprint, lpr, ipp, and smb.
sprint
Use the “sprint” command to make settings for IEEE 1394 (SCSI print).
❖ View settings
IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) settings are displayed.
msh> sprint
❖ Bidirectional configuration for IEEE 1394 (SCSI print)
Use this setting to set IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) bidirectional.
The default is “on”.
msh> sprint bidi {on | off}
status
The printer status can be checked using the following command:
❖ Messages
msh> status
For details, see p.212 “Current Printer Status”.
205
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
syslog
Use the “syslog” command to display the information stored in the printer's system log.
❖ View message
msh> syslog
❒ For details about the information displayed, see p.227 “System Log Information”.
upnp
Use the “upnp” command to display and configure the universal plug and play.
❖ Public URL display
msh> upnp url
❖ Public URL configuration
msh> upnp url “string”
• Enter the URL string in the character string.
web
Use the “web” command to display and configure parameters on Web Image
Monitor.
❖ View Settings
msh> web
❖ URL Configuration
You can set URLs linked by clicking [URL] on Web Image Monitor.
Specify “1” or “2” for x as the number corresponding to the URL. Up to two
URLs can be registered and specified.
msh> web url http://”The URL or IP address you want to
register”/
❖ Deleting URLs registered as link destinations
msh> web x clear url
Specify “1” or “2” for x as the corresponding number to the URL.
❖ Link name configuration
You can enter the name for [URL] that appears on Web Image Monitor.
Specify “1” or “2” for x as the corresponding number to the link name.
206
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
msh> web name “Name you want to display”
❖ Deleting URL names registered as link destinations
msh> web x clear name
Specify “1” or “2” for x as the number corresponding to the link name.
❖ Help URL Configuration
You can set URLs linked by clicking [Help] or [?] on Web Image Monitor.
msh> web help http://”Help URL or IP address”/help/
❖ Deleting Help URL
msh> web clear help
wiconfig
Use the “wiconfig” command to make settings for IEEE 802.11b.
❖ View settings
msh> wiconfig
❖ View IEEE 802.11b settings
msh> wiconfig cardinfo
• If IEEE 802.11b is not working correctly, its information is not displayed.
❖ Configuration
msh> wiconfig “parameter”
Parameter
Value configured
mode [ap|adhoc|802.11adhoc]
You can set the infrastructure mode (ap) , the
802.11 Ad hoc mode (802.11adhoc), or the
ad hoc mode (adhoc).
The default is ad hoc mode.
ssid ID value
You can make settings for the SSID in the infrastructure mode.
Usable characters are ASCII 0x20-0x7e (32
bytes).
An SSID value is set automatically to the
nearest access point if no setting is made.
If no setting is made for the ad hoc mode, the
same value as for the infrastructure mode or
an ASSID value is automatically set.
207
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Parameter
Value configured
channel frequency channel no.
You can enable or disable the WEP function.
To enable the WEP function, specify [on]; to
disable it, specify [off].
To start the WEP function, enter the correct
WEP key.
enc [on|off]
You can enable or disable the WEP function.
To enable the WEP function, specify [on]; to
disable it, specify [off].
To start the WEP function, enter the correct
WEP key.
key [ key value ] val [1|2|3|4]
You can specify the WEP key when entering
in hexadecimal.
With a 64-bit WEP, you can use 10 digit
hexadecimals. With a 128-bit WEP, you can
use 26 digit hexadecimals.
Up to four WEP keys can be registered.
Specify the number to be registered with
“val”.
When a WEP is specified by key, the WEP
specified by key phrase is overwritten.
To use this function, set the same key number and WEP key for all ports that transmit
data to each other.
You can omit the numbers with “val”. The key
number is set to 1 when making these omissions.
keyphrase [ phrase ] val [1|2|3|4]
You can specify the WEP key when entering
in ASCII.
With a 64-bit WEP, you can use 10 digit
hexadecimals. With a 128-bit WEP, you can
use 26 digit hexadecimals.
Up to four WEP keys can be registered.
Specify the number to be registered with
“val”.
When a WEP is specified by key phrase, the
WEP specified by key is overwritten.
To use this function, set the same key number and WEP key for all ports that transmit
data to each other.
You can omit the numbers with “val”. The key
number is set to 1 when making these omissions.
encval [1|2|3|4]
You can specify which of the four WEP keys
is used for packet encoding. “1” is set if a
number is not specified.
208
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Parameter
Value configured
auth [open|shared]
You can set an authorization mode when using WEP. The specified value and authorized
mode are as follows:
open: open system authorized (default)
shared: shared key authorized rate
rate [auto|11m|5.5m|2m|1m]
You can set the IEEE 802.11b transmitting
speed.
The speed you specify here is the speed at
which data is sent. You can receive data at
any speed.
auto: automatically set (default)
11m: 11 Mbps fixed
5.5m: 5.5 Mbps fixed
2m: 2 Mbps fixed
1m: 1 Mbps fixed
wins
Use the “wins” command to configure WINS server settings.
❖ Viewing settings
msh> wins
• If the IP address obtained from DHCP differs from the WINS IP address,
the DHCP address is the valid address.
❖ Configuration
msh> wins “interface_name” {on | off}
• {on} means “active” and {off} means “inactive”.
• Be sure to specify the interface.
• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.
• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.
Interface name
Interface configured
ether
Ethernet interface
ip1394
IEEE 1394 interface
wlan
IEEE 802.11b interface
❖ Address configuration
Use the following command to configure a WINS server IP address:
msh> wins “interface_name” {primary|secondary} “IP address”
209
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
• Use the “primary” command to configure a primary WINS server IP address.
• Use the “secondary” command to configure a secondary WINS server IP
address.
• Do not use “255.255.255.255” as the IP address.
❖ NBT (NetBIOS over TCP/IP) Scope ID Selection
You can specify the NBT scope ID.
msh> wins “interface_name” scope “scope ID”
• The scope ID can be entered using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
• Be sure to specify the interface.
• ip1394 can be specified only when the IEEE 1394 interface is installed.
• wlan can be specified only when the IEEE 802.11b interface is installed.
Interface name
Interface configured
ether
Ethernet interface
ip1394
IEEE 1394 interface
wlan
IEEE 802.11b interface
210
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
SNMP
The SNMP agent operating on UDP and IPX is incorporated into the built-in
Ethernet board and optional IEEE 802.11b interface unit of this printer. Also, the
SNMP agent operating on UDP is incorporated in the optional IEEE 1394 interface board.
Using the SNMP manager, you can get information about the printer.
❒ If you changed the printer's community name, change the configuration of the
connected computer accordingly, using SNMP Setup Tool. For details, see
SNMP Setup Tool Help.
The default community names are [public] and [admin]. You can get MIB information using these community names.
❖ Start SNMP Setup Tool
• Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0:
Click the [Start] button.
Point to [SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin] on the [Programs] menu.
Click [SNMP Setup Tool].
• Windows XP:
Click the [Start] button.
Point to [SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin] on the [All Programs] menu.
Click [SNMP Setup Tool].
❖ Supported MIBs(SNMPv1/v2)
• MIB-II
• PrinterMIB
• HostResourceMIB
• RicohPrivateMIB
❖ Supported MIBs(SNMPv3)
• MIB-II
• PrinterMIB
• HostResourceMIB
• RicohPrivateMIB
• SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB
• SNMP-TARGET-MIB
• SNMP-NOTIFICATION-MIB
• SNMP-USER-BASED-SM-MIB
• SNMP-VIEW-BASED-ACM-MIB
211
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Getting Printer Information over the
Network
This section explains details of each item displayed in the printer status and information.
Current Printer Status
The printer status can be checked using the following commands:
• UNIX: Use the “lpq” command and “rsh”, “rcp”, and “ftp” parameters.
• mshell: Use the “status” command.
Messages
Description
Access Restricted
The job was canceled because user have no
authority.
Add staples (Booklet: Back)
The staple of booklet finisher (back) is exhausted.
Add staples (Booklet: Both)
The staple of booklet finisher is exhausted.
Add staples (Booklet: Front)
The staple of booklet finisher (front) is exhausted.
Adjusting...
The machine is initializing or calibrating.
Call Service Center
There is a malfunction in the machine.
Canceled
The job is reset.
Canceling Job...
The job is being reset.
Card/Counter not inserted
The machine is waiting for prepaid card or key.
Coin or amount not inserted
The machine is waiting for coin to be inserted.
Coin/Key Counter not inserted
The machine is waiting for coin or key counter.
Configuring...
Setting is being changed.
Cover Open: ADF
The document feeder is open.
Cover Open: Duplex Unit
The cover of the duplex unit is open.
Cover Open: Finisher
The cover of Finisher is open.
Cover Open: Front
The front cover is open.
Cover Open: Front/Left
The front cover or left cover is open.
Cover Open: Paper Exit / Rear
The paper exit cover or rear cover is open.
Cover Open: Right
The right cover is open.
Cover Open: Top
The top cover is open.
Data Size Error
The data size error occurred.
212
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Messages
Description
Empty: Black Toner
The black toner cartridge is almost empty.
Empty: Cyan Toner
The cyan toner cartridge is almost empty.
Empty: Magenta Toner
The magenta toner cartridge is almost empty.
Empty: Yellow Toner
The yellow toner cartridge is almost empty.
Energy Saver Mode
The machine is in Energy Saver Mode.
Error
An error has occurred.
Error at Printer: Red LED
An error has occurred.
Error in Printer
An error has occurred.
Error: Address Book
An error has occurred in the data of the address book.
Error: Command Transmission
An error has occurred in the machine.
Error: DIMM Value
A memory error occurred.
Error: Ethernet Board
An Ethernet board error has occurred.
Error: HDD Board
A hard disk drive board error has occurred.
Error: IEEE1394 Board
An IEEE 1394 interface board error has occurred.
Error: Memory Switch
A memory switch error has occurred.
Error: Optional Font
An error has occurred in the font file of the machine.
Error: Optional RAM
An error has occurred in the optional memory
unit.
Error: Parallel I/F Board
An error has occurred in the parallel interface.
Error: PDL
An error has occurred in the page description
language.
Error: USB Interface
An error has occurred in the USB interface.
Error: Wireless Card
Wireless card is not inserted during start up, or
the IEEE 802.11b interface unit or the wireless
card is taken out after start up.
Error: Wireless Card or Board
An error has occurred in the IEEE 802.11b interface unit.
Exceed Booklet Stapling Limit
The printing has exceeded the stapling limit of
the booklet finisher.
Full: Copy Tray
The output paper tray is full.
Full: Finisher
Finisher tray is full.
Full: Finisher Shift Tray
Shift tray of Finisher is full.
Full: Finisher Shift Tray 1, 2
The shift tray 1 and 2 of Finisher are full.
Full: Finisher Upper Tray
The upper tray of Finisher is full.
213
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Messages
Description
Full: Hole Punch Receptacle
Punch Chip receptacle for hole punch is full.
Full: Standard Tray
The output paper tray is full.
Full: Waste Toner
Waste toner is full.
Full: Waste Toner Bottle
Waste toner bottle is full.
Hex Dump Mode
It is a hex dump mode.
Immed. Trans. not connected
It did not connect directly with the other party
of the transmission.
Immediate Transmission Failed
An error has occurred while transmitting directly.
In Use: Copier
The copier is being used.
In Use: Fax
The fax is being used.
In Use: Finisher
Other functions is using Finisher.
In Use: Input Tray
Other functions is using the input tray.
In Use: Staple Unit
Other functions is using the staple unit.
Independent-supplier Toner
Toner that is not recommended is set.
Key Card not inserted
The machine is waiting for key card to be inserted.
Key Card/Counter not inserted
The machine is waiting for key card or key
counter to be inserted.
Key Counter not inserted
The machine is waiting for key counter to be
left in it.
Loading Toner...
Toner is being supplied.
Low: Black Toner
The black toner cartridge is not set correctly, or
toner is almost running out.
Low: Cyan Toner
The cyan toner cartridge is not set correctly, or
toner is almost running out.
Low: Magenta Toner
The magenta toner cartridge is not set correctly, or toner is almost running out.
Low: Toner
The black toner cartridge is not set correctly, or
toner is almost running out.
Low: Yellow Toner
The yellow toner cartridge is not set correctly,
or toner is almost running out.
Malfunction: Booklet Processor
There is a problem with booklet finisher.
Malfunction: Ext. Charge Unit
There is a problem with external charge unit.
Malfunction: Finisher
There is a problem with Finisher.
Malfunction: Interposer
There is a problem with Interposer.
Malfunction: LargeCapacity Tray
There is a problem with LargeCapacity tray.
Malfunction: Output Tray
There is a problem with output tray.
214
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Messages
Description
Malfunction: Staple Unit
There is a problem with the staple unit.
Malfunction: Tray 1
There is a problem with tray 1.
Malfunction: Tray 2
There is a problem with tray 2.
Malfunction: Tray 3
There is a problem with tray 3.
Malfunction: Tray 4
There is a problem with tray 4.
Malfunction: Z-folding unit
There is a problem with the Z fold unit.
Memory Low: Copy
Memory shortage has occurred while the copy
was operating.
Memory Low: Data Storage
Memory shortage has occurred while the document was being accumulated.
Memory Low: Fax Scanning
Memory shortage has occurred while transmitting the fax.
Memory Low: Scanning
Memory shortage has occurred while the
scanner was working.
Miscellaneous Error
Other error has occurred.
Mismatch: Paper Size
Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of
selected size.
Mismatch: Paper Size and Type
Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of
selected size and type.
Mismatch: Paper Type
Indicated paper tray does not contain paper of
selected type.
Near Replacing: Black PCU
Prepare the new black photoconductor unit.
Near Replacing: Color PCU
Prepare the new color photoconductor unit.
Near Replacing: Develop. Unit C
Prepare the new development unit (cyan).
Near Replacing: Develop. Unit K
Prepare the new development unit (black).
Near Replacing: Develop. Unit M
Prepare the new development unit (magenta).
Near Replacing: Develop. Unit Y
Prepare the new development unit (yellow).
Near Replacing: Fusing Unit
Prepare the new fusing unit.
Near Replacing: Maintenance Kit
Prepare the new maintenance kit.
Near Replacing: Transfer Unit
Prepare the new transfer unit.
Nearly Full: Waste Toner
Waste toner bottle is nearly full.
Need more Staples
Stapler has almost run out of staples.
No Paper: Interposer Tray
There is no paper in interposer unit.
No Paper: LCT
There is no paper in Large Capacity tray.
No Paper: Selected Tray
There is no paper in specified tray.
No Paper: Tray 1
There is no paper in tray 1.
No Paper: Tray 2
There is no paper in tray 2.
215
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Messages
Description
No Paper: Tray 3
There is no paper in tray 3.
No Paper: Tray 4
There is no paper in tray 4.
Not Detected: B2 Lever
B2 lever is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Black Toner
Black toner is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Cyan Toner
Cyan toner is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Develop. Unit (C)
The development unit (cyan) is not correctly
set.
Not Detected: Develop. Unit (K)
The development unit (black) is not correctly
set.
Not Detected: Develop. Unit (M)
The development unit (magenta) is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Develop. Unit (Y)
The development unit (yellow) is not correctly
set.
Not Detected: Duplex Feed Unit
The duplex feed unit is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Finisher
Finisher is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Fusing Unit
The fusing unit is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Input Tray
The paper feed tray is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Interposer
Interposer unit is not correctly set.
Not Detected: LCT
A large amount of paper feed tray is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Magenta Toner
Magenta toner is not correctly set.
Not Detected: PCU (C)
The photoconductor unit (cyan) is not correctly
set.
Not Detected: PCU (K)
The photoconductor unit (black) is not correctly set.
Not Detected: PCU (M)
The photoconductor unit (magenta) is not correctly set.
Not Detected: PCU (Y)
The photoconductor unit (yellow) is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Toner Magazine
The toner cartridge is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Transfer Roller
The transfer roler is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Transfer Unit
The transfer unit is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Tray 1
Tray 1 is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Tray 2
Tray 2 is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Tray 3
Tray 3 is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Tray 4
Tray 4 is not correctly set.
Not Detected: WasteToner Bottle
Waste toner bottle is not correctly set.
216
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Messages
Description
Not Detected: Yellow Toner
Yellow toner is not correctly set.
Not Detected: Z-fold’g Internal
The Z fold unit is not correctly set.
Not Reached, Data Deleted
Unreached job is deleted.
Not Reached, Data Removed
Unreached job is deleted.
Not Reached, Data Stored
Unreached job is preserved.
Offline
Printer is offline.
Original on Exposure Glass
The original remains on the exposure glass.
Panel Off Mode
The machine is in Panel-Off mode.
Panel Off Mode>>Printing ava.
The machine is in Control Panel-Off mode.
Paper in Duplex Unit
The paper remains in the duplex unit.
Paper in Finisher
The paper remains in Finisher.
Paper Misfeed: ADF
The paper has jammed in Document Feeder.
Paper Misfeed: Duplex Unit
The paper has jammed in the duplex unit.
Paper Misfeed: Input Tray
The paper has jammed in the input tray.
Paper Misfeed: Internal/Output
The paper has jammed inside the machine.
Paper Misfeed: Output Tray
The paper has jammed in output tray.
Paper on Finisher Shift Tray 2
The paper remains in Finisher Shift Tray 2.
Paper on FinisherShiftTray1, 2
The paper remains in Finisher Shift Tray 1 and
2.
Prepaid Card not inserted
The machine is waiting for prepaid card to be
inserted.
Print Complete
The print was completed.
Printing
Printing is in progress.
Processing
Data is being processed.
RC Gate Connection Error
Failed connection with RC Gate.
Ready
The machine is ready to print.
Replace Black PCU
It is time to replace the black photoconductor
unit.
Replace Charger
It is time to replace the charger kit.
Replace Cleaning Web
It is time to replace the Cleaning Web.
Replace Color PCU
It is time to replace the photoconductor unit
(color).
Replace Develop. Unit
It is time to replace the development unit.
Replace Develop. Unit (Black)
It is time to replace the development unit
(black).
217
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Messages
Description
Replace Develop. Unit (Color)
It is time to replace the development unit (color).
Replace Develop. Unit (Cyan)
It is time to replace the development unit (cyan).
Replace Develop. Unit (Magenta)
It is time to replace the development unit (magenta).
Replace Develop. Unit (Yellow)
It is exchange time of the development unit
(yellow).
Replace Fusing Unit
It is time to replace the fusing unit.
Replace Maintenance Kit
It is time to replace the maintenance kit.
Replace PCU
It is time to replace the photoconductor unit.
Replace Transfer Belt
It is time to replace the transfer belt.
SD Card Authentication failed
SD card authentication failed.
Setting Remotely
The RDS setting is being processed.
Skipped due to Error
Skipped the error.
Storage Complete
The storage is complete.
Storage Failed
The storage has failed.
Supplies Order Call failed
The supply order call has failed.
Suspend / Resume Key Error
Finisher stop button was pressed.
Transmission Aborted
The transmission was interrupted.
Transmission Complete
The transmission completion was completed.
Transmission Failed
The transmission has failed.
Tray Error: Chaptering
The paper feed tray specification error has occurred because chaptering as well as the normal paper use the same tray for printing.
Tray Error: Duplex Printing
Selected paper tray cannot be used for duplex
printing.
Unit Left Open: ADF
Document feeder is opened.
Warming Up...
The machine is warming up.
❒ For details about UNIX commands, see UNIX Supplement.
❒ Check the error contents that may be printed in the configuration page. For
details about printing a configuration page, see p.131 “Printing a Configuration Page”.
Printer configuration
You can check the printer configuration using telnet.
218
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
This section explains the checking procedure for input/output tray and printer
language.
• UNIX: Use the “info” command and “rsh”, “rcp”, and “ftp” parameters.
• mshell: Use the “info” command.
❖ Input Tray
Item
Description
No.
ID number of the paper tray
Name
Name of the paper tray
PaperSize
Size of paper loaded in the paper tray
status
Current status of the paper tray
•
Normal:Normal
•
NoInputTray: No tray
•
PaperEnd:No paper
❖ Output Tray
Item
Description
No.
ID number of the output tray
Name
Name of the output tray
status
Current status of the output tray
•
Normal:Normal
•
PaperExist:Paper exist
•
OverFlow:Paper is full
•
Error:Other errors
❖ Emulation
Item
Description
No.
ID number of the printer language used by the
printer
Name
Name of the printer language used in the printer
Version
Version of the printer language
❒ For details about UNIX commands and parameters, see UNIX Supplement.
❒ For details about mshell “info” commands, see p.192 “info”.
219
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Understanding the Displayed Information
This section explains how to read status information returned by the network interface board.
Print Job Information
Use the following command to display print job information:
• UNIX: Use the “info” command and “rsh“, “rcp”, and “ftp” parameters.
• mshell: Use the “info” command.
Item
Description
Rank
Print job status.
•
Active
Printing or preparing for printing.
•
Waiting
Waiting to be transferred to the printer.
Owner
Print request user name.
Job
Print request number.
Files
The name of the document.
Total Size
The size of the data (spooled).
The default is 0 bytes.
❒ For details about UNIX commands and parameters, see UNIX Supplement.
❒ For details about mshell “info” commands, see p.192 “info”.
Print Log Information
This is a record of the most recent 16 jobs printed.
Use the following command to display print log information:
• UNIX: Use the “prnlog” command and “rsh”, “rcp”, and “ftp” parameters.
• telnet : Use the “prnlog” command. See p.195 “prnlog”
Item
Description
ID
Print request ID.
User
Print request user name.
Page
Number of pages printed
220
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Item
Description
Result
Print Request Result
Communication Result
Time
•
OK
Print was completed normally. However, the print result may
not be as required due to printer problems.
•
NG
Printing was not completed normally.
•
Canceled
An “rcp”, “rsh”, or “lpr” command print request was canceled,
possibly due to the printing application. Not applicable to the
“ftp” or “rprinter” command.
Time the print requested was received.
Time of print request reception
User ID
Printer driver-configured User ID.
Appears when the print request ID is specified.
JobName
Name of the document for printing
Appears when the print request ID is specified.
❒ For details about UNIX commands and parameters, see UNIX Supplement.
❒ For details about mshell prnlog commands, see p.195 “prnlog”.
Configuring the Network Interface Board
Use the following command to display network interface board settings:
• telnet : Use the “show” command.
Item
Description
Common
mode
Protocol Up/Down
[up] means “active” and [down] means “inactive”.
appletalk
TCP/IP
netware
SMB
IP over 1394
SCSI print
Ethernet interface
Internal version number
Syslog priority
NVRAM version
Internal version number
221
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Item
Description
Device name
Printer name
Comment
Comment
location
Location of the printer in the SNMP and Rendezvous information
Contact
Administrator information for the printer and contact information in the SNMP information
Soft switch
appletalk
mode
AppleTalk protocol in selection
Net
Network number
Object
Macintosh printer name
Type
Type of printer
Zone
Name of the zone that the printer belongs to
TCP/IP
mode
[up] means “active” and [down] means “inactive”.
ftp
lpr
rsh
telnet
diprint
web
http
ftpc
snmp
ipp
autonet
rendezvous
ssl
rfu
nbt
EncapType
dhcp
Frame type
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (on/off)
Host name
Address
IP address
netmask
Subnet mask
222
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Item
Description
broadcast
Broadcast address
DNS Domain
DNS domain type
gateway
Default gateway address
Access Range[✩]
Access control range
Time server
NTP server address
Time Zone
NTP server time difference
Time server polling time
NTP server interval
SYSLOG server
Home page URL
URL of homepage.
Home page link name
URL of home page
netware
EncapType
Frame type
RPRINTER number
Remote printer number
Print server name
Print server name
File server name
Name of the connect file server
Context name
Context of print server
Switch
mode
Active mode
NDS/Bindery
(this value is fixed)
Packet negotiation
Login Mode
Login mode
Print job timeout
Packet timeout
protocol
Protocol used
SAP interval time
NDS Tree Name
NDS tree name
SMB
Switch
mode
(this value is fixed)
Direct print
(this value is fixed)
Notification
Notification of print job completion
Workgroup name
Name of the workgroup
Computer name
Name of the computer
Comment
Comment
Share name[1]
Share name (model of the printer)
223
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Item
Description
protocol
IEEE 802.11b
Device name
Printer name
dhcp
DHCP (on/off)
Address
IP address
netmask
Subnet mask
broadcast
Broadcast address
DNS Domain
DNS domaintype
ssid
SSID used
Channel range
Channels available for use
Channel
Channel used
Communication mode
IEEE 802.11b interface transmitting mode
Authentication
TX Rate
IEEE 802.11b interface speed
WEP encryption
WEP enabled or disabled
Encryption key
WEP key
IP over 1394
Host name
DHCP
DHCP (on/off)
Address
IP address
netmask
Subnet mask
broadcast
Broadcast address
DNS Domain
SCSI print
Bidi.
Bidirectional setting (on/off)
Bluetooth
Bluetooth mode
Bluetooth connection mode
UPnP
URL
dns
Server[X]:
IP address of the DNS server
Selected DNS Server
Selected DNS server
Domain Name
ether
Domain name on an Ethernet connection
224
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Item
wlan
Description
Domain name on a wireless LAN connection
ip1394
rendezvous
Computer Name
Computer name
Rendezvous Name (ether)
Rendezvous name on an Ethernet connection
Rendezvous Name (wlan)
Rendezvous name on a wireless LAN connection
Rendezvous Name (ip1394)
Rendezvous name on an IP over 1394 connection
location
Location of the printer
Priority (diprint)
diprint priority number
Priority (lpr)
lpr priority number
Priority (ipp)
ipp priority number
IP TTL
IP TTL value
LinkLocal Route for Multi I/F:
Ethernet (ether)
[IEEE 802.11b (wlan)] appears when IEEE 802.11b is
selected. [IP over 1394 (ip1394)] appears when
IEEE1394 is selected.
DDNS
ether
Dynamic DNS function on an Ethernet connection
(on/off)
wlan
Dynamic DNS function on a wireless LAN connection
(on/off)
ip1394
Dynamic DNS function on an IP over 1394 connection
(on/off)
wins
ether
Primary WINS
IP address of the primary WINS server on an Ethernet
connection
Secondary WINS
IP address of the secondary WINS server on an Ethernet connection
ip1394
Primary WINS
IP address of the primary WINS server on an IP over
1394 connection
Secondary WINS
IP address of the secondary WINS server on an IP over
1394 connection
SNMP
SNMPv1v2
SNMPv3
protocol
225
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Item
Description
v1Trap
v2Trap
v3Trap
SNMPv1v2Remoto Setting
SNMPv3 Privacy
Shell mode
Mode of the remote maintenance tool
226
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Message List
This is a list of messages that appear in the printer's system log. The system log
can be viewed using the “syslog” command.
System Log Information
Use the following command to display the system log information:
• UNIX: Use the “syslog” command and “rsh”, “rcp”, and “ftp” parameters.
• telnet : Use the “syslog” command.
Message
Problem and solutions
Access to NetWare server <file server name>
denied. Either there is no account for this print
server on the NetWare server or the password
was incorrect.
(In the print server mode) Login to the file server failed. Make sure that the print server is registered on the file server. If a password is
specified for the print server, delete it.
add_sess: bad trap addr:<IpAddress>, community:<community name>
The IP address (0.0.0.0.) is unavailable when
the community access type is TRAP. Specify
the host IP address for the TRAP destination.
add_sess: community<community name> already defined.
The same community name already exists.
Use another community name.
add_sess_ipx: bad trap addr: <IPXaddress>,
community:<community name>
The IPX address (00:00:00:00:00:00) is unavailable when the community access type is
TRAP. Specify the host IPX address for the
TRAP destination.
add_sess_ipx: community <community name>
already defined.
The same community name already exists.
Use another community name.
ANONYMOUS FTP LOGIN FROM <IP address>, <password>
An anonymous login has been made with a
password <password> from the host <IP address>.
anpd start. (AppleTalk)
The ANPD (AppleTalk Network Package Daemon) service has started.
Attach FileServer= <file server name>
Connection to the file server as the nearest
server has been established.
Attach to print queue <print queue name>
(In the print server mode) Attached to the print
queue.
Cannot create service connection
(In the remote printer mode) Connection to the
file server has not been established. The number of file server users may have exceeded the
maximum capacity of the file server.
Cannot find rprinter (<print server
name>/<printer number>)
The printer with the number displayed on the
print server does not exist. Make sure that the
printer number is registered on the print server.
227
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Message
Problem and solutions
Change IP address from DHCP Server.
The IP address changes when DHCP lease is
renewed. To always assign the same IP address, set a static IP address to the DHCP
server.
child process exec error! (process name)
The network service failed to start. Turn the
printer off and then on. If this does not work,
contact your service or sales representative.
Connected DHCP Server(<DHCP server address>).
The IP address was successfully received
from the DHCP server.
connection from <IP address>
Login was from the host IP address.
Could not attach to FileServer<error number>
(In the remote printer mode) Connection to the
file server has not been established. The file
server has refused the connection. Check the
file server configuration.
Could not attach to PServer<print server>
(In the remote printer mode) Connection to the
print server has not been established. The
print server has refused the connection. Check
the print server configuration.
Current Interface Speed:xxxMbps
Speed of the network (10 Mbps or 100 Mbps)
Current IP address <current IP address>
The IP address <current IP address> was received from the dhcp server.
Current IPX address<IPX address>
Current ipx address
DHCP lease time expired.
DHCP lease time has expired. The printer tries
to discover the DHCP server again. The IP address until now becomes invalid.
DHCP server not found.
The DHCP server was not found. Make sure
that the DHCP is on the network.
dhcpcd start.
The DHCPCD service (dhcp client service)
has started.
Duplicate IP=<IP address>(from <MAC address>).
The same IP address is used. Each IP address
must be unique. Check the address of the device indicated in [MAC address].
Established SPX Connection with PServer,(RPSocket=<socket number>, connID=<connection ID>)
(In the remote printer mode) Connection to the
print server has been established.
exiting
The lpd service has ended and the system is
exiting the process.
Exit pserver
(In the print server mode) The print server
function is disabled because the necessary
print server settings have not been made.
Frametype =<frame type name>
The frame type name is configured to be used
on NetWare.
httpd start.
The httpd service has started.
228
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Message
Problem and solutions
inetd start.
The inetd service has started.
IPP cancel-job: permission denied.
The printer could not authenticate the name of
the user attempting to cancel a job.
ipp disable.
Printing with ipp is disabled.
ipp enable.
Printing with ipp is enabled.
IPP job canceled. jobid=%d.
The spooled job was canceled due to error or
user request.
LeaseTime=<lease time>(sec), RenewTime=<renew time>(sec).
The resource lease time received from the
DHCP server is displayed in [lease time] in
seconds. The renewal time is displayed in [renew time] in seconds.
Login to fileserver <file server name>
(<IPX|IP>,<NDS|BINDERY|NDS|BINDERY>)
(In the print server mode) Login to the file server is in the NDS or BINDERY mode.
multid start.
Data transmission service for multiprotocols
has started.
nbstart start. (NetBEUI)
The service for NetBEUI protocol stack setting
has started.
NBT Registration Broadcast(<NetBIOS
name>)
Use a local broadcast to map the NetBIOS
name with the IP address.
nbtd start.
The nbtd service has started (available only in
the DHCP mode).
NetBEUI Computer Name =<computer name> The NetBEUI computer name is specified.
nmsd start. (NetBEUI)
The nmsd (Name Server Daemon) service has
started.
npriter start. (NetWare)
(In the remote printer mode) The NetWare service has started.
nwstart start. (NetWare)
The service for NetWare protocol stack setting
has started.
Open log file <file name>
(In the print server mode) The specified log file
has been opened.
papd start. (AppleTalk)
The AppleTalk print service has started.
phy release file open failed.
Replacing the network interface board is required. Contact your sales or service representative.
Print queue <print queue name> cannot be
serviced by printer 0, <print server name>
(In the print server mode) The print queue cannot be established. Make sure that print queue
exists on the specified file server.
Print server <print server name>has no printer. (In the print server mode) The printer is not assigned to the print server. Using NWadmin, assign the printer, and then restart it.
print session full
No more print jobs can be accepted.
229
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Message
Problem and solutions
Printer <printer name> has no queue
(In the print server mode) The print queue is
not assigned to the printer. Using NWadmin,
assign the print queue to the printer, and then
restart it.
pserver start. (NetWare)
(In the print server mode) The NetWare service has started.
Required computer name (<Computer name>)
is duplicated name
The start job found the computer name by adding the computer name to the suffix (0,1...). Set
a new computer name that is unique.
Required file server (<file server name>) not
found
The required file server is not found.
restarted.
The lpd service has started.
sap enable, saptype=<SAP type>, sapname=<SAP name>
The SAP function has started. The SAP packet
is issued to advertise the service on the SAP
table on the NetWare server.
session <community name> already defined.
The requested community name is not defined.
session_ipx <community name> not defined.
The requested community name is not defined.
Set context to <NDS context name>
An NDS context name has been set.
shutdown signal received. network service re- The network service is rebooting.
booting...
smbd start. (NetBEUI)
The smbd service has started.
SMTPC: failed to get smtp server ip-address.
The SMTP server IP address could not be obtained. This could be because:
SMTPC: failed to connect smtp server. timeout.
•
The specified DNS server could not be
found.
•
No connection to the network has been established.
•
The specified DNS server could not be
found.
•
An incorrect DNS server is specified.
•
The specified SMTP server IP address
could not be found in the DNS server.
Connection to the SMTP server failed due to
timeout. This could be because:
•
The specified SMTP server name is incorrect.
•
No connection to the network has been established.
•
The network configuration is incorrect, so
there is no response from the SMTP server.
230
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Message
Problem and solutions
SMTPC: refused connect by smtp server.
Connection to the SMTP server is denied. This
could be because:
SMTPC: no smtp server. connection close.
SMTPC: failed to connect smtp server.
SMTPC: username or password wasn’t correct. [response code] (information)
•
A server other than the SMTP server has
been specified.
•
The specified SMTP server port number is
incorrect.
Connection to the SMTP server failed due to
no response from SMTP. This could be because:
•
A server other than the SMTP server has
been specified.
•
The specified SMTP server port number is
incorrect.
Connection to the SMTP server failed. This
could be because:
•
No connection to the network has been established.
•
The network configuration is incorrect, so
there is no response from the SMTP server.
•
The specified SMTP server name is incorrect.
•
An incorrect SMTP server is specified.
•
The specified SMTP server IP address
could not be found in the DNS server.
•
A server other than the SMTP server has
been specified.
•
The specified SMTP server port number is
incorrect.
Connection to the SMTP server failed. This
could be because:
•
The specified SMTP user name is incorrect.
•
The specified SMTP password is incorrect.
Check the SMTP user name and password.
Snmp over ip is ready.
Communication over TCP/IP with snmp is
available.
Snmp over IP over 1394 is ready.
Communication over IP over 1394 with snmp
is available.
Snmp over ipx is ready.
Communication over IPX with snmp is available.
SNMPD: account is unavailable:
User account is disabled. This could be because it use the same account name as the
administrator account.
Same account name be used.
231
Monitoring and Configuring the Printer
Message
Problem and solutions
SNMPD: account is unavailable:
User account is disabled. This could be because the authentication password is not set,
and only the encryption account is set.
The authentication password is not set up.
SNMPD: account is unavailable:
encryption is impossible.
Encryption is not possible and account is disabled. This could be because:
•
Security option is not installed.
•
Encryption password has not been specified.
SNMPD: trap account is unavailable.
v3Trap cannot be sent. This could be because
the Trap destination account is different from
the account specified by the printer.
snmpd start.
The snmpd service has started.
started.
The direct print service has started.
Started.
The rendezvous function is enabled.
Terminated.
The rendezvous function is disabled.
The print server received error <error number>
during attempt to log in to the network. Access
to the network was denied.Verify that the print
server name and password are correct.
Login to the file server failed. The print server
is not registered or a password is specified.
Register the print server without specifying a
password.
WINS name refresh :Server No Response
There was no response to the update request
from the print server. Check that the WINS
server address is correct and the WINS server
is working properly.
WINS name registration/refresh error code(er- Set unique NetBIOS names.
rornumber)
Check that the WINS server address is correct
and the WINS server is working properly.
WINS name registration:Server No Response
There was no response to the registration request from the server. Check that the WINS
server address is correct and the WINS server
is working properly.
WINS server address0.0.0.0
The WINS server was not specified. Specify
the WINS server address to match the printer
name with WINS.
WINS Server=<WINS server address> NetBIOS Name=<NetBIOS name>
The printer name was successfully registered.
WINS wrong scopeID
The scope ID is incorrect.
Specify the correct scope ID.
❒ For details about UNIX commands and parameters, see UNIX Supplement.
❒ For details about “syslog” command, see p.206 “syslog”.
232
Using a Printer Server
Preparing Printer Server
This section explains how to configure the printer as a Windows network printer.
The printer is configured to enabling network clients to use it. When the network
printer is connected via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client, you can set the printing
notification function to notify clients of the results of their print jobs.
❒ Under Windows 2000, Windows XP Professional, or Windows Server 2000,
to change printer properties in the [Printer] folder, you need Printer Management access authentication; under Windows NT 4.0, Full Control access authentication. Log on to the file server as an Administrator or member of the
PowerUsers group.
A Open the [Printers] window from the [Start] menu.
The [Printers] window appears.
B Click the icon of the printer you want to use. On the [File] menu, click
[Properties]. The printer properties appear.
C On the [Sharing] tab, click [Shared as:].
D To share the printer with users using a different version of Windows,
click [Additional Drivers...].
❒ If you have installed an alternative driver by selecting [Shared as:] during the
printer driver installation, this step can be ignored.
E Click [OK]. Close the printer properties.
Printing notification via SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
Follow the procedure below to configure the printer to use the printing notification
function of SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
Setting the print server
❒ Under Windows 2000, Windows XP Professional, or Windows Server 2000,
to change printer properties in the [Printer] folder, you need Printer Management access authentication; under Windows NT 4.0, Full Control access authentication. Log on to the file server as an Administrator or member of the
PowerUsers group.
A From the [Start] button on the task bar, point to [Program], point to [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client], and then click [Print Server Setting].
G1168612_1.00
Copyright © 2004
233
Using a Printer Server
The print server setting dialog box appears.
B Select the [Notify Client of Printing] check box, and click [OK].
After print server setting is made, a dialog box appears. Confirm the dialog
box content, and click [OK].
Click [Cancel] to interrupt the procedure.
C A dialog box appears for client setting. Click [OK].
The print server setting is complete. Each client must be set to receive print
notification.
❒ Current printing jobs restart from the beginning after the spooler pauses
briefly.
❒ When the expansion function is not used, the function is automatically set
as available.
Setting a Client
A From the [Start] button on the task bar, point to [Program], point to [SmartDeviceMonitor for Client], and then click [Setting Expansion Function].
A dialog box for setting the expansion function appears.
B Select the [Use the expansion function] check box in [Notify Printing].
C Select the [Notify when using the print server] check box.
D Click [OK].
The dialog box for setting the expansion function closes. The client setting is
completed.
❒ Set the printing notification function on the printer driver as well as on
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client.
234
Using a Printer Server
Using NetWare
This section describes the setting procedure for network printers in the NetWare
environment. In the NetWare environment, you can connect the printer as a
“print server” or “remote printer”.
❖ Setting procedure
• When using the printer as a print server
A Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
B Setting the network interface board.
C Turning the printer off and then back on.
• When using the printer as a remote printer
A Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.
B Setting the network interface board.
C Setting NetWare.
D Starting the print server.
❒ This procedure assumes an environment is already prepared for normal NetWare running the printing service setting.
❒ The procedure is explained with the following example settings:
• File server’s name …CAREE
• Print server’s name …PSERV
• Printer’s name …R-PRN
• Queue name …R-QUEUE
❖ Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
To use the printer in a NetWare environment, use SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin to set the NetWare printing environment.
❒ The NetWare Client provided by Novell is required to set the printing environment using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin under the following environments:
• NDS mode in Windows 95/98/Me
• NDS or Bindery mode in Windows 2000/XP, Windows NT 4.0
For details about installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see p.170 “Installing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin”.
235
Using a Printer Server
❖ Printers listed by SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin lists printers connected to the network. If you
cannot identify the printer you want to configure, print configuration page, and
then check the printer name.
Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 3.x)
Follow the procedure below to connect the printer as a print server using NetWare 3.x.
A Log on to the file server as a supervisor or supervisor equivalent.
B Start NIB Setup Tool from the [Start] menu.
C Click [Wizard], and then click [OK].
D Select a printer you want to configure.
E Enter the printer name in the [Device Name] box and a comment in the
[Comment] box, and then click [Next].
F Select the [NetWare] check box, and then click [Next].
G Click [Bindery mode], enter the file server name in the [File Server Name:] box,
and then click [Next].
In the [File Server Name:] box, enter the name of the file server in which a print
server is created. You can also click [Browse] to browse through available file
servers.
H Enter the print server name in the [Print Server Name] box, the printer name
in the [Printer Name] box, and the print queue name in the [Print Queue Name]
box, and then click [Next].
• In the [Print Server Name] box, enter the name of the NetWare print server
using up to 47 characters.
• In the [Printer Name] box, enter the name of the NetWare printer.
• In the [Print Queue Name] box, enter the name of the print queue to be added
to NetWare.
I Check the settings, and then click [Next].
The settings are applied, and NIB Setup Tool quits.
J Turn the printer off and then on again.
❒ To check that the configuration is made correctly, enter the following from
the command prompt.
F:> USERLIST
236
Using a Printer Server
❒ If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears as
a connected user.
❒ If you cannot identify the printer you want to configure, check the printer
name with the configuration page printed from the printer. For details about
printing a configuration page, see p.131 “Printing a Configuration Page”.
❒ If no printer names appear in the list, match the frame types of IPX/SPXs
for the computer and printer. Use the [Network] dialog box of Windows to
change the frame type of the computer.
For details about changing the printer's frame type (“NW Frame Type”),
see “Configuring the Printer”, Setup Guide.
Setting Up as a Print Server (NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, 6/6.5)
Follow the procedure below to connect the printer as a print server using NetWare 4.x, NetWare 5/5.1, or NetWare 6.0.
❒ When using the printer as a print server in NetWare 4.x, NetWare 5/5.1, or
NetWare 6.0, set it to the NDS mode.
❒ When using NetWare 5/5.1 or NetWare 6.0, set the printer as a print server.
A Log on to the file server as a supervisor or supervisor equivalent.
B Start NIB Setup Tool on the [Start] menu.
C Click [Wizard], and then click [OK].
D Select a printer you want to configure.
E Enter the printer name in the [Device Name] box and a comment in the
[Comment] box, and then click [Next].
F Select the [NetWare] check box, and then click [Next].
G Click [NDS mode], enter the file server name in the [File Server Name:] box,
the NDS tree name in the [NDS Tree:] box, and the context in the [NDS Context] box, and then click [Next].
In the [File Server Name:] box, enter the name of the file server in which a print
server is created. You can also click [Browse] to browse through available file
servers and NDS context names.
In the [NDS Tree:] box, enter the name of the NDS tree in which a print server
is created using up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Hyphens and underscores
can also be used. You can also click [Browse] to browse through available
NDS trees.
237
Using a Printer Server
For a context, object names are entered from the lowest object with each object separated by a period. For example, if you want to create a print server in
NET under DS, enter “NET.DS”.
H Enter the print server name in the [Print Server Name] box, the printer name
in the [Printer Name] box, the print queue name in the [Print Queue Name]
box, and the print queue volume in the [Print Queue Volume] box, and then
click [Next].
• In the [Print Server Name] box, enter the name of the NetWare print server
using up to 47 characters.
• In the [Printer Name] box, enter the name of the NetWare printer.
• In [Print Queue Name] box, enter the print queue volume.
• In [Print Queue Volume], type the print queue volume. For a volume, object
names are entered from the lowest object with each object separated by a
period. You can also click [Browse] to browse through available volumes.
I Check the settings, and then click [Next].
The settings are applied, and NIB Setup Tool quits.
J Turn the printer off and then on again.
❒ To check that the configuration is made correctly, enter the following from
the command prompt.
F:> NLIST USER /A/B
❒ If the printer works as configured, the name of the print server appears as
a connected user.
❒ If you cannot identify the printer you want to configure, check the printer
name with the configuration page printed from the printer. For details about
printing a configuration page, see p.131 “Printing a Configuration Page”.
❒ If no printer names appear in the list, match the frame types of IPX/SPXs
for the computer and printer. Use the [Network] dialog box of Windows to
change the frame type of the computer.
For details about changing the printer's frame type (“NW Frame Type”),
see “Configuring the Printer”, Setup Guide.
When using the printer in a pure IP environment of NetWare 5/5.1 or NetWare 6.0/6.5, see p.238 “Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5/5.1 or 6/6.5 Environment”.
Using Pure IP in the NetWare 5/5.1 or 6/6.5 Environment
Follow the procedure below to connect the printer as a print server in a pure IP
environment of NetWare 5/5.1.
238
Using a Printer Server
❒ When creating a queued print server in a pure IP environment of NetWare
5/5.1 or NetWare 6.0, create a print queue on the file server using NetWare
Administrator.
❒ This printer is not available as a remote printer for use in a pure IP environment.
❒ To use the printer in a pure IP environment, set it to TCP/IP.
Setting up using NIB Setup Tool
A Log on to the file server as an administrator or administrator equivalent.
B Start NIB Setup Tool on the [Start] menu.
C Click [Property Sheet], and then click [OK].
D Select a printer you want to configure.
E On the [NetWare] tab, Select [File Server Mode] or [NDS mode] in the [Logon
Mode] area.
When [File Server Mode] is selected, the network connection is established
based on the string entered in the [File Server Name(F):] box.
When [NDS mode] is selected, the network connection is established based on
the string entered in the [NDS Tree:] box.
F In the [Print Server Name] box, enter the name of the print server.
G In the [File Server Name:] box, enter the name of the file server in which a
print server is created.
You can also click [Browse] to browse through available file servers.
H Enter the NDS tree name in the [NDS Tree:] box.
Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Hyphens and underscores can also
be used.
I In the [NDS Context] box, enter the context of the print server.
You can also click [Browse] to browse through available NDS trees and NDS
contexts.
For a context, object names are entered from the lowest object with each object separated by a period. For example, if you want to create a print server in
Net under DS, enter “NET.DS”.
239
Using a Printer Server
J In the [Print Server Operation Mode] area, click [As Print Server].
K Click [OK] to close the [NIB Setup Tool] dialog box.
Setting up using NWadmin
A From Windows, start NWadmin.
For details about NWadmin, see the NetWare manuals.
B Select the object in which the print queue is located in the directory tree,
and then click [Create] on the [Object] menu.
C In the [Class of new object] box, click [Print Queue], and then click [OK].
D In the [Print Queue Name] box, enter the name of the print queue.
E In the [Print Queue Volume] box, click [Browse].
F In the [Available objects] box, click the volume in which the print queue is
created, and then click [OK].
G Check the settings, and then click [Create].
H Select the object in which the printer is located, and then click [Create]
on the [Object] menu.
I In the [Class of new object] box, click [Printer], and then click [OK]. For NetWare 5, click [Printer (Non NDPS)].
J In the [Printer name] box, enter the printer name
K Select the [Define additional properties] check box, and then click [Create].
L Click [Assignments], and then click [Add] in the [Assignments] area.
M In the [Available objects] box, click the queue you, and then click [OK].
N Click [Configuration], click [Parallel] in the [Printer type] list, and then click
[Communication].
O Click [Manual load] in the [Communication type] area, and then click [OK].
P Check the settings, and then click [OK].
Q Select a context specified using NIB Setup Tool, and then click [Create]
on the [Object] menu.
R In the [Class of new object] box, click [Print Server], and then click [OK]. For
NetWare 5, click [Print Sever (Non NDPS)].
240
Using a Printer Server
S In the [Print Server Name] box, enter the print server name.
Use the same print server name specified using NIB Setup Tool.
T Select the [Define additional properties] check box, and then click [Create].
U Click [Assignments], and then click [Add] in the [Assignments] area.
V In the [Available objects] box, click the queue you created, and then click
[OK].
W Check the settings, and then click [OK].
X Start the print server by entering the following from the console of the
NetWare server.
If the print server is in operation, quit and restart it.
❖ To exit
CAREE: unload pserver
❖ To start
CAREE: load pserver print_server_name
Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 3.x)
Follow the procedure below to use the printer as a remote printer under NetWare
3.x.
Setting up using NIB Setup Tool
A Log on to the file server as a supervisor or supervisor equivalent.
B Start NIB Setup Tool from [Start] menu.
C Click [Property Sheet], and then click [OK].
D Select a printer you want to configure.
E On the [NetWare] tab, enter the name of the print server in the [Print Server
Name] box.
F In the [File Server Name:] box, enter the name of the file server in which a
print server is created.
You can also click [Browse] to browse through available file servers.
G In the [Print Server Operation Mode] area, click [As Remote Printer].
H In the [Remote Printer No.] box, enter the printer number.
241
Using a Printer Server
Use the same printer number created in the print server.
I A confirmation message appears. Click [OK].
J On the [NIB] menu, click [Exit].
Setting up using PCONSOLE
A Enter “PCONSOLE” from the command prompt.
F:> PCONSOLE
B Create a print queue.
When using the existing print queue, go to the procedure for creating a printer.
C From the [Available Options] menu, select [Print Queue Information], and then
press the {Enter} key.
D Press {Insert} key, and then enter a print queue name.
E Press {ESC} key to return to the [Available Options] menu.
F Set up the network connection to a printer.
G On the [Available Options] menu, click [Print Server Information],
and then
press the {ENTER} key.
H To create a new print server, press the {INSERT} key, and then enter a
print server name.
For a currently defined print server, select a print server in the [Print Server] list.
Use the same printer name specified using NIB Setup Tool.
I From the [Print Server Information] menu, select [Print Server Configuration].
J From the [Print Server Configuration] menu, select [Printer Configuration].
K Select the printer indicated as [Not Installed].
Use the same printer number specified as the remote printer number using
NIB Setup Tool.
L To change the printer name, enter a new name.
A name “Printer x” is assigned to the printer. The “x” stands for the number of
the selected printer.
M As type, select [Remote Parallel, LPT1].
The IRQ, Buffer size, Starting form, and Queue service mode are automatically configured.
N Press the {ESC} key, and then click [Yes] on the confirmation message.
242
Using a Printer Server
O Press the {ESC} key to return to [Print Server Configuration Menu].
P Assign print queues to the created printer.
Q From [Print Server Configuration Menu], select [Queues Serviced By Printer].
R Select the printer created.
S Press the {INSERT} key to select a queue serviced by the printer.
You can select several queues.
T Follow the instructions on the screen to make other necessary settings.
Following these steps, check that the queues are assigned.
U Press the {ESC} key until “Exit?” appears, and then select [Yes] to exit
PCONSOLE.
V Start the print server by entering the following from the console of the
NetWare server.
If the print server is in operation, quit and restart it.
❖ To quit
CAREE: unload pserver
❖ To start
CAREE: load pserver print_server_name
❒ If the printer works as configured, the message “Waiting for job” appears.
Setting Up as a Remote Printer (NetWare 4.x, 5/5.1, 6/6.5)
Follow the procedure below to use the printer as a remote printer under NetWare
4.x, 5/5.1 and 6.
❒ To use the printer as a remote printer under NetWare 4.x/5/5.1, set it to NDS
mode.
❒ Do not use the printer as a remote printer when Pure IP is used.
Setting up using NIB Setup Tool
A Log on to the file server as an administrator or administrator equivalent.
B StartNIB Setup Tool from [Start] menu.
C Click [Property Sheet], and then click [OK].
243
Using a Printer Server
D Select a printer you want to configure.
E Click [NetWare].
F In the [Logon Mode] area, click [File Server Mode] or [NDS mode].
If [File Server Mode] is selected, the network connection is established based
on the string you entered.
If [NDS mode] is selected, the network connection is established based on the
string you entered.
G In the [Print Server Name(P):] box, enter the name of the print server.
Use the same print server name in NWadmin. Enter up to 47 alphanumeric
characters.
H In the [File Server Name(F):] box, enter the name of the file server in which
a print server is created.
You can also click [Browse...] to browse through available file servers. Enter
up to 47 alphanumeric characters.
I In the [NDS Tree(T):] box, enter the NDS tree name and create the file serv-
er.
You can also click [Browse...] to browse through available NDS trees and NDS
contexts. Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Hyphens and underscores
can also be used.
J In the [NDS Context(C):] box, enter a context in which the print server is
created.
Enter up to 127 alphanumeric characters.
For context, object names from Root are entered from the lowest object, with
each object separated by a period. For example, to create a print server in the
NETWORK object under the organization object DS of Root, enter “NETWORK.DS”.
K In the [Print Server Option Mode] area, click [As Remote Printer(R)].
L In the [Remote Printer No.(N)] box, enter the printer number. Use the same
printer number created.
M Click [OK] to close [NIB Setup Tool].
Setting up using NWadmin
A From Windows, start NWadmin.
For details about NWadmin, see the NetWare manuals.
244
Using a Printer Server
B Set up the network connection to a print queue. Select the object in
which the print queue is located in the directory tree, and then click [Create] on the [Object] menu.
C In the [Class of new object] box, click [Print Queue], and then click [OK].
D In the [Print Queue Name] box, enter the name of the print queue.
E In the [Print Queue Volume] box, click [Browse].
F In the [Available objects] box, click the volume in which the print queue is
created, and then click [OK].
G Check the settings, and then click [Create].
H Set up the network connection to a printer. Select the object in which the
printer is located, and then click [Create] on the [Object] menu.
I In the [Class of new object] box, click [Printer], and then click [OK]. For NetWare 5, click [Printer (Non NDPS)].
J In the [Printer name] box, enter the printer name
K Select the [Define additional properties] check box, and then click [Create].
L Assign print queues to the created printer. Click [Assignments], and then
click [Add] in the [Assignments] area.
M In the [Available objects] box, click the queue you created, and then click
[OK].
N Click [Configuration], click [Parallel] in the [Printer type] list, and then click
[Communication].
O Click [Manual load] in the [Communication type] area, and then click [OK].
Check the settings, and then click [OK].
P Set up the network connection to a print server. Select a context specified using NIB Setup Tool, and then click [Create] on the [Object] menu.
Q In the [Class of new object] box, click [Print Server], and then click [OK]. For
NetWare 5, click [Print Sever (Non NDPS)].
R In the [Print Server Name] box, enter the print server name.
Use the same print server name specified using NIB Setup Tool.
S Select the [Define additional properties] check box, and then click [Create].
T Assign the printer to the created print server. Click [Assignments], and
then click [Add] in the [Assignments] area.
245
Using a Printer Server
U In the [Available objects] box, click the queue you created, and then click
[OK].
V In the [Printers] area, click the printer you assigned, and then click [Printer
Number]
W Enter the printer number, and then click [OK]. Check the settings, and
then click [OK].
Use the same printer number specified as the remote printer number using
NIB Setup Tool.
X Start the print server by entering the following from the console of the
NetWare server.
If the print server is in operation, quit and restart it.
❖ To exit
CAREE: unload pserver
❖ To start
CAREE: load pserver print_server_name
246
Special Operations under Windows
Printing Files Directly from Windows
You can print files directly using Windows commands. For example, you can
print PostScript files for PostScript 3.
❖ Windows 95/98/Me
You can print files directly using “ftp” command.
❖ Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0
You can print files directly using “lpr”, “rcp” or “ftp” command.
Setup
Follow the procedure below to make network environment settings.
A Enable TCP/IP with the control panel, and then set up the printer’s network environment about TCP/IP including IP addresses.
TCP/IP of the printer is set as default.
B Install a TCP/IP in Windows to set up the network environment.
Consult the network administrator for the local setting information.
C To print under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT
4.0, install “Printing service for UNIX” as the network application. To
print under Windows NT 4.0, install “Microsoft TCP/IP printing” as the
network application.
For details about setting up IP address, see Setup Guide.
For details about setting the IP address of the printer using DHCP, see
p.282 “Using DHCP”.
This completes the setup for specifying a printer using an IP address when
printing. When using a host name to specify a printer, proceed to p.247
“Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address” and continue the setup.
Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address
When a host name is defined, you can specify a printer by host name instead of
IP address. The host names vary depending on the network environment.
When using DNS
Use the host name set to the data file on the DNS server.
G1168612_1.00
Copyright © 2004
247
Special Operations under Windows
When setting the IP address of a printer using DHCP
Use the printer name on the configuration page as the host name.
For details about printing a configuration page, see p.131 “Printing a Configuration Page”.
In other cases
Add the IP address and host name of the network printer to the hosts file on the
computer used for printing. Methods of addition vary depending on operating
systems.
Windows 95/98/Me
A Copy
WINDOWSHOSTS.SAM to the same directory and name it
“HOSTS” with no extension.
B Open the “WINDOWSHOSTS” file created using memo pad files, for instance.
C Add an IP address and host name to the hosts file using the following
format:
192.168.15.16 host # NP
”192.168.15.16” is the IP address, “host” is the printer's host name, and “#NP”
is replaced by comments. Insert a space or tab between “192.168.15.16” and
“host”, between “host” and “#NP” respectively, using one line for this format.
D Save the file.
Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0
A Open the hosts file using memo pad files, for instance.
The hosts file is in the following folder:
WINNTSYSTEM32DRIVERSETCHOSTS
”WINNT” is the directory of the installation destination for Windows 2000/XP,
Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0.
B Add an IP address and host name to the hosts file using the following
format:
192.168.15.16 host # NP
”192.168.15.16” is the IP address, “host” is the printer's host name, and “#NP”
is replaced by comments. Insert a space or tab between “192.168.15.16” and
“host”, between “host” and “#NP” respectively, using one line for this format.
248
Special Operations under Windows
C Save the file.
Printing Commands
The following explains printing operations using the “lpr”, “rcp”, and “ftp” commands.
Enter commands using the command prompt window. The location of the command prompts varies depending on operating systems:
• Windows 95/98
[Start] - [Programs] - [MS-DOS Prompt]
• Windows Me
[Start] - [Programs] - [Accessories] - [MS-DOS Prompt]
• Windows 2000
[Start] - [Programs] - [Accessories] - [Command Prompt]
• Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
[Start] - [All Programs] - [Accessories] - [Command Prompt]
• Windows NT 4.0
[Start] - [Programs] - [Command Prompt]
❒ Match the data format of the file to be printed with the emulation mode of the
printer.
❒ If the message “print requests full” appears, no print jobs can be accepted. Try
again when sessions end. For each command, the amount of possible sessions is indicated as follows:
• lpr: 5(When the spool printing function is available: 10)
• rcp, rsh: 5
• ftp: 3
❒ Enter the file name in a format including the path from the directory executing
commands.
The “option” specified in a command is an intrinsic printer option and its syntax is similar to printing from UNIX. For details, see UNIX Supplement.
lpr
❖ When specifying a printer by IP address
c:> lpr -Sprinter's IP address [-Poption] [-ol] \pass
name\file name
249
Special Operations under Windows
❖ When using a host name instead of an IP address
c:> lpr -Sprinter's host name [-Poption] [-ol] \pass
name\file name
When printing a binary file, add the “-ol” option (lowercase O, and lowercase
L).
When using a printer with the host name “host” to print a PostScript file named
“file 1” located in the “C:\PRINT” directory, the command line is as follows:
c:> lpr -Shost -Pfiletype=RPS -ol C:\PRINT\file1
rcp
First, register the printer's host name in the hosts file.
c:> rcp [-b] \pass name\file name [pass name\file name...]
printer's host name:[option]
❒ In file names, “*” and “?” can be used as wild cards.
❒ When printing a binary file, add the “-b” option.
When using a printer with the host name “host” to print a PostScript file named
“file 1” or “file 2” located in the “C:\PRINT” directory, the command line is as follows:
c:> rcp -b C:\PRINT\file1 C:\PRINT\file2 host:filetype=RPS
For details about registering the printer's host name in the hosts file, see
p.247 “Using a Host Name Instead of an IP Address”.
ftp
Use the “put” or “mput” command according to the number of files to be printed.
❖ When one file is printed
ftp> put \pass name\file name [option]
❖ When multiple files are printed
ftp> mput \pass name\file name [\pass name\file name...]
[option]
Follow the procedure below to print using the “ftp” command.
A Formulate the printer's IP address or the host name of the hosts file
printer as an argument and use the “ftp” command.
% ftp printer's IP address
B Enter the user name and password, and then press the {# Enter} key.
There is no default user name while “password” is the default password.
250
Special Operations under Windows
User:
Password:
C When printing a binary file, set the file mode to binary.
ftp> bin
When printing a binary file in ASCII mode, print may not come out correctly.
D Specify files to be printed.
The following shows the examples of printing a PostScript file named “file 1”
in the “C:\PRINT” directory and printing file 1 and file 2.
ftp> put C:\PRINT\file1 filetype=RPS
ftp> mput C:\PRINT\file1 C:\PRINT\file2
E Quit ftp.
ftp> bye
❒ “=”, “,”, “_”, and “;”cannot be used for filenames. File names will be read as
option strings.
❒ For “mput” command, option can not be defined.
❒ For “mput” command, “*” and “?” can be used as wild cards in file names.
❒ When printing a binary file in ASCII mode, print may not come out correctly.
251
Mac OS Configuration
Mac OS
This section explains how to configure a Mac OS to use EtherTalk and USB.
The following explains how to configure Mac OS 9.1. If you are not using Mac
OS 9.1, see the manual of the Mac OS you are using for details
❒ For Mac OS 8.6 and higher. (Mac OS X Classic environment is supported.)
❒ The PostScript 3 printer driver is stored in the following folder on the CDROM.
Mac OS 8 and 9:PS Driver:(language):Disk1
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver and PPD File
It is necessary to install a printer driver and PPD files to print from a Mac OS.
Follow the procedure below to install a printer driver and a PPD file into a Mac
OS using Mac OS 8.6 and higher.
PostScript 3 Printer Driver
A Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
B Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.
C Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
D Double-click the [PS Driver] folder.
E Double-click the folder of the language you use.
F Open [DISK1], and then double-click the installer icon.
G Follow the instructions on the screen.
PPD Files
A Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.
B Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
C Double-click the [Printer Descriptions] folder.
D Double-click the folder of the language you use.
G1168612_1.00
Copyright © 2004
252
Mac OS Configuration
E Open the [DISK1] folder.
F Drag the PPD file and the plugin file into [Printer Descriptions] in [Extensions]
under [System Folder].
G Restart the Mac OS.
Setting Up PPD Files
❒ Make sure that the printers are connected to an AppleTalk network before
performing the following procedure.
A On the [Apple] menu, click [Chooser].
B Click the Adobe PS icon.
C In the [Select a PostScript Printer:] list, click the name of the printer you want
to use.
D Click [Create].
E Click the printer you want to use, and then click [Select].
A PPD file is set up and the Adobe PS icon appears at the left of the printer
name in the list. Follow the procedure on p.254 “Setting Up Options” to make
option settings; otherwise close the [Chooser] dialog box.
Creating a Desktop Printer Icon
❒ Make sure that printers are connected to the USB before performing the following procedure.
To use a printer connected by USB, create a desktop printer icon.
A Double-click [Desktop Printer Utility] in the [AdobePS Components] folder.
B Click [AdobePS] in [With:], click [Printer (USB)] in [Create Desktop], and then
click [OK].
C Click [Change] in [USB Printer Selection].
D Select the model you are using in [Select a USB Printer:], and then click [OK].
E Click [Auto Setup] in [PostScriptTM Printer Description (PPD) File].
F Click [Create].
G Enter the printer name, and then click [Save].
253
Mac OS Configuration
The printer icon appears on the desktop.
H Quit Desktop Printer Utility.
Setting Up Options
A On the [Apple] menu, click [Chooser].
B Click the Adobe PS icon.
C In the [Select the PostScript Printer:] list, click the name of the printer you
want to use, and then click [Setup].
D Click [Configure].
A list of options appears.
E Select the option you want to set up, and then select an appropriate setting for it.
F Click [OK].
The list of options closes.
G Click [OK].
The [Chooser] dialog box appears.
H Close the [Chooser] dialog box.
❒ If the option you want to select is not displayed, PPD files may not be set
up correctly. To complete the setup, check the name of the PPD file displayed in the dialog box.
Installing the ColorSync Profiles
ColorSync profiles enable a printer to print colors consistent with those on the
computer display. You must install the ColorSync profile to use this function.
Follow the procedure below to install the ColorSync profiles.
A Start a Mac OS.
B Double-click the hard disk icon, and then open the appropriate folder for
installing the ColorSync profiles.
The location of the appropriate folder may vary depending on the version of
the Mac OS. The following are examples:
• System: Preferences: ColorSync profiles
• System: ColorSync profiles
254
Mac OS Configuration
C Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM drive icon appears.
D Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.
The contents of the CD-ROM appear.
E Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
F Double-click the [ColorSyncTM Profiles] folder.
G Drag the file to the [ColorSyncTM Profiles] folder on the hard disk.
The ColorSync profiles are installed.
❒ The ColorSync profiles are consistent with color characteristics defined by
the International Color Consortium (ICC).
❒ For some computer displays, particular settings need to be created by ColorSync. For details, see the appropriate manuals for your computer display.
Installing Adobe Type Manager
❒ Quit all applications currently running before installation. Install ATM after you
restart the computer.
A Start a Mac OS.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
C Double-click the CD-ROM drive con.
D Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
E Double-click the [ATM] folder.
F Double-click the ATM 4.6.3 installer icon.
G Follow the instructions on the screen.
H When the procedure is complete, restart the computer. ATM will be completely installed only after restarting.
I On the [Apple] menu, open [Control Panel], and then click [~ATM].
J The ATM control panel opens.
255
Mac OS Configuration
❒ For details about installation, see the operating instructions in the ATM
folder.
Installing Screen fonts
Follow the procedure below to install screen fonts.
The screen fonts described below can be found in the [Fonts] folder on the CDROM.
A Start a Mac OS.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM drive icon appears.
C Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.
The contents of the CD-ROM appear.
D Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
E Double-click the [Fonts] folder.
F Double-click the [Screen font] folder.
G Double-click the [TrueType] or [Type1] folder.
Select the font type you want to use.
H Copy the fonts you want to install in [Fonts] under [System Folder].
A confirmation message appears.
I Click [OK].
The fonts are installed.
J Restart the Mac OS.
Using USB Interface
Follow the procedure below to setup USB connection.
A Open the [AdobePS Component] folder on the hard disk.
B Double-click [Desktop Printer Utility].
C Click [AdobePS] in [With:], click [Printer (USB)] in [Create Desktop], and then
click [OK].
D Click [Change] in [PostScriptTM Printer Description (PPD) File].
256
Mac OS Configuration
E Select the PPD files of the connected printer, and then click [Select].
F Click [Change] in [USB Printer Selection].
G Select the model you are using in [Select a USB Printer:], and then click [OK].
H Click [Create].
The following message appears.
I Specify the file location and the name, and then click [Save].
J Specify the file location and the name, and then click [Save].
The printer icon appears on the desktop.
K Quit Desktop Printer Utility.
❒ The procedures used to configure Mac OS may vary depending on the Mac
OS version. The following describes how to configure Mac OS 9.1. If you
are using a different version of Mac OS, use the following procedures as a
reference and see the manuals for your Mac OS version.
❒ Mac OS supports only the standard USB ports for this printer.
❒ When printing with a USB connection to a Macintosh computer, printer language does not change automatically. Use the control panel on this printer
to change printer language to [Auto Detect] or [PS] before printing.
Changing to EtherTalk
Follow the procedure below to configure to a Mac OS to use EtherTalk.
A Open [Control Panel], and then double-click the AppleTalk icon.
B On the [Connect via:] pop-up menu, click [Ethernet].
C If you change zones, select a name on the [Current zone:] pop-up menu.
D Close the AppleTalk control panel.
E Restart the computer.
❒ The procedures used to configure Mac OS may vary depending on the Mac
OS version. The following describes how to configure Mac OS 9.1. If you
are using a different version of Mac OS, use the following procedures as a
reference and see the manuals for your Mac OS version.
❒ Confirm the Connection to the Printer with TCP/IP
257
Mac OS Configuration
For information about installing applications required for EtherTalk, see the
Mac OS manuals.
258
Mac OS Configuration
Mac OS X
This section explains how to configure a Mac OS X to use EtherTalk and USB.
Follow the procedure below to configure Mac OS X 10.1. If you are not using Mac
OS X 10.1, see the manual of the Mac OS X you are using for details.
❒ For Mac OS X 10.1 or higher.
❒ The PPD files are stored in the following folder on the CD-ROM.
Mac OS X:PPD Installer
Installing the PPD Files
Follow the procedure below to install a PPD file to print from Mac OS X.
❒ You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For details, consult your network administrator.
A Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
B Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon.
C Double-click the [Mac OS X] folder.
D Double-click the installer icon.
E Follow the instructions on the screen.
Setting Up the PPD File
A Start Print Center.
B Click [Add Printer].
Click [AppleTalk] on the first pop-up menu.
If the zone is set, select the zone from the second pop-up menu.
C Select the PPD file for the model you are using from the [Printer Model:]
pop-up menu, and then click [Add].
259
Mac OS Configuration
Setting Up Options
❒ No printer option settings can be made under Mac OS X. No new settings for
options not installed can be made.
Using USB Interface
Follow the procedure below to setup USB connection.
A Start Print Center.
B Click [Add].
C Click [USB] on the pop-up menu.
The connected printer appears.
D Select the printer, and then select its manufacturer from the [Printer Model:] pop-up menu.
A list of printer types appears.
E Select the name of the connected printer from the list of printer models,
and then click [Add].
F Close the [Printer List] dialog box, and then quit Print Center.
❒ When printing with a USB connection to a Macintosh computer, printer language does not change automatically. Use the control panel on this printer
to change printer language to [Auto Detect] or [PS] before printing.
❒ USB2.0 can be used only with Mac OS X 10.3.3 or higher.
Using Rendezvous
Follow the procedure below to print using Rendezvous under Mac OS X 10.2.3
or higher. Ethernet and wireless LAN connections can also be used.
A Start Print Center.
B Click [Add].
C Click [Rendezvous] on the pop-up menu.
The connected printer appears.
D Select the printer, and then select its manufacturer from the [Printer Model:] pop-up menu.
260
Mac OS Configuration
A list of printer types appears.
E Select the name of the connected printer from the list of printer models,
and then click [Add].
F Close the [Printer List] dialog box, and then quit Print Center.
❒ When printing with a Rendezvous connection to a Macintosh computer,
printer language does not change automatically. Use the control panel on
this printer to change printer language to [Auto Detect] or [PS] before printing.
Changing to EtherTalk
❒ You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For details, consult your network administrator
Follow the procedure below to configure a Mac OS X to use EtherTalk.
For information about installing applications required for EtherTalk, see the
Mac OS manuals.
A Open [System Preference], and then click the Network icon.
B Click the [AppleTalk] tab.
C Select the [Make AppleTalk Active] check box.
D To change AppleTalk zones, select a name from the [AppleTalk Zone:] popup menu.
E When the settings are made, click [Apple Now].
261
Mac OS Configuration
Configuring the Printer
Use the control panel to enable AppleTalk. (The default is active.)
262
Mac OS Configuration
Using PostScript 3
Job Type
You can select the type of print job.
❒ If you use Mac OS X, this function is not available.
❖ Normal
Select this for normal printing. The print job starts immediately after the print
command is given.
❖ Sample Print
Use this function to print the first set of a multiple-set print job. After checking
the results, the remaining sets can be printed using the control panel. This
function can protect you from printing a large quantity of misprints.
❖ Locked Print
Use this function to print confidential documents. Documents will not be printed automatically unless a password is entered using the control panel.
Using Sample Print
❒ To use this function, the optional hard disk must be installed on the printer.
❒ The number of pages the printer can save varies depending on the contents
of the print images. At most, the printer can save 30 jobs or 1000 pages for
Sample Print and Locked Print.
❒ If you turn off the power, the job saved on the hard disk will be deleted.
❒ Sample Print files will not appear on the panel display if they have already
been executed or deleted using the Web browser before you select “Sample
Print“ from the control panel.
❒ Sample Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor after you select
[Sample Print] using the control panel will appear on the display panel. However, an error message will appear if you try to print or delete those Sample Print
files.
❒ If you use Mac OS X, Sample Print function cannot be used.
❒ If the application has a collate option, make sure that it is not selected before
sending a print job. By default, sample print jobs are automatically collated by
the printer driver. If the collate option is selected in the application print dialog
box, more prints than intended may be printed.
A In an application, select the menu command to print.
263
Mac OS Configuration
The print dialog box appears.
B On the pop-up menu, click [Job Log].
C In [Job Type:], click [Sample Print], and then select the appropriate setting.
D In [User ID:], enter the user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 09) characters.
Set this to identify the user associated with the job.
The user ID can consist of up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) characters.
E After making the necessary settings you want, click [Print].
The Sample Print job is sent to the printer and one set is printed.
F Check the sample print to confirm that the settings are correct.
If the settings are correct, print the remaining sets.
If not, you can delete the saved job.
For details about printing the remaining sets, see p.107 “Printing the Remaining Sets”.
For details about deleting a Sample Print file, see p.108 “Deleting a Sample
Print File”.
Using Locked Print
❒ To use this function, the optional hard disk must be installed on the printer.
❒ The number of pages the printer can save varies depending on the contents
of the print images. At most, the printer can save 30 jobs or 1000 pages for
Sample Print and Locked Print.
❒ If you turn off the power, the job saved on the hard disk will be deleted.
❒ Locked Print files will not appear on the display panel if they have already
been printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor before you select [Locked
Print] using the control panel.
❒ Locked Print files printed or deleted using Web Image Monitor after you have
selected [Locked Print] using the control panel will still appear on the display
panel. However, an error message will appear if you try to print or delete those
Locked Print files.
❒ If you use Mac OS X, Locked Print function cannot be used.
❒ If the application has a collate option, make sure that it is not selected before
sending a print job. By default, locked print jobs are automatically collated by
the printer driver. If the collate option is selected in the application print dialog
box, more prints than intended may be printed.
264
Mac OS Configuration
❒ Print jobs are not saved on the hard disk in the following cases. You can check
the error log for jobs not saved.
• When there are 30 Sample Print and Locked Print jobs saved on the hard
disk.
• When the total number of pages saved on the hard disk exceeds 1000 pages.
A In an application, select the menu command to print.
The print dialog box appears.
B On the pop-up menu, click [Job Log].
C In [Job Type:], click [Locked Print], and then select the appropriate setting.
D In [User ID:], enter the user ID using up to eight alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 09) characters, and then enter a 4-digit password in [Password:].
Set this to identify the user associated with the job.
E After making the necessary settings you want, click [Print].
The Locked Print job is sent to the printer.
F Enter the password using the control panel, and then specify whether to
print or delete the job.
For details about entering the password, see p.111 “Entering a Password”.
For details about deleting the job, see p.112 “Deleting a Locked Print File”.
Duplex Printing
Use this function to select duplex printing.
❒ To use this function, the optional duplex unit must be installed on the printer.
❒ You cannot perform duplex printing when using the bypass tray.
❖ None
Disables duplex printing.
❖ Flip on Long Edge
Prints so you can open it to the long edge when bound along the long edge.
❖ Flip on Short Edge
Prints so you can open it to the short edge when bound along the short edge.
265
Mac OS Configuration
❒ Availability of these items varies depending on the operating system you are
using. Click the button that means [Flip on Long Edge] or [Flip on Short Edge].
Color Mode
Use this function to select whether the document is printed in color or black and
white.
❖ Color
Prints color documents in full color.
❒ Color images are printed using CMYK toner, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
Black. CMYK represents the three primary subtractive colors.
❒ If you want to adjust the print color, use the settings in the Advanced dialog
box accessed from the Advanced button on the [Print Quality] tab.
❖ Black and White
Prints everything, including color documents, in black and white. Black and
White printing is faster than Color. To stop black and white areas being printed
with CMYK toner, select [Black and White] in the printer driver as well as in the
application.
Gradation
Use this function to select a type of gradation suited to your requirements.
❖ Fast
Prints quickly but loses smoothness.
❖ Standard
Prints with good gradation.
Color Profile
Use this function to select the color profile pattern.
❖ Auto
Use this setting to automatically configure the best color profile pattern based
on the appearance of the document to be printed.
❖ Photographic
Use this setting to enhance reproduction of photos and graphics that include
midtones.
266
Mac OS Configuration
❖ Presentation
Use this setting to enhance reproduction of documents containing text and
graphics. This CRD is best for printing colored charts, graphs, presentation
materials and so on. If you use this CRD for printing photographs, color and
gradation might not reproduce so well.
❖ Solid Color
Use this setting to print specific single colors, logos and so on.
❖ User Setting
Use this setting to print images using a CRD downloaded from your application.
❖ CLP Simulation
Prints the output colors similar to the colors displayed on the computer
screen.
❒ Use this function to select a color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to color matching, so you should select the appropriate CRD for the
document you are printing. The selected CRD is also referred to when [Fine]
or [Super Fine] is selected for “ Color Setting ”. The following items are available: [Auto], [Photographic], [Presentation], and [Solid Color].
Color Setting
Use this function to select the correction method used for color conversion.
❒ The color rendering dictionary selected in the Color Profile setting is used.
❖ Off
No modification to the color setting.
❖ Fine
Select this setting to perform color matching based on the printer's built-in color rendering dictionaries, and to perform CMYK conversion. This setting performs printing at an output target of Monitor γ = 1.8.
❖ Super Fine
Select this setting to use a color rendering dictionary similar to the Fine setting
but is capable of producing output that is more vivid. Use this setting to emphasize lighter colors. This setting performs printing at an output target of
Monitor γ = 2.2.
267
Mac OS Configuration
❒ Use this function to select a color rendering dictionary (CRD). The CRD is referred to color matching, so you should select the appropriate CRD for the
document you are printing. The selected CRD is also referred to when [Fine]
or [Super Fine] is selected for “Color Setting”. The following items are available:
[Auto], [Photographic], [Presentation], and [Solid Color].
CMYK Simulation Profile
You can simulate the color tone of the printing ink.
You can select the printing ink standard from US OffsetPrint, Euroscale, JapanColor and PaletteColor.
Dithering
Use this function to set the Image Rendering mode.
❖ Photographic
Performs dithering in an appropriate form for photographs.
❖ Text
Performs dithering in an appropriate form for text.
Gray Reproduction
Use this function to select Black Color mode for text and line art.
❖ Black by K
Select this setting to use a black toner.
❖ Black/Gray by K
Black portions are printed in gray.
❖ CMY+K
Select this setting to use all toners.
Color Matching
Use this function to select whether or not you want the colors in the documents
to be adjusted before printing, so that the printed page matches the colors on the
screen closer.
❖ Image Color Control
Open the [Image Color Matching] dialog box, and then click this button to specify
exactly how you want the colors on your screen adjusted before printing.
268
Mac OS Configuration
Printer Utility for Mac
By using Printer Utility for Mac, you can download fonts, change the name of the
printer and so on.
❒ If a Macintosh and printer are connected by USB, you cannot use Printer Utility for Mac.
❒ Printer Utility for Mac is included on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and
Utilities”.
❒ Printer Utility for Mac requires Mac OS 7.6.1-9.x, or Mac OS X 10.1.x or
10.2.1. Mac OS X 10.0.x and 10.2 are not supported.
Installing Printer Utility for Mac
Follow these steps to install Printer Utility for Mac on the machine.
A Start the Macintosh.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM icon appears.
C Double-click the hard disk icon to open it.
D Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
The contents of the CD-ROM appear.
E Double-click the [Mac OS 8 and 9] folder.
❒ Under Mac OS X, double-click the [Mac OS X] folder.
F Double-click the [PS Utility] folder on the CD-ROM.
G Double-click the [Printer Utility for Mac] folder.
H Double-click the folder of the language you use.
I Move the “Printer Utility for Mac” file to the Macintosh hard disk using a
drag-and-drop operation.
J Drag the CD-ROM icon to the Trash to eject the CD-ROM.
Printer Utility for Mac is installed.
269
Mac OS Configuration
Starting Printer Utility for Mac
Mac OS
❒ Before starting Printer Utility for Mac, make sure the printer is selected in
[Chooser] on the Apple menu.
A Double-click the Printer Utility for Mac icon.
The [Printer Utility for Mac] dialog box appears.
B Click [OK].
Printer Utility for Mac will take a few seconds to start.
Mac OS X
A Double-click the Printer Utility for Mac icon.
The [Printer Utility for Mac] dialog box appears.
B Click [OK].
C In the [Available Printers:] box, select the printer you want to use.
❒ If you change zones, select a name from [Available Network Zones:].
❒ Click [Choose Printer...] on the Printer Utility for Mac menu if you want to
change the printer.
D Select the printer you want to use.
Printer Utility for Mac will take a few seconds to start.
E Click [Choose].
Printer Utility for Mac Functions
Downloading PS Fonts
You can download the PS fonts to the printer memory or hard disk drive.
❒ The following procedure to download the fonts assume that you are a system
administrator. If you are not, be sure to consult your system administrator.
❒ During the download, do not turn off the power switch, operate the panel or
open or close the cover.
❒ If the printer restarts, all the printer settings return to the defaults.
270
Mac OS Configuration
❒ Confirm that a Macintosh and the printer are connected with Appletalk.
A Select [Download PS Fonts...] on the [File] menu.
B Click [Add to list].
The dialog box to select fonts appears.
C Select the desired font files, and then click [Open].
The list of selectable font names appears.
D After adding all the fonts you want to download, click [OK].
The dialog box of selected fonts to download appears.
E Click [Download].
The fonts begin to download, and the download status is shown.
F When the completion message appears, click [OK].
G Click [Cancel].
❒ Some fonts cannot be downloaded.
❒ Before downloading, read the documentation about the fonts you want to
use.
Displaying Printer Fonts
You can display the available fonts currently downloaded to the printer. Fonts in
the printer memory and hard disk drive can be displayed.
A Select [Display Printer's Fonts...] on the [File] menu.
A dialog box appears.
B Select [Printer's memory] or [Printer's disk].
C Click [OK].
❒ The fonts displayed in italics are the default fonts.
Deleting Fonts
You can delete fonts from the printer memory or hard disk drive.
❒ You cannot delete the fonts displayed in italic.
A Select [Display Printer's fonts] on the [File] menu.
A dialog box appears.
271
Mac OS Configuration
B Select [Printer's memory] or [Printer's disk].
C Select the fonts you want to delete.
D Click [Delete].
A confirmation message appears.
E Confirm the fonts you want to delete and the printer name from which
you want to delete the fonts.
F Click [Continue], and then click [OK].
G Click [OK].
Initializing the Printer Disk
When initializing the printer hard disk, all the fonts downloaded to the printer hard
disk drive are deleted. Before initializing, be sure to check the fonts on the hard
disk drive.
❒ When initializing the printer hard disk drive from the control panel, all of the
data on the printer hard disk drive is deleted. Before initializing, be sure to
check the data on the hard disk drive.
❒ Do not turn off the power switch until initializing is completed, otherwise the
hard disk drive might be damaged.
A Select [Initialize Printer's Disk...] on the [File] menu.
The confirmation message appears. To cancel initialization, click [Cancel].
B Click [Execute].
Initializing starts.
C When the completion message appears, click [OK].
Page Setup
You can set the paper size on which to print “Print Fonts Catalogue” and “Prints
Fonts Sample”.
A Select [Page Setup...] on the [File] menu.
B Select the paper size.
Printing Font Catalog
You can print the names of fonts available on the printer.
A Select [Print Fonts Catalogue] on the [File] menu.
272
Mac OS Configuration
B Click [Print].
❒ The paper selected under [Page Setup] is used.
Printing Font Sample
You can print samples of fonts downloaded to the hard disk drive or memory.
A Select [Print Fonts Sample...] on the [File] menu.
B Click [Print].
❒ Print by using the paper selected on [Page Setup].
Renaming the Printer
You can change the printer name displayed under Appletalk. If you connect several printers on the network, assign different names so you can identify them. If
several printers have the same name, a digit appears next to the printer name in
[Chooser].
❒ You can enter up to 31 digits and letters.
❒ Do not use symbols, for example “*”, “:”, “=”, “@”, “~”.
Mac OS
A On the [File] menu, click [Rename Printer...].
B In the [New Name:] filed enter a new name.
C Click [Rename].
The printer name is changed.
D Click [OK].
E On the Apple menu, click [Chooser].
F Click the [AdobePS] icon.
G Select the printer whose name you changed, and then close the [Chooser]
dialog box.
❒ If there are several Appletalk zones, select the zone the machine belongs
to.
273
Mac OS Configuration
Mac OS X
A On the [File] menu, click [Rename Printer...].
B In the [New Name:] filed enter a new name.
C Click [Rename].
The printer name is changed.
D Click [OK].
E On the [Printer Utility for Mac] menu, click [Choose Printer...].
F In the [Available Network Zones:] list, select the zone for the Macintosh in
use.
G In the [Available Printers:] list, select the printer whose name you changed,
and then click [Choose].
Restarting the Printer
You can restart the printer.
A Select [Restart Printer] on the [File] menu.
B Confirm the message that appears on the screen, and then click [Restart].
The printer restarts.
❒ The fonts downloaded in the printer memory will be deleted.
❒ If the printer restarts, all the printer settings return to the defaults.
Downloading PostScript Files
You can download a Postscript file to the printer.
A Select [Download PostScript File...] on the [Utility] menu.
B Select the file name to download, click the file name, and then click
[Open].
C Type the log file name, and then click [Save].
The selected file is downloaded.
❒ Errors are recorded in the log file.
Selecting the Zone
You can change the zone to which the printer belongs under Appletalk.
274
Mac OS Configuration
❒ Confirm that a Macintosh and printer are connected with Appletalk.
Mac OS
A On the [Utility] menu, click [Select Zone...].
The zone to which the printer belongs and the available zone list appear.
B Select the zone in which you want to locate the printer, and then click
[Change].
A confirmation message appears.
C Click [Continue].
A confirmation message appears.
D Click [OK].
E On the Apple menu, click [Chooser].
F Click the [AdobePS] icon.
G In the [Appletalk zone:] list, select the zone you changed.
H In the [Select a PostScript Printer:] list, select the printer you want to use.
I Close the [Chooser] dialog box.
Mac OS X
A On the [Utility] menu, click [Select Zone...].
The zone to which the printer belongs and the available zone list appear.
B Select the zone which you want to locate the printer in, and then click
[Change].
A confirmation message appears.
C Click [Continue].
A confirmation message appears.
D Click [OK].
E On the [Printer Utility for Mac] menu, click [Choose Printer...].
F In the [Available Network Zones:] list, select the zone you changed.
G In the [Available Printers:] list, select the model of printer in use, and then
click [Choose].
275
Mac OS Configuration
Displaying the Printer Status
You can display and confirm the current status of the printer.
A Select [Display Printer Status...] on the [Utility] menu.
The current status of the printer appears.
B Confirm the current status of the printer.
You can confirm the memory capacity, the VM (Virtual Memory) space, the
hard disk drive status and available space on the hard disk drive. You can also
confirm the zone to which the printer belongs.
C Click [OK].
Launching the Dialogue Console
You can create and edit a PostScript file for printing, and then download it to the
printer.
❒ “Launch Dialogue Console” is recommended for users with an understanding
of PostScript.
❒ Do not download any file other than PostScript files to the printer.
❒ “Launch Dialogue Console” must be used at your own responsibility.
A Select [Launch Dialogue Console...] on the [Utility] menu.
Open the editing screen. The Dialogue Console menu bar appears.
B Type the PostScript command in the editor screen.
To edit a PostScript file, select [Open] on the [File] menu to open it.
You can search or replace a character string by using the [Search] menu.
C After editing the PostScript file, select [Download Top Window] on [Console]
menu to start printing.
The PostScript file is sent to the printer.
The [Reply from Printer] box opens, depending on the PostScript file you sent.
D Select [Return To Main Menu] on the [Console] menu to close the PostScript
file.
276
Appendix
Software and Utilities Included on the CDROM
The following softwares and utilities are included in the CD-ROMs that come with
the printer.
❖ Font Manager 2000
For installing new screen fonts, or organizing and managing fonts already in
the system. For details about Font Manager 2000, see the manual on the CDROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”.
❖ SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
For the system administrator to manage network printers.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help
❖ SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
For users to manage their network print status.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help
❖ 1394 Utility
For the optional IEEE 1394 interface unit. For details, see the Readme file or
the manual provided with the optional IEEE 1394 interface unit.
❖ USB Printing Support
For connection to Windows 98 SE/Me computers via USB.
Viewing the contents of the CD-ROM
Follow the procedure below to view the contents of the CD-ROM.
A Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
B Click [Browse This CD-ROM].
Explorer starts and displays the contents of the CD-ROM.
Printer Drivers for This Printer
Printing requires installing a printer driver appropriate to your operating system.
The following drivers are included on the CD-ROM provided with this printer.
G1168612_1.00
Copyright © 2004
277
Appendix
❖ PCL 6/5e printer driver
This printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer via a
printer language.
The following operating system is supported.
• Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0
❒ For Windows NT 4.0, Service Pack 6 or higher is required.
❒ You can only print in black and white with PCL 5e driver.
❖ RPCS printer driver
This printer driver allows the computer to communicate with the printer using
a printer language. In addition to the conventional user interface, another preset user interface is provided.
The following operating system is supported.
• Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0
❒ For Windows NT 4.0, Service Pack 6 or higher is required.
❖ PostScript Printer Drivers and PPD files
PostScript printer drivers and the PPD files are included on the CD-ROM provided with this printer. PostScript printer drivers allow the computer to communicate with the printer using a printer language. PPD files allow the printer
driver to enable specific printer functions.
The following operating system is supported.
• Windows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows
NT 4.0, Mac OS, and Mac OS X
❒ The PostScript printer drivers and PostScript Printer Description (PPD)
files are included on the CD-ROM labeled “Printer Drivers and Utilities”.
❒ For Mac OS, version 8.6 or higher is required. (Mac OS X Classic environment is supported.)
❖ PPD files
PPD files are included on the CD-ROM provided with this printer. PPD files
allow the printer driver to enable specific printer functions.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is an application that uses TCP/IP and IPX/SPX
to monitor network printers. It can monitor multiple network printers using IP address We recommend that network administrators use this application.
278
Appendix
❖ File path
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin is stored in the following folder on the CDROM.
NETWORK\NETMON\admin\DISK1
Operating system
Protocol stack
Windows 95/98/Me
TCP/IP provided with Windows 95/98/Me
IPX/SPX provided with Windows 95/98/Me
NetWare Client provided with Windows 95/98
Novell Client provided with Windows 95/98
Windows 2000
TCP/IP provided with Windows 2000
IPX/SPX provided with Windows 2000
NetWare Client provided with Windows 2000
Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or Window NT
Windows XP
TCP/IP provided with Windows XP
IPX/SPX provided with Windows XP
NetWare Client provided with Windows XP
Novell Client provided with Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
TCP/IP provided with Windows Server 2003
IPX/SPX provided with Windows Server 2003
NetWare Client provided with Windows Server 2003
Novell Client provided with Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
TCP/IP provided with Windows NT
IPX/SPX provided with Windows NT
Client Service for NetWare provided with Windows
NT
Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or Windows NT
❖ Available functions
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin has the following functions to check:
• printer supplies such as paper or toner;
• results of print jobs executed from the computer.
For information about using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Help.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client has the following functions. We recommend that
users install this application.
279
Appendix
• Printing in a peer-to-peer network, using TCP/IP, NetBEUI, and IPP from Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows NT 4.0.
• Constantly monitoring the status of devices on the network using TCP/IP and
IPX/SPX.
❖ File path
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client is stored in the following folder on the CDROM.
NETWORK\NETMON\CLIENT\DISK1
Operating system
Protocol stack
Windows 95/98/Me
TCP/IP provided with Windows 95/98/Me
IPX/SPX provided with Windows 95/98/Me
NetBEUI provided with Windows 95/98/Me
NetWare Client provided with Windows 95/98/Me
Novell Client provided with Windows 95/98/Me
Windows 2000
TCP/IP provided with Windows 2000
IPX/SPX provided with Windows 2000
NetBEUI provided with Windows 2000
NetWare Client provided with Windows 2000
Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or NT
Windows XP
TCP/IP provided with Windows XP
IPX/SPX provided with Windows XP
NetWare Client provided with Windows XP
Novell Client provided with Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
TCP/IP provided with Windows Server 2003
IPX/SPX provided with Windows Server 2003
NetWare Client provided with Windows Server 2003
Novell Client provided with Windows Server 2003
Windows NT 4.0
TCP/IP provided with Windows NT
IPX/SPX provided with Windows NT
NetBEUI provided with Windows NT
Client Service for NetWare provided with Windows
NT
Novell Client provided with Windows 2000 or Windows NT
❖ Available functions
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client has the following functions.
• Peer-to-peer print function
• Prints directly on the network printer without sending any data to a print
server.
280
Appendix
• Prints on a substitute printer when there are too many jobs waiting on
the specified printer, or when an error disables printing (Recovery Printing).
• Allocates multiple print jobs to multiple printers (Parallel Printing).
• Executes prior group registration of printers specified for Recovery
Printing or Parallel Printing.
• Notification function
• Displays an error message when there is an error on the specified printer while transferring or printing data.
• Notifies a print completion. You can also be notified of the print condition, such as displaying the notice only when Recovery Printing is executed.
• Monitoring function
• Checks printer supplies such as paper or toner.
• Simultaneously monitors multiple printers in use.
• Checks the printer's network settings and detailed information of printers.
• Enables you to check the print job log using the user ID
❒ For Recovery Printing or Parallel Printing, the options on the printers must
be the same. If a necessary option is not installed, a printer cannot be used
for Recovery Printing or Parallel Printing.
❒ For Recovery Printing or Parallel Printing, the paper loaded in the printers
must be the same. When a tray is selected for printing, load the same paper in that tray in all printers.
❒ For Recovery Printing or Parallel Printing, the print results may be different
if the printers are not the same model or have exactly the same options.
❒ If you select Sample Print or Locked Print, you cannot select Recovery
Printing or Parallel Printing.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help
281
Appendix
Cautions to Take When Using in a network
Connecting a Dial-up Router to a Network
When the NetWare file server and printer are on opposite sides of a router, packets are sent back and forth, causing communication charges to be incurred. Because packet transmission is a specification of NetWare, you need to change the
configuration of the router. If the network you are using does not allow you to
configure the router, configure the printer instead.
Configuring the router
Filter packets so that they do not pass over the dial-up router.
❒ The MAC address of the printer doing the filtering is printed on the printer configuration page. For details about printing a configuration page, see p.131
“Printing a Configuration Page”.
❒ For details about configuring the printer if the router cannot be configured, see
the instructions below.
Configuring the printer with NetWare
A Configure the file server.
B Set the frame type for a NetWare environment.
For details about selecting a frame type, see p.149 “Host Interface menu
parameters”.
Configuring the printer without NetWare
A When not printing, the network interface board sends packets over the
network. Set NetWare to “inactive”.
For details about selecting protocols, see p.149 “Host Interface menu parameters”.
Using DHCP
This printer can be used in a DHCP environment. In a WINS server environment,
the printer name can simultaneously be registered with a WINS server.
Note the following points when an Ethernet interface and an IEEE 1394 (IP over
1394) interface are simultaneously installed.
282
Appendix
❖ When static IP addresses are set for each interface
• IP address: When set at the same value, the Ethernet interface is preferred.
• Subnet mask: When a value overlaps, the Ethernet interface is preferred.
• Gateway address: The value set is used. For the gateway address, set the
gateway address located in the subnetwork set by the interface. If the value
is outside the subnet range set by the interface, it operates as “0.0.0.0”.
❖ When each setting is acquired from the DHCP server
• IP address, subnet mask: Set for each value leased by the DHCP server
operating on a connected interface. When overlapping IP addresses or
identical IP addresses in the subnetwork are set, only the highest priority
active value is set for the interface.
❒ The default priority interface is Ethernet.
• AutoNet: An automatic private address (169.254. xxx.xxx) is set for high
priority interfaces.
❒ The default priority interface is IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394).
• Gateway address, DNS server address, domain name: Settings are made
for DHCP-acquired values that have the highest interface priority.
If the gateway address is outside the subnetwork range set by the interface, it operates as “0.0.0.0”.
❒ The default priority interface is Ethernet.
❖ When the settings of the static IP addresses and the DHCP acquired value overlap
• IP address, subnet mask: When the static IP address and DHCP-acquired
value (IP address) are the same, or the static subnet mask value and
DHCP-acquired subnet mask value overlap, the interface set by the static
IP address is available using its value set. The interface set by DHCP is
reset to the default.
• Gateway address: Use the manually set value.
• If a gateway address is set outside the interface subnetwork range, it operates as “0.0.0.0”.
❒ When the static IP address is not set, or is set as “0.0.0.0”, the interface
setting the DHCP-acquired value is activated.
❒ Supported DHCP server operating systems are: Windows 2000 Server, Windows NT 4.0 Server Service Pack 4 or higher, NetWare, and UNIX standard.
283
Appendix
❒ The IP address acquired from DHCP can be checked on the configuration
page. For information about printing a configuration page, see p.131 “Printing
a Configuration Page”.
❒ When using WINS server, set the WINS server as shown on p.284 “Configuring the WINS Server”.
❒ Under the WINS server, host names can be used for remote network printer
ports.
❒ If you are not using the WINS server, reserve the printer's IP address in the
DHCP server so the same IP address is assigned every time.
❒ When there are multiple DHCP servers, make the same reservation for all.
This printer uses information from the DHCP server that responds first.
❒ The DHCP relay-agent is not supported. If you are using the DHCP relayagent on an ISDN line network, expensive line charges will be incurred. This
is because your computer connects to the ISDN line whenever a packet is
transferred from the printer.
Using AutoNet
If the printer IP address is not assigned by a DHCP server automatically, a temporary IP address starting with 169.254, which is not used on the network, can
be automatically selected by the printer.
You must change this setting to “on” to use AutoNet.
See p.185 “autonet”.
❒ The DHCP-assigned IP address has priority over that selected by AutoNet.
The printer reboots at this time, and is temporarily unable to print.
❒ You can check the current IP address on the configuration page. For details
about printing a configuration page, see p.131 “Printing a Configuration
Page”.
❒ When AutoNet is running, the printer name is not registered on the WINS
server.
❒ No communication can take place except between units started up using AutoNet. However, communication can take place with Macintosh computers
running Mac OS X 10.2.3 or higher versions.
Configuring the WINS Server
The printer can be configured to register its NetBIOS name with a WINS server
when the power is turned on. This enables the NetBIOS name of the printer to
be specified from SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin even in a DHCP environment.
This section explains configuring the WINS server.
284
Appendix
❒ The WINS server is supported with Windows NT 4.0 Server Service Pack 4
or higher, and Windows 2000 Servers WINS Manager.
❒ For details about the WINS server settings, see Windows Help.
❒ If there is no reply from the WINS server, the NetBIOS name is registered by
broadcast.
❒ The NetBIOS name can be entered using up to 13 alphanumeric characters.
Using Web Image Monitor
A Start a Web browser.
B Enter “http: //(printer's address)/” in the address bar to access the printer whose settings you want to change.
Top Page of Web Image Monitor appears.
C Click [Login].
The dialog box for entering the user name and password appears.
D Enter the user name and password, and then click [OK].
To use the default account, enter “admin” as user name, and leave the password blank.
E In the left area, click [Configuration], and then click [Network].
F Click [TCP/IP].
G Check that [Enable] is selected for [WINS] in the [Ethernet+IEEE 802.11b] col-
umn, and then enter the WINS server IP address in [Primary WINS Server]
and [Secondary WINS Server].
❒ When installing the optional expansion 1394 board and using IP over 1394
simultaneously, perform the same operations in the [IP over 1394] column.
H Click [Apply].
I Quit Web Image Monitor.
Using telnet
See p.183 “Using telnet”.
285
Appendix
Using the Dynamic DNS Function
Dynamic DNS is a function which dynamically updates (registers and deletes)
records (A record and PTR record) managed by the DNS server. When a DNS
server is part of the network environment to which this printer, a DNS client, is
connected, records can be dynamically updated using this function.
Updating
Updating procedure varies depending on whether the printer IP address is static
or acquired by DHCP.
❒ When the dynamic DNS function is not used, records managed by the DNS
server must be updated manually, if the printer's IP address is changed.
❒ To update the record using the printer, the DNS server has to have one of the
following:
• No security settings made.
• If security settings are made, an IP-specified client (this printer) permits updating.
❖ For a static IP setting
If the IP address or host name is changed, the A and PTR records are updated.
If the A record is registered, CNAME is also registered. CNAMEs that can be
registered are as follows:
• Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b
RNPXXXXXX (XXXXXX represents the last 3 hexadecimal bytes of the
MAC address)
• IEEE 1394
RNPXXXXXXXXXX (XXXXXXXXXX represents the lower 3-7 bytes of the
MAC Address in hexadecimal)
❖ For DHCP settings
As a substitute for the printer, the DHCP server updates the record, and one
of the following occurs:
• When the printer acquires the IP address from the DHCP server, the DHCP
server updates the A and PTR records.
• When the printer acquires the IP address from the DHCP server, the printer
updates the A record, and the DHCP server updates the PTR record.
If the A record is registered, CNAME is also registered. CNAMEs that can be
registered are as follows:
• Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b
RNPXXXXXX (XXXXXX represents the last 3 hexadecimal bytes of the
MAC address)
286
Appendix
• IEEE 1394
RNPXXXXXXXXXX (XXXXXXXXXX represents the lower 3-7 bytes of the
MAC Address in hexadecimal)
❒ Dynamic update using message authentication (TSIG, SIG(0)) is not supported.
DNS servers targeted for operation
❖ For static IP setting
• Microsoft DNS servers with standard Windows 2000 Server/Windows
Server 2003 features
• BIND 8.2.3 or higher
❖ For DHCP setup, when the printer updates the A record
• Microsoft DNS servers with standard Windows 2000 Server/Windows
Server 2003 features
• BIND 8.2.3 or higher
❖ For DHCP setup, when the DHCP server updates records
• Microsoft DNS servers with standard Windows 2000 Server/Windows
Server 2003 features
• BIND 8.2.3 or higher
• DNS servers with standard NetWare 5 (or a higher version) features
DHCP servers targeted for operation
As a substitute for the printer, DHCP servers capable of updating the A record
and PTR record are as follows:
• Microsoft DHCP servers with standard Windows 2000 Server (Service Pack
3 or higher versions)/Windows Server 2003 features
• ISC DHCP 3.0 or higher
• DHCP server with standard NetWare 5 features
Setting the dynamic DNS function
Make settings with telnet using the “dns” command. For details, see p.188 “dns”.
287
Appendix
Configuring SSL Encryption
This section describes how to configure SSL (secure sockets layer) encryption.
Using SSL encryption, you can issue a server certificate to authorize use of the
printer.
This can be specified only when the optional network date protection unit is installed.
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption
This can be specified by the network administrator.
To protect the communication path and establish encrypted communication, create and install the server certificate.
There are two ways of installing a server certificate: create and install a self-certificate using the machine, or request a certificate from a certificate authority and
install it.
❖ Configuration flow (self-signed certificate)
A Creating and installing the server certificate
Install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
B Enabling SSL
Enable the [SSL/TLS] setting using Web Image Monitor.
❖ Configuration flow (certificate issued by a certificate authority)
A Creating the server certificate
Create the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
The application procedure after creating the certificate depends on the certificate authority. Follow the procedure specified by the certificate authority.
B Installing the server certificate
Install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
C Enabling SSL
Enable the [SSL/TLS] setting using Web Image Monitor.
Creating and Installing the Server Certificate (Self-Signed Certificate)
Create and install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
Creating and Installing the Self-Signed Certificate
Create and install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
This section explains the use of a self-certificate as the server certificate.
A Open a Web browser.
B Enter “http://(printer's-address)/” in the address bar to access the printer.
288
Appendix
C Log on to the printer.
The network administrator can log on.
Enter the login user name and login password.
D Click [Configuration], then click [Security], and then click [Certificates].
E Click [Create].
F Make the necessary settings.
For details about the displayed items and selectable items, see Web Image
Monitor Help.
G Click [OK].
The setting is changed.
H Click [OK].
A security warning dialog box appears.
I Check the details, and then click [OK].
[Installed] appears under [Certificate Status] to show that a server certificate for
the printer has been installed.
J Log off from the printer.
❒ Click [Delete] to delete the server certificate from the printer.
Creating the Server Certificate (Certificate Issued by a Certificate Authority)
Create the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
This section explains the use of a certificate issued by a certificate authority as
the server certificate.
A Open a Web browser.
B Enter “http://(printer's-address)/” in the address bar to access the printer.
C Log on to the printer.
The network administrator can log on.
Enter the login user name and login password.
D Click [Configuration], then click [Security], and then click [Certificates].
The [Certificates] page appears.
E Click [Request].
289
Appendix
F Make the necessary settings.
For details about the displayed items and selectable items, see Web Image
Monitor Help.
G Click [OK].
[Requesting] appears for [Certificate Status] in the [Certificates] area.
Quoting the character string displayed in [Certificate Request Contents:], apply
to the certificate authority for a certificate.
H Log off from the printer.
I Apply to the certificate authority for the server certificate.
The application procedure depends on the certificate authority. For details,
contact the certificate authority.
When applying, use the data created with Web Image Monitor.
❒ Using Web Image Monitor, you can create the contents of the server certificate but you cannot send the application.
❒ Click [Cancel Request] to cancel the request for the server certificate.
Installing the Server Certificate (Certificate Issued by a Certificate Authority)
Install the server certificate using Web Image Monitor.
This section explains the use of a certificate issued by a certificate authority as
the server certificate.
Enter the server certificate contents issued by the certificate authority.
A Open a Web browser.
B Enter “http://(printer's-address)/” in the address bar to access the printer.
C Log on to the printer.
The network administrator can log on.
Enter the login user name and login password.
D Click [Configuration], then click [Security], and then click [Certificates].
The [Certificates] page appears.
E Click [Install].
F Enter the contents of the server certificate.
In the [Certificate Request] box, enter the contents of the server certificate received from the certificate authority.
290
Appendix
For details about the displayed items and selectable items, see Web Image
Monitor Help.
G Click [OK].
[Installed] appears under [Certificate Status] to show that a server certificate for
the printer has been installed.
H Log off from the printer.
Enabling SSL
After installing the server certificate in the printer, enable the SSL setting.
This procedure is used for a self-signed certificate or a certificate issued by a certificate authority.
A Open a Web browser.
B Enter “http://(printer's-address)/” in the address bar to access the printer.
C Log on to the printer.
The network administrator can log on.
Enter the login user name and login password.
D Click [Configuration], then click [Security], and then click [SSL/TLS].
The [SSL/TLS] page appears.
E Click [Enable] for [SSL/TLS].
F Click [Apply].
The SSL setting is enabled.
G Log off from the printer.
❒ If you set [Permit SSL/TLS Communication] to [Ciphertext Only], enter “https://(printer's address)/” to access the printer.
User Settings for SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)
If you have installed a server certificate and enabled SSL (Secure Sockets Layer), you need to install the certificate on the user’s computer.
The network administrator must explain the procedure for installing the certificate to users.
If a warning dialog box appears while accessing the machine using the Web
browser or IPP, start the Certificate Import Wizard and install a certificate.
291
Appendix
A When the [Security Alert] dialog box appears, click [View Certificate].
The [Certificate] dialog box appears.
To be able to respond to inquiries from users about such problems as expiry
of the certificate, check the contents of the certificate.
B On the [General] tab, click [Install Certificate...].
Certificate Import Wizard starts.
C Install the certificate by following the Certificate Import Wizard instructions.
❒ For details about how to install the certificate, see the Web browser Help.
❒ If a certificate issued by a certificate authority is installed in the printer, confirm the certificate store location with the certificate authority.
For details about where to store the certificate when accessing the printer
using IPP, see the Web Image Monitor Help.
292
Appendix
Installing Font Manager 2000
❒ Under Windows 2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0, installing applications by Auto Run requires administrator permission. To install a
printer driver by Auto Run, log on using an account that has administrator permission.
A Quit all applications currently running.
B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
The installer starts.
C Click [Font Manager 2000].
D Follow the instructions on the screen.
293
Appendix
Using Adobe PageMaker Version 6.0, 6.5,
or 7.0
Under Windows 95/98/Me/2000/XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0
with Adobe PageMaker, you need to copy PPD files to the PageMaker folder.
PPD files have the .ppd extension in the folder “DRIVERS\PS\WIN9X_ME \(Language)\DISK1\” on the CD-ROM.
The “WIN9X_ME” folder inside the “PS” folder is for Windows 95/98/Me. Use the
folder at this level that is appropriate for the operating system you are currently
using.
The third folder “(Language)” may be substituted by an appropriate language
name.
Copy the .ppd file to the PageMaker folder.
• For PageMaker 6.0 default installation
The directory is “C:\PM6\RSRC\PPD4”.
• For PageMaker 6.5 default installation
The directory is “C:\PM65\RSRC\USENGLISH\PPD4”.
The “USENGLISH” may vary depending on your language selection.
• For PageMaker 7.0 default installation
The directory is “C:\PM7\RSRC\USENGLISH\PPD4”.
The “USENGLISH” may vary depending on your language selection.
❒ If the driver is not set correctly after copying the “.ppd” file, printing may not
be performed properly.
❒ When using PageMaker, the optional features that can be selected by the
printer driver will not be active. The following procedure describes how to activate the optional printer features.
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].
The [Print Document] dialog box appears.
B Make the necessary settings in the [Features] box.
294
Appendix
When Using Windows Terminal
Service/MetaFrame
The following explains how to use Windows Terminal Service and Maintenance.
Operating Environment
The following operating systems and MetaFrame versions are supported.
❖ Windows NT Server 4.0 Terminal Server Edition
• MetaFrame 1.8 SP3/FR1 SP3/SP4
• MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1/SP2/FR1
❖ Windows 2000 Server/Advanced Server
• MetaFrame 1.8 SP3/FR1 SP3/SP4
• MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1/SP2/FR1/FR2
Supported Printer Drivers
❖ When Windows Terminal Service is operating
• PCL printer drivers
• PostScript 3
❒ The RPCS printer driver is not supported.
❒ Some RPCS printer driver functions do not work if Windows Terminal Service
is installed.
Limitations
The following limitations apply to the Windows Terminal Service environment.
These limitations are built in Windows Terminal Service or MetaFrame.
❖ Windows Terminal Service
In an environment where Windows Terminal Service is installed, some printer
driver functions are unavailable, even if no Windows Terminal Service functions are used. Use the install mode to install SmartDeviceMonitor for Client
in an environment where Terminal Service is running on a Windows NT Server 4.0 Terminal Server Edition or Windows 2000 Server family computer. The
following are the two methods of installation using the install mode:
295
Appendix
A
Use [Add/Remove Programs] in [Control Panel] to install SmartDeviceMonitor
for Client.
B Enter the following command in the MS-DOS command prompt:
CHANGE USER /INSTALL
To quit the install mode, enter the following command in the MS-DOS command prompt:
CHANGE USER /EXECUTE
For more information, see Windows Help.
❖ MetaFrame's [Auto-creating client printers]
Using [Auto-creating client printers], you can select a logical printer created by
copying the client's local printer data to the MetaFrame server. We strongly
recommend testing this function in your network environment before using it
for your work.
• The settings for optional equipment will not be stored in the server after the
equipment is disconnected. The settings for optional equipment will be restored to its defaults each time the client computer logs on to the server.
• When printing a large number of bitmap images or using the server in a
WAN environment over dial-up lines such as ISDN, printing may not be
possible or errors may occur, depending on data transfer rates.
• When using MetaFrame XP 1.0 or higher versions, we recommend making
settings in [Client Printer bandwidth] under [Citrix Management Console] according to the environment.
• If a print error occurs on the server and the print job or a printer created in
[Auto-creating client printers] cannot be deleted, we recommend the following:
• MetaFrame 1.8 SP3, MetaFrame XP 1.0 SP1/FR1
Make settings in [Delete unfinished print jobs] in the registry. For details,
see the Readme file provided with MetaFrame.
• MetaFrame XP 1.0 FR2
Make settings in [Delete pending print jobs at logout] under [Printer Properties Management] of Citrix Management Console.
❖ MetaFrame's [Printer driver replication]
Using [Printer driver replication], you can distribute printer drivers across all
servers in a server farm. We strongly recommend testing this function in your
network environment before using it for your work.
• If the printer drivers are not properly copied, install them directly onto each
server.
296
Appendix
Cautions When Using Bluetooth Interface
Unit
The optional Bluetooth interface unit operation mode is set to [Public] as default.
If the setting is changed to [Private], only registered computers can use this printer via the Bluetooth interface unit.
Check the operation mode settings using Web Image Monitor or telnet.
For details about using Web Image Monitor, see p.164 “Using Web Image
Monitor”. For details about setting items, see Web Image Monitor Help.
For details about making operation mode settings using telnet, see p.185 “btconfig”.
297
Appendix
Information about Installed Applications
expat
Use of the software installed on this product, including the controller (hereinafter
“software”) and the expat Version 1.95.2 application software (hereinafter “expat
1.95.2”), is subject to the following conditions:
The product manufacturer provides warranty and support to the software of the
product including expat 1.95.2 and the product manufacturer allows the initial developer of expat 1.95.2 to be free from these obligations.
Copyright © 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
and Clark Cooper
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of
this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the
Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy,
modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
❒ Information on expat 1.95.2 is available at:
http://expat.sourceforge.net/
JPEG LIBRARY
• The software installed on this product is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
NetBSD
Copyright Notice of NetBSD
For all users to use this product:
298
Appendix
This product contains NetBSD operating system:
For the most part, the software constituting the NetBSD operating system is not
in the public domain; its authors retain their copyright.
The following text shows the copyright notice used for many of the NetBSD
source code. For exact copyright notice applicable for each of the files/binaries,
the source code tree must be consulted.
A full source code can be found at http://www.netbsd.org/.
Copyright © 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
A Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
B Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
C All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:
This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
and its contributors.
D Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its contributors
may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND
CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Authors Name List
All product names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective owners.
The following notices are required to satisfy the license terms of the software that
we have mentioned in this document:
• This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
299
Appendix
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan R. Stone for the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Manuel Bouyer.
• This product includes software developed by Charles Hannum.
• This product includes software developed by Charles M. Hannum.
• This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou.
• This product includes software developed by TooLs GmbH.
• This product includes software developed by Terrence R. Lambert.
• This product includes software developed by Adam Glass and Charles Hannum.
• This product includes software developed by Theo de Raadt.
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone and Jason R.
Thorpe for the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by the University of California,
Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory and its contributors.
• This product includes software developed by Christos Zoulas.
• This product includes software developed by Christopher G. Demetriou for
the NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed by Paul Kranenburg.
• This product includes software developed by Adam Glass.
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone.
• This product includes software developed by Jonathan Stone for the NetBSD
Project.
• This product includes software developed by Winning Strategies, Inc.
• This product includes software developed by Frank van der Linden for the
NetBSD Project.
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Frank
van der Linden
• This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Jason R.
Thorpe.
• The software was developed by the University of California, Berkeley.
• This product includes software developed by Chris Provenzano, the University of California, Berkeley, and contributors.
Samba(Ver 2.2.2-1.1)
Copyright (C) Andrew Tridgell 1994-1998
300
Appendix
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
RSA BSAFE®
• This product includes RSA BSAFE® cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security Inc.
• RSA is a registered trademark and BSAFE is a registered trademark of RSA
Security Inc.in the United States and/or other countries.
• RSA Security Inc. All rights reserved.
301
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising